Table of Contents 1.1.1 Purpose of the Manual

Transcription

Table of Contents
1.1.1
1.1.1.1
Purpose of the Manual............................................................................................................................1
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................1
1.1.2
Using This Manual ..................................................................................................................................1
1.1.3
Skill and Knowledge Requirements of the Installer ................................................................................2
1.1.4
Responsibility of the Various Trades ......................................................................................................2
1.1.5
Timeliness of Information........................................................................................................................3
This voluntary specification was developed by
representative members of AAMA as advisory
information and published as a public service.
AAMA disclaims all liability for the use,
application or adaptation of materials published
herein.
AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15
© Copyright 2015
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL 60173
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
E-Mail: [email protected]
Web Site: www.aamanet.org
PAGE 1-I
1.0 Introduction
This standard practice addresses the installation of windows and exterior glass doors (including Hinged and
Sliding Glass Doors) which are installed in commercial buildings. It includes information pertaining to both new
construction and replacement projects.
Important Note: Different types of windows and doors require specific installation techniques. The information
provided in this manual does not supersede installation instructions provided by the manufacturer.
Always
consult the manufacturer's instructions and/or detailed shop drawings for information specific to each project.
AAMA Standard Practice for Installation of Windows and Doors in Commercial Buildings
1.1.1
Purpose of the Manual
The specific objectives of this reference manual are to:
Promote consistent, high quality installations in the commercial markets, promoting energy efficiency, decreasing
installation deficiencies, maximizing product performance and minimizing callbacks, thereby lowering the overall
cost to the product manufacturer and building owner;
•
Provide employers of installers an additional method of evaluating a potential employee’s knowledge;
•
Improve the credibility of practicing installers by verifying the measurement of a specific body of
knowledge;
•
Promote installer safety practices.
1.1.1.1 Scope
This Reference Manual addresses windows, exterior sliding glass doors and terrace doors only. Storefront and
curtain wall products, profiles, and/or systems are frequently used in window and door openings, however, these
applications are outside the scope of this Manual. Refer to the AAMA Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual
SFM-1-87 and the AAMA Curtain Wall Manual MCWM-1-89 for Guide Specifications and Technical Data
applicable to storefront and curtain wall products, including installation guidelines.
1.1.2
Using This Manual
This manual was developed to provide information regarding the installation of windows and glass doors intended
for use in commercial buildings. The manual provides an overview of information relating to:
•
Selecting window and glass door product types and materials
•
Product performance testing and labeling
•
Performance requirements of windows and doors
•
Site inspection
PAGE 1-1
•
Specifications and codes
•
Measuring and ordering windows
•
Removal and installation of products
•
Final cleaning and inspection
•
1.1.3
Skill and Knowledge Requirements of the Installer
This manual assumes that the installer possesses the following basic knowledge and skills:
Basic measuring skills
•
Ability to read and understand various construction documents
•
An understanding of various building types and construction
•
An understanding of the proper use of tools normal to the construction trade
•
Awareness of the applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations
•
Awareness of OSHA Safety Standards
The designers and writers of this document attempted to include the basic information needed to install windows
in commercial buildings. However, it was impractical to include all information related to each product and its
design options. In the event that an installer has any questions or faces a situation not addressed in these
materials, it is imperative that such uncertainties be resolved through consultation with the responsible parties
before work is begun.
1.1.4
Responsibility of the Various Trades
For the purpose of this manual, a commercial installer is defined as someone who sets, anchors and seals, and/or
applies flashing and/or other accessory devices to windows and/or doors. No differentiation is expressed between
a new construction installer and a replacement (retrofit) installer in this manual.
Various individuals may perform many of the installer’s tasks and become responsible for the completed
installation. As an example, one person may apply flashing and/or accessories, another party could set and
anchor the window and yet another party could apply the building façade and apply the final seal around the
penetrations in the building.
Objectives of this Reference Manual are noted in Paragraph 1.1.1. The Manual is not intended to define any
individual trade’s scope of work, recommend appropriate trade jurisdiction on-site, pre-empt or replace union
training programs or those of affiliated organizations, nor supersede manufacturers’ installation instructions.
Although the installer is responsible for the quality of the work that he/she performs, others (building contractor,
owner/ developer, architect, etc.) are often the "approving authority" or "responsible party" that may make specific
decisions that affect the installation. The approving authority is responsible for coordination and checking the
quality of the work done by the various trades associated with the window/door. The construction sequence,
PAGE 1-2
proper coordination and proper integration of all of the various building components are essential to the long-term
performance of any completed installation and are the responsibility of the approving authority.
1.1.5
Timeliness of Information
Graphics and information contained in this manual were current at the time the text was written. The graphics
and information may have been superseded by current versions of the standards referenced. Always check the
manufacturer’s instructions and current information provided by the building and window and door industry for
updates.
Acknowledgments
This installation reference manual incorporates information and details offered by industry manufacturers and
their suppliers. Much of the information provided was incorporated into the text and graphics.
Gratitude is extended to each individual and the organizations they represent.
Notes:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________
PAGE 1-3
Table of Contents
2.1
Selecting the Right Window / Door Class and Grade .................................................................................1
2.2
Wind Loads .................................................................................................................................................1
2.2.1
2.3
Testing for Wind Loads .......................................................................................................................2
Water Resistance .......................................................................................................................................2
2.3.1
Testing Water Resistance...................................................................................................................2
2.3.2
What Gives a Window Water Resistance? .........................................................................................2
2.3.3
Factors Affecting Water Infiltration .....................................................................................................3
2.4
Windows and Energy ..................................................................................................................................3
2.5
Air Leakage .................................................................................................................................................4
2.5.1
Problems Associated with Air Leakage ..............................................................................................5
2.5.2
Rating Air Leakage .............................................................................................................................5
2.5.3
Reducing Air Leakage ........................................................................................................................5
2.6
Heat Transfer Through Conduction and Convection ..................................................................................6
2.6.1
Problems Associated with Conduction and Convection .....................................................................7
2.6.2
Rating Fenestration Insulation Value ..................................................................................................7
2.6.3
Reducing Conduction and Convection ...............................................................................................7
2.7
Solar Heat Gain/Solar Radiation ................................................................................................................8
2.7.1
Problems Associated with Solar Heat Gain ........................................................................................8
2.7.2
Rating Solar Heat Gain .......................................................................................................................9
2.7.3
Reducing Solar Heat Gain ..................................................................................................................9
2.8
Visible Transmittance .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.9
Condensation ........................................................................................................................................... 11
2.9.1
Problems Associated with Condensation ........................................................................................ 12
2.9.2
Other Factors Affecting Condensation ............................................................................................ 12
2.9.3
Rating Condensation ....................................................................................................................... 12
2.9.4
Reducing Condensation .................................................................................................................. 13
2.9.5
Checking HVAC Requirements ....................................................................................................... 13
2.10
Energy Efficient Glazing And Framing Considerations ........................................................................... 13
2.10.1
Low-e Coatings ................................................................................................................................ 14
2.10.2
Tints ................................................................................................................................................. 15
2.10.3
Suspended Films ............................................................................................................................. 15
2.10.4
Gas-Filled Units ............................................................................................................................... 16
2.10.5
Framing Materials ............................................................................................................................ 16
2.10.6
Spacers ............................................................................................................................................ 16
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 2- I
2.11
Sound....................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.12
Seismic Performance............................................................................................................................... 18
2.13
Impact Resistance ................................................................................................................................... 18
2.13.1
Hurricane (Missile) Impact ............................................................................................................... 18
2.13.2
Bomb Blast and Ballistic Impact ...................................................................................................... 19
2.14
Safety Considerations.............................................................................................................................. 19
2.14.1
Fire and Emergency Escape ........................................................................................................... 19
2.14.2
Safety Glass..................................................................................................................................... 19
2.14.3
Insect Screen Safety ........................................................................................................................ 19
2.14.4
Protection Screens .......................................................................................................................... 20
2.15
Window Labels ........................................................................................................................................ 20
2.15.1
Temporary Labels ............................................................................................................................ 20
2.15.2
Permanent Labels (Certification) ..................................................................................................... 21
2.15.3
Label Removal ................................................................................................................................. 21
2.15.4
Child Safety Labels .......................................................................................................................... 22
AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15
Page 2- ii
2.0 Design Considerations
Windows and doors protect the building and its occupants from environmental forces such as wind, rain and
temperature. The combination of wind pressure and driving rain can force water around the seals between the
operable sash and frames, gasket joinery, weep holes, sealant joints and small pin holes in the surrounding
building materials.
This manual is not intended to train installers on how to select and purchase windows and doors, but to introduce
some of the design considerations involved in making these decisions.
2.1
Selecting the Right Window / Door Class and Grade
Window and door ratings are based on a number of performance requirements including uniform structural
loading capabilities (wind load), water penetration, air infiltration and resistance to forced entry. These
performance requirements are based on minimum standards established by three different trade associations
including the American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). Performance requirements and testing
are defined in greater detail in Chapter 7 of this manual.
AAMA rates windows and doors by performance class and performance grade based on the ability of a product to
meet specific criteria. Selecting the right product class and grade is the responsibility of the architect or contractor.
When selecting a window or glass door, it is very important to balance all performance criteria including air
leakage, water penetration, structural adequacy, thermal performance, acoustic performance with operator type.
The structural requirements dictate the window selection as they need to meet the specific performance grade or
design pressure for the location, elevation and exposure. The structural requirements may sometimes also dictate
a material or frame profile that conflict with aesthetics or the use of the most thermally efficient frame. This conflict
may result in the relocation or revised orientation of windows and glass doors in order to meet both the structural
and thermal needs of the project. When selecting products for installation on a given project, consider selecting
the best products and materials to meet as closely as possible all of the specified building requirements. Other
important considerations relate to cost. A client must consider performance and cost before selecting the best
window or door available for the site. The architect, specifier, developer and/or builder in consultation with the
client must address site-specific requirements for product selection.
2.2
Wind Loads
One of the factors used in determining the correct window or door is the product's ability to withstand wind loads.
Understanding wind loads and how they affect buildings is a complex issue involving a number of factors. When
establishing performance expectations for a product, the specifier must consider the geographical location of the
building, building exposure, terrain, the height of the building, local wind speed and other factors. These factors
are used to establish a design load and performance grade (PG). The performance grade defines the minimum
uniform design pressure (DP) a product must withstand in order to qualify. This pressure is expressed in pounds
per square foot (psf).
Page 2- 1
2.2.1
Testing for Wind Loads
Testing products for wind load resistance is typically done in a laboratory using a test chamber capable of
producing both a positive and negative static pressure. A uniform load test pressure is generated causing the
frame, glass and components to react in a way similar to what can be expected in the field due to actual wind
pressures.
When testing windows and doors, deflection readings are recorded to determine the amount of movement up to
and including the full design load.
A structural test pressure (STP) (1.5 times the design load for windows and doors) is also performed to achieve a
factor of safety. When structural load tests are performed, additional readings are recorded to determine the
amount of permanent set. Permanent set is the amount of residual deformation a unit experiences during testing.
No glass breakage or permanent damage to the hardware is allowed during structural load testing.
2.3
Water Resistance
Water resistance test pressures have a direct correlation to the design pressure that a product must withstand in
order to meet a specific class and performance grade. The selection of the right class and performance grade is
very important. Improper product selection and/or installation can result in water infiltration, which may cause
damage.
2.3.1
Testing Water Resistance
Windows and doors are tested for water resistance by spraying the exterior surface with water at a rate of 5
gallons per square foot/per hour. This water application rate is equivalent to a rainfall of 8 inches per hour. The
test is conducted under a specified static test pressure. When applied to the window or door test sample, this
static pressure simulates the load applied to a product by the actual wind. Wind-driven rain tends to force the
water around the seals between the operating sash or ventilator and frame, and through weep holes. Water is
typically forced from high-pressure areas into areas with lower pressure.
2.3.2
What Gives a Window Water Resistance?
Typically windows and doors are designed with either compression seals or sliding seals, which are commonly
called weather seals. The design of the weather seal plays an important role when considering both water
penetration and air infiltration. Compression seals are generally used in projected windows, casements, some
pivoted windows and others. Sliding seals are generally used in hung windows and sliding windows and doors.
Compression-sealed products are often designed to be relatively airtight on the inside and are often designed with
pressure-equalized cavities. Sliding seal products (such as vertical and horizontal sliding products) must be
designed to allow for the sash to operate with a sliding motion; allowing for this type of operation results in seals
that are typically not quite as tight as compression-sealed products. The use of these seals and the product's
capability to be pressure equalized has a direct impact on the height of the inside sill leg of a product. Sliding-seal
Page 2- 2
products have an upturned sill leg on the interior side, which is generally higher than compression-seal products.
Furthermore, these products often have additional features designed into their sill, which allow for the collection
and drainage of water.
2.3.3
Factors Affecting Water Infiltration
Manufacturers are constantly testing and developing new products for improved water performance. One solution
to solving water infiltration problems is proper product selection. Understanding what can be expected of windows
and doors in terms of water performance is important to the installer, regardless of whether they participate in the
product selection process. It is typically the responsibility of the architect or contractor to select products for the
project; however, if the installer has concerns regarding the products selected, he shall consult with the approving
authority.
Install only those products designed to meet the performance levels expected on the job. Comparing the water
performance capabilities of the products intended for the job with the project specifications can greatly reduce the
potential for water damage due to improper product selection.
Use products only on projects that have performance requirements equal to, or less than, the rated performance
of the product. Understanding these design parameters will help the installer install products that maintain
performance at the maximum level.
Performance requirements, testing and product ratings are defined in greater detail in Chapter 7. The proper
selection of product ratings includes site-specific requirements that must be addressed by the architect, specifier,
developer and/or builder.
Obtaining the optimum performance of a product is often based on the installer's knowledge of proper installation
procedures.
This manual is designed to educate the installer and others on the appropriate methods of
installation of windows and doors.
Water can easily be forced through cracks and holes around window and door installations from pressure
generated by forces such as wind (pressure differentials). Testing has shown that water can enter voids in the
seals, fastener penetration holes and other cracks with minimal pressure. This is why it is important to follow the
installation procedures completely and conduct a thorough check of the finished work.
2.4
Windows and Energy
Many options are available to improve a product's energy performance. Learning how products lose and gain heat
allows one to choose the right products for a particular job. There are three main ways that heat energy is
transferred through windows and doors:
•
Air Leakage
Page 2- 3
•
Conduction and Convection
•
Solar Heat Gain
2.5
Air Leakage
Air leakage, also called infiltration (see Figure 2-1), describes air flowing through and around parts of the sash
and frame. In the summer, outside air brings heat from the outdoors into the building. The cooled inside air is
warmed by the outside air or is lost by exfiltration to the outdoors. The incoming air can also carry moisture, which
can get trapped inside the wall or raise the humidity level in the building. During winter, the opposite happens;
heated air is lost to the outside and cold air is drawn indoors from the outside. Air leakage is driven by pressure.
The greater the difference in pressures between the interior and exterior of a building, the higher the potential for
air exchange, or leakage.
Other pressure effects are less apparent. In a heated building in winter, the "stack effect" creates higher interior
pressure at the top as warm air rises within the building. This pushes air up and out of cracks at the top of the
building, and draws it in at the bottom.
Heating and cooling duct systems and ventilation fans create pressure differences by pulling air from one part of
the building and, in the case of heating and cooling ducts, supplying it to another part of the building. Doors and
windows can be a pathway for air to be pulled in or pushed out by these pressures.
Aside from controlling pressures in the building, air leakage can be decreased by installing relatively airtight
products. Note that cracks will leak more when the product is under greater pressure (as from strong wind or high
building pressure). In addition, joints may increase in size under strong pressure, allowing even more air to pass
through.
Over the years, windows and doors have become more and more energy efficient.
Energy efficiency is
accomplished in a number of ways, but one significant change has been the reduction of air infiltration through
windows and doors. The allowable air infiltration per window has in many cases been reduced by 60 percent, and
in some cases, as much as 90 percent from what was acceptable 20 to 30 years ago.
When new energy efficient windows and doors are installed in existing buildings, remember that the existing
HVAC system should be checked, and in many cases adjusted (re-balanced) to accommodate the new
efficiencies. If rebalancing is not accomplished, negative pressures can be created within the building.
Negative pressures can be caused when the existing HVAC unit is still trying to draw make-up air from the
existing living spaces and common areas, yet there is less volume allowed from around the windows. When the
allowable air infiltration is reduced in volume, a higher pressure (negative) is created within the structure. The
make-up air must come from some place and will typically come from other small holes or cracks in other places
Page 2- 4
around the building. This often causes whistling and howling noises and water infiltration in places that never
occurred in the history of the building before.
Although it is not the responsibility of the window/door installer to adjust the HVAC system, advise the approving
authority that the newly installed energy efficient products may require the adjustment of the HVAC system. Rebalancing can often result in significant energy savings.
2.5.1
Problems Associated with Air Leakage
•
Heat loss in winter
•
Heat gain in summer
•
Occasional increased indoor humidity in summer, which in turn increases cooling requirements
•
Drafts and discomfort for the occupants
•
Higher utility bills
2.5.2
Rating Air Leakage
New windows and doors are often rated for air leakage. This is based on a measurement of the cubic feet per
minute (CFM) of air that flows through a windows and doors in relation to its total square foot area. Improper
installation adds to a product's air leakage. Take care to follow the manufacturers' instructions and the guidelines
in this manual to avoid creating new passages for air flow.
2.5.3
Reducing Air Leakage
The 101 standard/specification limits air leakage rates for specific operator types and classifications.
Install the products properly and seal them to the building air or vapor barrier (if provided), or to the accessory
materials used on the given project.
Consider the particular climate and conditions. A low air-leakage rating may be particularly important for a product
installed in a harsh climate or in the path of strong prevailing winds.
Page 2- 5
Figure 2-1 Air Infiltration and Exfiltration
2.6
Heat Transfer Through Conduction and Convection
Another way heat passes through a window or door is by conduction. Imagine holding a hot coffee mug; the
outside of the mug will feel warm because heat from the coffee passes through the solid mug. This is conduction,
the passage of heat through a solid material from molecule to molecule. If the mug is a tin cup, it cannot be held
for long because metal transfers heat more quickly than ceramic or foam. The same principle applies to windows.
Heat passes through the glass and frame. The composition of the window will determine how quickly the heat
passes through.
Window thermal performance is also affected by another heat transfer mechanism called convection. Convection
is the transfer of heat by the movement of gases or liquid. As warm air inside a building comes in contact with a
cold window, it cools and sinks, creating a convection current of air past the window. On the outside, wind blows
against the glass. In both cases, this air movement on the surface of the glass disturbs the air film next to the
glass, which is a component of the window's insulating value. Still air is a good insulator, but moving air is not, so
convection currents cause quicker conduction of heat through the window.
Conduction is driven by temperature differences. When there is a difference in temperature from one side of the
product to the other, heat will pass through the glass and frame. Heat transmission increases when there is a
greater temperature difference between the inside and outside (see Figure 2-2).
Manufacturers can improve a product's insulating value with multiple lites, gas fills, low-e coatings and improved
frames and spacers. All of these slow down the conduction of heat through the window/door (see Figure 2-2).
Installers can help maintain this resistance to conduction by installing the window or door in such a manner that
the entire building's weather barrier is continuous.
Page 2- 6
Figure 2-2 Conduction and Convection
2.6.1
Problems Associated with Conduction and Convection
•
Heat loss in winter
•
Heat gain in summer
•
Higher utility bills
•
Discomfort felt by occupants sitting near a cold surface in winter (often misperceived as draftiness)
•
Condensation on the product is often caused when warm air from inside the building contacts a cold window
or door surface in winter
2.6.2
Rating Fenestration Insulation Value
Insulating value is rated in terms of U-factor, which indicates the rate at which heat flows through a product for
each degree of temperature difference between one side and the other. (U-factor is the inverse of R-value - that
is, U-factor = 1/R-value.) The whole product U-factor, as determined in accordance with AAMA 1503, accounts for
heat flow through the entire assembly, including the frame. This is important to consider, as the glass edges and
frame usually have higher U-factors (faster heat transmission) than the center of the glass. The lower the Ufactor, the greater a window's resistance to heat flow and the better its insulating value.
2.6.3
Reducing Conduction and Convection
The needs of the particular building owner and climate where the products will be used must be considered. The
lower the U-factor, the greater the energy savings will be. Lower U-factors result in improved energy efficiency in
both summer and winter. However, in very hot climates, blocking solar heat gain can be more important for
keeping the building cool in summer. It is also important to balance solar heat gain and U-Factor, or minimizing
heat flow through the fenestration, for keeping the building cool and minimizing energy costs.
Page 2- 7
2.7
Solar Heat Gain/Solar Radiation
The third major mode of heat transfer through windows and doors is solar heat gain radiation. Radiation is the
transfer of heat from one solid to another through electromagnetic waves. It is the movement of heat through
space without being conducted from molecule to molecule (conduction) or carried in a gas or liquid (convection).
For instance, radiant heat can be felt by facing a campfire, although the surrounding air is still cold. All body parts
within "sight" of the fire's heat will be warmed, but those parts away from the fire will remain cool.
Objects are constantly radiating heat to other objects. In fact, people radiate heat to cooler objects around them,
including cold windows and doors. This radiant heat loss from living bodies can have a significant effect on
comfort. But the biggest source of radiant energy is the sun. When the sun's radiation strikes glass, some of it is
reflected back outside, some is absorbed and the rest passes through the glass to the inside of the building. How
much solar radiation passes through a product depends on the time of year (see Figure 2-3), the direction the
product faces, how much external shading there is and the ability of the glass to reflect solar heat.
In the winter, solar heat gain is usually welcome, as it adds heat to the building. However, in the summer, solar
heat gain through south-, west- and east-facing windows and doors is usually a major source of heat buildup.
Windows and doors with tints, suspended films and spectrally selective low-e coatings keep more solar radiation
out of the building than products with single pane clear glass.
Figure 2-3 Summer/Winter Path of Sun
(Typical U.S. 20º-40º Latitude)
2.7.1
•
Problems Associated with Solar Heat Gain
Heat gain in summer
•
Discomfort for occupants sitting in the path of solar heat gain through the glass
•
Fading of drapes and upholstery from the sun's radiation
Page 2- 8
2.7.2
Rating Solar Heat Gain
The solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) indicates the percentage of solar radiation that passes through a product
(including the frame). The glass, however, has a much more significant impact on the SHGC than the type of
frame material. Shown in Table 2-1 are various SHGC values using different glazing options. The products with
the lowest SHGC keep the most direct solar heat out of the building.
Solar Heat
Glazing Type
Gain
Visible
Coefficient
Transmittance
(SHGC)
Clear Glass
Low E Hard
Coat (e ù 0.20)
Low E Soft
Coat (e ù 0.08)
0.77
82%
0.71
75%
0.62
78%
0.41
72%
0.35
23%
Spectrally
Selective Low
E
1/8” Bronze
Reflective
Table 2-1 Solar Heat Gain and Visible Transmittance through Various Types of Glazing
2.7.3
Reducing Solar Heat Gain
•
The local climate and conditions must be considered. Solar gain is not as significant for north-facing products.
•
The placement of windows and doors in the building to take advantage of solar gain in cold and mixed
For south-, west- and east-facing products, consider purchasing products with a low SHGC in hot climates.
climates must be considered. South-facing windows and doors capture the most winter sun, and overhangs
(see Figure 2-4), and sunscreens can help keep the higher summer sun from striking glazing products.
•
A low SHGC decreases solar heat gain in winter as well as summer. A lower SHGC is important in warm
climates where summer cooling is more significant than winter heating. However, in very cold climates, it may
be beneficial to choose a window with a higher SHGC.
•
Glass that restricts solar heat gain often restricts visible light from passing through the product as well.
Consider spectrally selective glazing products that let in the wavelengths of visible light while blocking out the
wavelengths of solar energy that carry only heat.
•
Use external shading (awnings, landscaping, sunscreens) to reduce the amount of solar radiation from
reaching the window or door.
Page 2- 9
•
Insulating glass with suspended films that have metallic oxide coatings are designed to manage solar heat
•
The commercialization of switchable dynamic glazing technologies allow for changes in the SHGC through
gain (see Sections 2.10 and 2.10.2)
changing environmental conditions over the course of the day. This provides maximization of benefits of solar
heat gain reductions yet allows changes in visible light transmission in low light conditions.
Figure 2-4 Effect of an Overhang during Summer
2.8
Visible Transmittance
One of the main purposes for putting windows in a building is to provide daylight and a view for the occupants
within. However, some characteristics that increase the energy efficiency of windows can decrease their ability to
perform this task. For instance, double pane glass allows a little bit less daylight to come through the window than
single pane glass. While this amount of reduction in Visible Transmittance (VT) is hardly noticeable, tints and films
can further decrease the VT.
A lower solar heat gain coefficient usually comes with the trade-off of lower visible transmittance. However, new
technology allows manufacturers to make windows with the best of both worlds. Spectrally selective glass
maintains high transmittance of visible light wavelengths while restricting wavelengths that are primarily heat. In
some cases it is not important to have high VT. Some people like the extra privacy afforded by a darkly tinted
window and don't mind the decrease in light transmission, especially in very sunny, hot areas. In office buildings,
where controlling glare is very important, a low VT is often desirableit is important to disperse light throughout the
internal space of the structure.
The VT rating indicates the percentage of visible light hitting the window that is transmitted through to the inside. It
is expressed as a value between 0 and 1.
The VT of windows and doors can be provided for the entire
window/door, including the frame or the glass alone, which will show a higher percentage of light transmittance.
Page 2- 10
2.9
Condensation
Windows and doors (even relatively efficient ones) usually have higher U-factors than insulated walls, ceilings,
and floors. In winter, this means the interior sides of windows and doors are usually colder than other surfaces of
the building.
This makes them a prime target for condensation, which occurs when warm moist air comes in contact with a
cooler surface (see Figure 2-5). Windows don’t cause condensation and there are no condensation-free windows.
When condensation occurs (or has the potential to occur), it is dependent on a number of factors.
Warm air can hold more moisture than cool air. The warm air cools as it hits the frame and glass, and the water
vapor condenses out. The colder the interior plane of the window, the more likely water will condense there.
Condensation is visible on glass because the moisture cannot pass through it like more porous materials such as
wood, drywall or brick. AAMA provides humidity level guidelines, tables and additional condensation information
in other related technical publications (refer to the AAMA Publication Store at www.aamanet.org).
Air leakage can also contribute to condensation problems. If warm moist interior air leaks through cracks around
the window or door in winter, condensation can occur within the wall cavity, causing mold to grow on the wall and
window frame, potentially leading to material degradation. In buildings where windows are being replaced, this is
another good reason to re-balance the HVAC system.
Another place where condensation can occur is between the panes of a double pane unit of glass. This is an
indication that the seal that holds the panes together has failed. Seal failure may allow insulating gases to escape
and permit moist air to penetrate the air cavity, thus reducing the energy efficiency of the window or door. The
glass often becomes cloudy, obstructing the view, and the glass generally needs to be replaced. (See Section
2.9.3 for window condensation ratings.)
Page 2- 11
Figure 2-5 Causes of Condensation
2.9.1
Problems Associated with Condensation
Small amounts of condensation on the coldest days are not a major problem. However, severe condensation has
been reported to cause health concerns and cosmetic or even structural damage to a building.
•
Condensation can contribute to the growth of mold, discoloring the product assembly and may trigger
allergies in sensitive people.
•
Condensation can damage painted surfaces and promote rot in wood members.
•
Condensation can damage not only the window or door, but also the wall in which it is installed.
•
Install products in areas susceptible to condensation that won’t support mold growth, deteriorate or discolor.
2.9.2
Other Factors Affecting Condensation
Since condensation is associated with windows and doors, it is often the products that are seen as the "problem."
However, condensation can actually be the result of any number of factors, including:
•
Relative humidity (invisible water vapor) found inside the building
•
The control of humidity or the amount of moisture in the air (especially in hospitals, museums and other
commercial buildings where the humidity levels are exceedingly high)
•
The type of building materials used (wood, concrete and wallboard all release moisture).
•
The length of time the building was exposed to moisture (rain) before it was closed up. This can trap moisture
within the building
•
Plants, cooking activities, showers, non-vented fireplace use and even breathing releases moisture into the
building
•
Interior temperature
•
Pressures that increase air leakage
•
Outdoor humidity and temperature
•
Solar radiation
•
The direction the product faces
2.9.3
(re-balance the HVAC system)
Rating Condensation
The Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF), developed by AAMA, allows window purchasers to compare the
potential for serious condensation on different products (see AAMA 1503, "Voluntary Test Method for Thermal
Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows").
Selecting a proper CRF involves determining the average inside relative humidity and the exterior design
temperature. The exterior design temperature can be obtained using ASHRAE tables, which give city-by-city
numbers.
Page 2- 12
2.9.4
Reducing Condensation
The window or door purchaser or the installer cannot address most of the factors causing condensation.
However, one can choose a product that minimizes the likelihood of the problems, especially in buildings or
rooms that are prone to condensation problems. In general, bathroom and kitchen windows are most prone to
condensation where humidity is higher due to the use of showers, dryers, and cooking devices. Especially for
these areas, the following precautions can be taken:
•
Windows and doors can be selected with a low U-factor.
•
Windows and doors can be selected with warm-edge spacers and insulating frames to help reduce
•
Non-thermal metal frames (frames without thermal barriers), which conduct heat quickly, can be avoided.
•
Building owners may install and use exhaust fans in bathrooms and kitchens to remove excessive interior
condensation.
Frames with a high Condensation Resistance Factor can be selected.
moisture, and to avoid adding more humidity in winter.
Single pane glass is prone to condensation. Products with lower U-factors (such as double pane glass and
glazing products with gas fills and low-e coatings) have a warmer interior surface in winter, which reduces
condensation. However, because the heat transfer is greater at the edges of the glass, some of these products
may still experience condensation around the edge. Products with "warm-edge spacers" and insulated frames
can help keep the inside surfaces of the whole assembly warmer, thereby reducing condensation.
2.9.5
Checking HVAC Requirements
When replacing drafty, single glazed non-thermal windows and doors within existing buildings, it is the
responsibility of the building owners to have the HVAC requirements checked and re-balanced (see Section 2.5).
Using the relatively airtight products available on the market today can have an impact on the heating/air
conditioning requirements of a building; therefore, some energy savings may be available.
It is the responsibility of the building owner to advise tenants that because air changes will not occur as frequently
within an airtight building, the potential for trapping moisture-laden air is much more significant. This, too, will have
an impact on the occurrence of condensation. Some building codes require a specified number of air changes
within the building.
It is the responsibility of the approving authority and the building owner to check the
requirements to determine if another means of allowing for building air exchanges is necessary.
2.10
Energy Efficient Glazing And Framing Considerations
To improve the efficiency of windows and doors, manufacturers often offer a number of options which have an
impact on the glass and frame. They can customize a product to achieve specific performance values of
conduction resistance, solar heat gain, visible transmittance, condensation resistance and air leakage. Some of
the improvements may be applied to the glass, such as low-emittance (low-e) coatings and tints, while others
occur within the glass unit such as suspended films and gas fills. The frame and glass edge can be improved by
Page 2- 13
using less conductive materials, designing in a thermal break, or using warm-edge spacers between the lites of
glass.
2.10.1
Low-e Coatings
A low-e coating is a translucent microscopic metal oxide layer applied to a surface of one or more lites of glass.
The coating allows certain wavelengths of radiation to pass through more easily than others. A low-e coating can
improve the insulating value of a window or door as much as adding a third lite of glass. A typical hightransmission low-e coating lets in heat from the sun, but helps reflect the building's heat back inside. These
coatings are excellent for cold climates, and are particularly useful for south-facing windows and doors. Coatings
are frequently placed on the inside of the exterior lite of glass (see surface #2 in Figure 2-6).
Some windows have spectrally selective low-e coatings. These windows are good for mixed climates where both
heating and cooling are needed. They help restrict the heat energy from the sun but allow much of the light to
come through, which is beneficial in summer, and keeps the building's heat from radiating outside, which is
beneficial in winter (see Figure 2-7).
Figure 2-6 Anatomy of an IG Unit
Page 2- 14
Figure 2-7 Low-e Coatings – Winter and Summer
2.10.2
Tints
Various tints are available to reduce glare from the outside on sunny days and to reduce the amount of solar gain
through the glass. If applied films are installed, advise the approving authority that tinting plastic films are
available; however, building owners should be aware that tinting may result in increased heat build-up within the
glass lites, thus increasing the potential for glass breakage due to heat stress. Some window and door
manufacturers will consider their glass warranties void if such tinted films are applied to their products.
There are two three types of tints:
•
Tints that restrict light as well as heat gain. These are typically the bronze and gray tints.
•
Tints that reduce heat gain while allowing more light than other tints to be transmitted into the building are
•
Switchable dynamic glazing offers changeable tints as sunlight conditions change. These reduce solar heat
called spectrally selective. These tints typically appear light blue or green.
gain, maximize VT and reduce or eliminate the need for blinds and light diffusion materials that are used to
control glare.
•
Reflective coatings or films are also often used for commercial buildings to reduce glare and heat gain. These are
similar to reflective (mirror) coatings used on sunglasses. Like standard tinted glazing, these coatings can reduce
light and visibility through the window.
2.10.3
Suspended Films
Low emissivity suspended films can also be an option in applications where energy efficiency and improved
comfort are a consideration. This option involves the use of wavelength-selective films (see Figure 2-8) which are
suspended between the layers of glass. The films block out most of the unwanted ultraviolet (UV) waves, while
controlling solar heat gain and keeping the buildings interior heat inside. Suspended films are available with a
number of options, including the use of warm-edge spacers, gas fills and multiple lites of glass.
Page 2- 15
Figure 2-8 Suspended Films
2.10.4
Gas-Filled Units
The dead-air space between panes in double- or triple-paned glass lowers its U-factor. In a standard, doublepane window or door, it is the still air between the panes, as well as the film of air on the outside surfaces of the
glass, that provides most of the insulating value.
To further improve thermal performance, manufacturers often fill the space between the panes with inert and
nontoxic gases that insulate better than air. Inert gases typically used are:
•
Argon — common and relatively inexpensive, is designed for insulating glazing units with gas spaces
between 3/8” and 5/8”.
•
Krypton — more effective than argon, but more expensive, is designed for insulating glazing units with gas
spaces 3/8” or smaller.
•
2.10.5
Framing Materials
The frame material and style also have an effect on a product's energy efficiency. In double-pane windows and
doors, conduction is often higher through the frame than through the glass. Frame materials are discussed further
in Chapter 3.
2.10.6
Spacers
Many variations of edge design have been tried over the years. Currently the design most used by manufacturers
incorporates spacers and polymer sealants. A spacer separates the layers of glass, and sealant is applied around
the entire perimeter. A desiccant is included in the spacer to absorb any residual moisture between the lites after
sealing the perimeter (see Figure 2-9).
In connection with the sealant, the spacer performs several functions. It helps to accommodate stress induced by
thermal expansion and pressure differences; it resists the passage of water vapor into the space between the
Page 2- 16
lites; and it helps keep any insulating gases, such as argon or krypton, from leaking out. Some examples of
spacers are:
•
Aluminum
•
Stainless steel
•
Improved design metal
•
Insulating silicone foam, extruded vinyl or pultruded fiberglass
•
Thermal breaks/barriers incorporated into metal spacers
Figure 2-9 Warm Edge Insulating Glass Spacers
2.11
Sound
Commercial windows and doors are sometimes rated for sound transmission. An Outdoor-Indoor Transmission
Class (OITC) rating provides a single number rating for transportation noise. A Sound Transmission Class (STC)
rating provides a single number rating for use with speech, radio, television and similar sources of noise through
interior partitions.
The higher the sound rating, the more isolation the products will provide against noise. The sound rating of an
assembly can be increased by using products with low air infiltration rates.
Page 2- 17
Insulating glass units with unequal glass thickness, laminated glass or gas fills can also be used to improve the
acoustical performance. A storm window can be added to a prime window, or a dual window system could be
used to increase the sound rating.
Proper installation and sealing of windows and doors is also important. The performance of an installed product
can be affected by the surrounding wall and building construction.
2.12
•
Seismic Performance
Certain areas of the country are prone to seismic movement caused by earthquakes. Commercial projects
may have the added requirement of seismic performance, which is the ability to handle specific amounts of
movement. Whenever buildings are located in areas where this kind of movement is expected, consider the
use of special designs which will address seismic requirements.
•
•
When products are required to withstand seismic movement, the job specifications will clearly state the
expected performance criterion and include the anticipated amount of movement between floors both
horizontally and vertically. Window and door designers can allow for this kind of movement by using
accessories and special anchor clips. Always consult with the manufacturer to determine the additional
precautions necessary to ensure the installed system will perform as intended.
•
For more information on seismic performance and testing, obtain a copy of AAMA 501.4 and 501.6.
2.13
Impact Resistance
The ability of glass and frames to resist various types of impact is becoming more and more prevalent. There are
basically two types of impact a product may be required to sustain. They involve either natural hazards due to
storms or man made hazards like bomb blasts and ballistics.
2.13.1
Hurricane (Missile) Impact
After several disastrous hurricanes recently struck in south Florida and other costal areas, building code officials
responded by developing and adopting requirements for both small and large missile impact caused by wind born
debris.
To meet these requirements, window/door manufacturers test their products to meet various missile types and a
range of cyclical loads up to and including design load. Impact resistance tests involve shooting a wood 2x4 or
pieces of steel through cannons designed to hit the window or doo in specific areas. Once the product is
impacted, cyclical static loads are applied. Products must be able to withstand the impact and all cyclical loading
without the glass falling out of the frame, or tearing more than a specified amount in order to meet the
performance requirements.
Page 2- 18
2.13.2
Bomb Blast and Ballistic Impact
Bomb blast and ballistic resistance (gun fire) are two other optional tests performed on windows and doors. Units
requiring bomb blast and ballistic resistance are more prevalent in government office buildings and other high risk
projects.
The type of product used in these types of buildings will be based on the severity of the blast or ballistic
requirements. For these projects, glazing is commonly made up of a series of glass lites incorporating an
interlayer. Films are also sometimes field-applied to the glass. Consult with the original glass supplier before
applying films to existing glass.
2.14
Safety Considerations
There are several critical safety issues that impact the design and function of various windows and doors:
•
Fire and Egress
•
Safety Glass
•
Insect Screen Safety
•
Security Screens (Protection Screens)
2.14.1
Fire and Emergency Escape
Building codes usually specify that all bedrooms in the first three stories of a building need at least one operable
window or exterior door approved for emergency escape or rescue. This escape path must open directly onto a
public street, alley, yard or court. An emergency escape window (also known as an egress window) must be
operable from the inside without the use of tools. (Egress requirements are covered in greater detail in Section
9.4.)
2.14.2
Safety Glass
Most codes require safety glass where a window or door (with glass) may be subject to human impact. (Safety
glass is covered in more detail in Chapter 9, Section 9.5.)
2.14.3
Insect Screen Safety
Insect screens prevent the passage of insects, not children. In multi-story commercial buildings, the latches that
keep the screens in place may allow for easy removal for cleaning and storage. These latches will not hold up
under the weight of a small child. Additionally, screen mesh can be cut, torn, and kicked out of the screen retainer
tracks.
Thousands of children are injured or die in the United States due to accidental falls from unprotected window
openings. If the building owner asks about screen safety, recommend the following:
•
Whenever possible, open the windows from the top rather than the bottom.
•
If the windows are opened from the bottom, only open them 4" or less.
Page 2- 19
•
Do not place furniture that a child could climb on in front of an unguarded window.
•
In high-rise buildings, consider using window guards to protect children from falls.
•
If window guards are installed, make sure they are made of strong materials, installed correctly and in
accordance with local building and/or fire codes.
•
Never attach a child protection guard to a window frame that is rotten or loose.
•
Remember that window screens are meant to deter insects, not children. They can give a false sense of
security and are not meant to prevent a child from falling.
2.14.4
Protection Screens
In areas where security is important, protection screens (also known as security screens) can be applied over the
openings on the lower floors to keep intruders out. They can also be applied to windows on upper floors to protect
against glass breakage due to flying debris. Screens are typically offered in three classes defined as light,
medium, or heavy. The ratings are based on the level of protection desired and the screen’s ability to meet
specific test criteria.
Although these protection screens are great for keeping unwanted people out and avoiding glass breakage,
protection screens and padlocks can also be a hindrance to fire department personnel who are trying to gain
access to the building. Building owners must weigh the importance of intruder protection, while considering the
ability of firemen to enter (or escape from) the burning building. Always consult with local codes for egress
requirements.
Installers must also be aware of problems caused by improperly attaching screens to the window frames.
Attaching screens to the window frames may cause both improper operation and water infiltration. Whenever
possible, attach the protection screen to the surrounding construction.
2.15
Window Labels
AAMA provides uniform ways to evaluate products for performance. Labels provide the information needed by the
designer, installer and consumer to compare performance ratings, as well as its physical specifications and
compliance with standards.
2.15.1
Temporary Labels
Many new windows and doors carry temporary labels that indicate the energy specifications for the product.
AAMA WINS Label
At the request of building code officials, AAMA developed a new temporary label. The AAMA Window
Inspection and Notification System (WINS) label may include information on product ratings, anchoring
Page 2- 20
requirements, installation instructions and special product qualifications, such as approval by local code
evaluation services.
2.15.2
Permanent Labels (Certification)
Permanent labels provide for performance and manufacturer tracking for the life of the window. The labels are
typically attached in a location unseen when the window is closed. AAMA also provides the test procedures and
laboratory accreditation necessary to rate windows for permanent labels. AAMA Window Certification Label
The certification label shows that the window complies with a certain class and minimum grade (its ability to
withstand wind loads, and meets a given water resistance and air infiltration rate). Independent third-party
laboratories (accredited by AAMA) test the performance of windows and doors for the manufacturer, following test
procedures outlined in the standard/specification known as ANSI/AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/1.S. 2/A440–08, or its
current successor.
The AAMA label (see Figure 2-10) has a four-part code, which indicates the product type, performance class,
performance grade and maximum size tested. The product type indicates the window style, such as casement
window or hinged glass doors. The performance class shows the type of building for which the window was
designed.
The performance grade gives the design pressure. In order to obtain an AAMA label, windows must meet the
minimum design pressure for their performance class.
Windows can also be tested at higher pressures to receive a higher design pressure (grade) rating. Use the
performance grade to check the rated performance of a product against the required structural performance in the
architectural specifications.
The maximum size tested may seem like a minor detail when looking at a window's label. However, the size of the
window can have a great effect on its structural capability.
Comment [r1]: Label example should be
updated. Staff Update
Figure 2-10 Sample AAMA Label
2.15.3
Label Removal
The AAMA certification label is permanent and is to be left on the window. The label is usually located on the
inside of the frame, where it is out of sight when the window is closed.
Page 2- 21
Temporary labels, or labels from other state or local organizations, are removed after the window is inspected.
When removing temporary labels, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Use extreme caution when using razor
blades to remove labels as they can scratch the glass and they can also cause bodily injury.
2.15.4
Child Safety Labels
Most new window screens, such as insect screens and sunscreens, carry a child safety label, indicating a fall
hazard warning.
This label indicates that the screen is not a safety device to prevent children from falling out. The label is
permanent and is affixed to the screen frame where it can be seen when the window is open. Examples of screen
labels are shown below (see Figure 2-11).
Notes:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-11 Child Safety Label
Page 2- 22
Table of Contents
3.1 Window Components .......................................................................................................................................1
3.2 Wall Framing Around Windows ........................................................................................................................2
3.3 Window Materials .............................................................................................................................................3
3.3.1 Characteristics of Window Frame Materials .............................................................................................3
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 3- I
3.1 Window Components
Windows have many components, and often each one has two or more common names. The main parts of most
window assemblies (see Figure 3-1) include:
Glazing: The glass in a window. Sometimes the glass is tempered for safety and sometimes it is coated for
energy efficiency. It may include layers of plastic as well as glass.
Insulating Glass (IG Unit): Typically two sheets/lites of glass separated by a spacer and sealed. Also referred to
as double glazing and double pane. Can also be comprised of three or more layers and multiple spacer systems.
Sash: The fixed or movable part of the window in which the panes of glass are set. Most operable sliding windows
have two or more sash.
Frame (Jambs): The frame usually consists of two vertical members (side jambs) and two horizontal members,
(head at the top and sill at the bottom) which hold the sash. Frames are made from steel, aluminum, fiberglass
(FRP), plastic, wood or a combination of these materials.
Casing (Brick Mold): Typically found in wood installations where the interior and exterior trim molding attached to
the window frame. The interior casing is usually a flat decorative molding; one edge is nailed to the frame and the
other to the wall. The casing covers the gap between the jamb and the rough opening (the hole in the wall). The
exterior casing, sometimes called brick mold, attaches to the window frame and covers the exterior side of the
gap around the rough opening. In replacement applications, new panning and trim are often applied to cover the
existing brick mold.
Sills: The sill member is commonly a piece of trim used at the bottom of the window at the sill condition to cover
the transition between the window and the brick or limestone.
Stool: Stool members can be made of a variety of materials like wood, marble, slate, etc., and is used to cover the
rough wall framing under the window.
Mullions (Integral Mull): Mullions commonly form the division between two or more windows. These members
generally act as the structural component between window units in large openings.
Muntins: Dividers in or on a light of glass which are either exterior (outside of the glass on the exterior face),
internal (within the insulating glass airspace), interior (on the inside of the glass on the interior face) or true
(actually divide the glass into small lights).
Other Window Components: In addition, windows are usually manufactured with stops, parting strips, rails,
latches, locks, pulleys, handles for opening and other accessories (see Glossary).
PAGE 3- 1
Figure 3-1 Window Components
3.2 Wall Framing Around Windows
It's also important to know the parts of the wall framing around the window for buildings and other types of
structures. In wood-framed or steel-framed stud walls, the window interrupts the regular pattern of studs (vertical
wall framing members) in the wall, and some extra wall framing is used to provide structural support and allow for
window attachment (see Figure 3-2). In masonry walls, brick, block, and steel form the opening for the window.
King Stud: A full-length stud nailed to the end of the window header on either side of the window rough opening.
Trimmer Stud: A shorter stud, which supports the header; it runs from the sole plate up to the bottom of the
header.
Cripple Studs: An even shorter set of studs which run from the sole plate to the rough sill. The rough sill rests on
top of the cripple studs. If a full height header is not used, cripple studs may extend from atop the header to the
top plate.
Header: In wood-framing construction, the header supports the load transferred from the floor and/or roof
structure above. This load is then transferred to the trimmers adjacent to the window or door opening. The header
must be designed to carry this load without allowing for excessive deflection of the framing, which can result in
loads being transferred to the window frame. A licensed Professional Engineer should always design headers.
Lintel: In masonry construction, the lintel is commonly made of steel or stone, and supports the load transferred
from the floor and/or roof structure above. This load is then transferred to the walls adjacent to the window or door
PAGE 3- 2
opening. The lintel, which performs a similar function to the header in wood or steel fram construction, must be
designed to carry this load without excessive deflection, which can result in loads being transferred to the window
frame. A licensed Professional Engineer should always design lintels.
Figure 3-2 Wall Framing Materials
3.3 Window Materials
3.3.1 Characteristics of Window Frame Materials
Thermally Broken Aluminum
To produce aluminum frame components, aluminum in the form of billets or logs is forced through a steel die
under extreme pressure. The aluminum exiting the die takes on the shape of the hole in the die and is called an
extrusion. Fixed windows can be built from a single extrusion of aluminum, but more complex windows are
assembled from a number of separately extruded components. The operable and fixed head, jamb, sill and
interlock pieces may all be different extrusions, each designed to meet the structural and functional requirements
of the entire window frame. Thermally broken aluminum frames improve energy performance by incorporating a
low conductance material separation in the extrusion.
Vinyl
Vinyl window components or extrusions, are formed by melting vinyl powder or pellets and pushing this through a
die to form the shape and then through calibrators to control the critical dimensions. The extrusions may include
PAGE 3- 3
several hollow chambers designed to trap air increasing the energy performance and improving the sound
transmission qualities. The internal chambers contribute to the strength of the profile and in many instances the
chambers are critical to the formation of water drainage paths allowing efficient evacuation to the exterior.
Vinyl when extruded is pre-colored and finished, needing no further finishing steps. The color can be continuous
through the entire profile or co-extruded onto predetermined surfaces as a cap-stock. In either scenario, the
finishes are resistant to ultra-violet degradation and unaffected and impervious to exposure to salt and other
environmental conditions. Rigid vinyl profiles emit ultra-low quantities of volatile organic compounds, if detected at
all.
Similar to many materials, vinyl will expand and contract through temperature cycling. The design, construction
and installation of vinyl windows and doors work together to accommodate any movement, allowing for quality
long term performance.
Like aluminum frames, vinyl window frames are extrusions. The extrusions may include several internal hollow
chambers; these chambers also trap air, increasing the energy performance and improving the sound-deadening
qualities of the frame.
In general, the more internal chambers, the stronger and more energy efficient the vinyl frame will be.
Wood
Wood frames are usually made from coniferous trees. A few specialty products use hardwoods. All wood parts for
windows and doors (except inside stops and trim) are treated with a water repellent preservative after machining.
Window manufacturers mill raw lumber into intricate, interlocking strips that are assembled into window frames.
A modern wood window is often composed of finger-jointed wood pieces, reserving precious straight-grain solid
wood for the visible areas. Hardware, weather-stripping and design improvements minimize wood-to-wood
contact, allowing modern wood windows to slide smoothly and provide a tight seal from the elements.
Fiberglass
To form fiberglass frames, glass strands are combined with polyester resins to form a composite substance.
Several fabrication methods are used to form finished shapes of high strength and stability. Fiberglass window
frames are commonly made using the pultrusion process: fiber strands are pulled through a resin bath, preformed
and aligned, then placed in a heated die where they cure and harden to shape. Relatively new to the window
market, fiberglass frames are structurally strong, expand and contract very little with temperature changes, and
are good thermal insulators.
NOTE: For more information on the expansion and contraction of various materials, see Chapter 17, Section
17.1.3.
Composite Materials
PAGE 3- 4
There are several composite materials emerging into the window and door industry. The most common products
are:
•
Wood/plastic composites
•
Cellular PVC
•
ABS/ASA profiles
Wood/Plastic Composites
A manufactured composite material which consists of fine wood waste (wood fiber) mixed with plastic resins. This
wood waste/resin material can be transformed by heat and pressure into almost any shape.
Cellular PVC
An engineered cellular (foam) PVC; it is extruded by two processes called free foam and Celluka. The free foam
process results in a softer outer skin while the Celluka process creates a tough outer skin. Cellular vinyl can also
be co-extruded with rigid vinyl or other materials on pre-determined exterior surfaces, also referred to as capstock. In cross section, many cellular vinyl components are solid and can be processed similar to wood. The solid
areas appear as a micro-structure of small bubbles, trapping air to contribute to thermal performance and adding
strength to extrusion.
Cellular vinyl shares many properties and attributes with rigid vinyl in terms of pre-finished colors and
performance characteristics.
An engineered cellular (foam) PVC; it is extruded by two processes: free foam and cellular. Free foam has a
softer skin, but the cellular process creates a tougher outer skin much like the hardness of wood.
ABS/ASA Profiles
An engineered plastic composite featuring an ABS profile with an ASA capstock. This product has been used for
years in the automotive industry.
Other Framing Materials (Hybrids)
Any of the above frame materials may be combined to make hybrid frames. For instance, interior wood strips are
sometimes attached to an aluminum frame to combine the exterior weathering, strength and weight properties of
aluminum with a natural wood interior finish. New products combining various materials are appearing as
manufacturing processes evolve and improve.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 3- 5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 3- 6
Table of Contents
4.1
Determining Window Types ........................................................................................................................1
4.2
Hung Windows (Single/Double/Triple Hung) ..............................................................................................1
4.3
Vertical Sliding Windows ............................................................................................................................4
4.4
Horizontal Sliding Windows ........................................................................................................................4
4.5
Awning/Hopper/Projected and Casement Windows ...................................................................................4
4.6
Vertically and Horizontally Pivoted Windows..............................................................................................5
4.7
Side Hinged (In-swinging) Windows ...........................................................................................................6
4.8
Top Hinged (In-swinging) Windows ............................................................................................................6
4.9
Dual Action Windows ..................................................................................................................................6
4.10
Hinged Egress Windows .........................................................................................................................6
4.11
Dual Windows .........................................................................................................................................6
4.12
Jalousie Windows ...................................................................................................................................6
4.13
Jal/Awning Windows ...............................................................................................................................6
4.14
Tropical Awning Windows .......................................................................................................................7
4.15
Specialty Windows ..................................................................................................................................7
4.16
Fixed Windows .......................................................................................................................................8
4.17
Combination Windows ............................................................................................................................8
4.18
Miscellaneous Window Hardware ..........................................................................................................9
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
Page 4-i
4.0 Types of Windows And Related Hardware
4.1
Determining Window Types
When determining a window type, a client’s needs must be the first consideration. Appearance, energy
performance, ventilation capability, egress requirements and ease of cleaning all play a role in selecting the most
appropriate type of window for a project.
A window’s design can determine how much ventilation it provides. Windows that open wider allow more air to
pass into or out of the building. Casement windows, when fully open, tend to direct the most air into the house.
Hung windows can provide ventilation through only half the total window area. However, double hung windows
allow ventilation both near the top and near the bottom of the wall.
Many windows are designed specifically for ease of cleaning. For instance, pivoted windows turn around so the
outside surface faces in. Other windows feature a combination of opening capabilities; they can be opened one
way for ventilation, or can be tilted in for cleaning.
Most of the following window-type categories are those used by AAMA when setting standards and test
specifications.
4.2
Hung Windows (Single/Double/Triple Hung)
Hung windows typically have two sash in a single frame. In double hung windows, both sash move up and down,
while in single hung windows only the bottom sash moves. Triple hung windows have three sash and typically
provide a larger ventilation area. Double and triple hung windows can provide both high and low ventilation to a
room (see Figure 4-1).
Hung windows differ from other vertically sliding windows in that they have a counter-balancing mechanism to
offset the weight of the sash when opening and when keeping the window open. In older windows, the lower sash
is generally attached to a rope on either side, which runs through a pulley in the top of the side jambs. A weight
on the end of the rope inside the jamb counteracts gravity to keep an open window sash from falling closed.
Newer windows may have a spiral sash balance, a spring balance, a block and tackle balance, a tape spring
balance, or a constant force type balance.
A spiral sash balance consists of a tube, coiled spring and spiral rod located inside the jambs. The spring allows
the rod to extend and retract as the sash is moved, and ensures that the sash is correctly balanced in all
positions. The sash can remain stationary at any desired position.
PAGE 1
Spring balances are sometimes used for architectural and heavy commercial windows. They consist of an inner
torsion spring surrounded by an outer extension spring; both are enclosed in a tube. They can be very effective
for extremely heavy windows.
The block and tackle balance has a spring attached to a block. A nylon cord or metal cable passes around the
pulleys and over a roller at the top of the frame and is attached to the sash.
Tape spring balances consist of a coiled tape. The tape housings mount in the head or jambs of the frame, and
the ends of the tape are connected to the top or bottom of the sash at the jambs.
PAGE 2
Figure 4-1 Window Types
PAGE 3
4.3
Vertical Sliding Windows
Vertical sliders have two or more sash in a frame. One sash may move and the other remains fixed, or two or
more sash may slide. Unlike conventional single hung or double hung windows, operable sash are held open by
mechanical means rather than with a balance and pulley system.
4.4
Horizontal Sliding Windows
Horizontal sliders have two or more sash in a frame. They may have one moving sash and one fixed sash, two
sliding sash on either side of a fixed one, or two adjacent sash may slide by each other. Sash rollers usually
provide low friction sliding (see Figure 4-1). Operable and fixed sash can usually be determined by the use of the
symbol “X” for operable or “O” for fixed. Thus a three lite slider that is marked OXO would be fixed, operable, fixed
respectively.
4.5
Awning/Hopper/Projected and Casement Windows
In awning, hopper, projected, and casement windows, the whole sash swings open and projects (sticks out)
outside or inside from the plane of the window. The symbol for project-out sash is “P.O.”, while “P.I.” represents
project-in sash. The sash operates on hinges or pivots. An awning window rotates about its top edge and projects
outward from the building (see Figure 4-1). A hopper window pivots about its bottom edge and projects inward
(see Figure 4-1). A casement window rotates from one of the side jambs and swings either inward or outward.
The use of two phantom lines, extending from the corner of the sash and joining together at a point on the
opposite side, represents the hinge location (or pivot side) of the window (see Figure 4-2). The side opposite the
hinge is where the operable handles are placed. Thus a P.I. window with the phantom lines pointing to the left
side would be a project-in casement with the hinges on the left side of the frame.
Projected windows provide ventilation through the entire window area, generally seal tightly when closed, and are
relatively easy to clean. They can be used to direct ventilation air into the room. This is particularly true of sidehinged casement windows.
PAGE 4
Figure 4-2 Window Types
4.6
Vertically and Horizontally Pivoted Windows
Pivoted windows have a sash attached to pivots in the middle of the frame (either at the head and sill or at the
side jambs). A pivoted window can be rotated 180° or 360° so that the outside surface is accessible from the
inside for cleaning (see Figure 4-2).
Vertically pivoted windows are often used in high-rise buildings because they can be rotated to allow the outside
surfaces to be washed from the inside. These windows typically have special locking devices and can be opened
only by custodial personnel.
PAGE 5
4.7
Side Hinged (In-swinging) Windows
Instead of projecting out like most awning and casement windows, in-swinging windows project into the building
from hinges on the side jamb. In-swinging windows are typically used for cleaning access or emergency
ventilation.
4.8
Top Hinged (In-swinging) Windows
Like side-hinged in-swinging windows, top hinged inswinging windows are designed to operate primarily for
cleaning, not to provide ventilation. A top hinged in-swinging window consists of a sash hinged to the head (top of
the frame) so that it swings open to the inside.
4.9
Dual Action Windows
Dual action windows have a sash that tilts into the room from the top for ventilation and swings in from the side for
cleaning of the outside surface.
4.10
Hinged Egress Windows
A hinged egress window has a sash that swings outward or inward at least 90° in a stationary perimeter frame. It
must meet requirements for the size of the clear opening when fully opened. Hinged egress windows are usually
casement or awning windows. In addition to the usual structural tests, hinge operation is also tested.
4.11
Dual Windows
Dual windows contain two separate sash that operate independently of each other. There may be an interior
primary window with an exterior secondary window, an exterior primary window with an interior secondary
window, or two primary windows. Primary windows are designed to be structurally capable of protecting the
building’s interior from wind and rain. Secondary windows are used mainly for energy conservation or sound
control. They are not intended to be used by themselves.
Dual windows can be used to provide ventilation, while protecting the interior from rain. This is achieved with
vertical sliders by opening the outside window at the bottom and the inside window at the top. With horizontal
sliders, open the outside window on one side and the inside window on the other side.
4.12
Jalousie Windows
Jalousie windows have a series of overlapping louvers which pivot simultaneously in the frame, controlled by a
single operating device. Louvers are typically glass, but may also be aluminum, wood, or plastic. When opened,
the bottom edge of each louver swings toward the exterior.
4.13
Jal/Awning Windows
Jal/Awning windows consist of a multiplicity of top hinged sash arranged in a vertical series within a common
frame with each sash operated by its own control device, which swings the bottom edges of the sash outward.
PAGE 6
4.14
Tropical Awning Windows
Tropical awning windows consist of a multiplicity of top hinged sash arranged in a vertical series within a common
frame which are all operated by a single common operator, which swings the bottom edges of the sash outward.
4.15
Specialty Windows
Windows can be custom-made in various shapes and sizes, including circles, hexagons, semicircles and
trapezoids. Specialty windows may be fixed, operating or a combination of fixed and operating sash (see Figure
4-3).
Figure 4-3 Specialty Windows
PAGE 7
4.16
Fixed Windows
Fixed windows are not intended to open for ventilation or egress; there are no moving parts, hinges, or latches.
They consist of a glazed frame, or a fixed sash and frame, installed into the opening. Fixed windows are usually
more airtight than windows that open.
4.17
Combination Windows
When multiple windows are joined together in long runs, either vertically or horizontally, they form what is called
“Vertical Stack Windows” or “Horizontal Ribbon Windows” respectively. These types of openings may involve any
combination of either fixed or operable window assemblies.
Vertical Stack and Horizontal Ribbon Windows are typically joined together with male/female integral frames or
with independent mullions. These types of window combinations may also make transitions from full height units
to partial height units (see Figure 4-4).
Figure 4-4a “Horizontal Ribbon Windows”
PAGE 8
Figure 4-4b "Vertical Stack Windows”
4.18
Miscellaneous Window Hardware
Numerous types of hardware are used for window operation and locking. The following pages provide examples
of some of the more common types of hardware installers might find in the field. Installers can use these drawings
to help recognize and/or replace hardware as needed.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 9
Various Types of Window Hardware
Sweep - Hand Operated Lock
Sweep – Security Lock
Sweep – Pole Operated Lock
Keeper – Flush Mount
Keeper – Mortise
Sash Lock
Keeper
Spring Catch – Pole Operated
Spring Catch – Pole Operated
Keeper
Spring Catch
Keeper (Std. Style)
PAGE 10
Anti-Lockout Keeper
Spring Catch w/ Keeper
10” Storm Hinge (Multi-Bar)
Handle (Surface Mount)
Handle (Web Mount)
Strike
Handle
Keeper
Handless Fastener
(Custodial Lock)
Spring Catch
Spring Catch
(Project-Out Bottom)
(Project-In)
Under Screen Push Bar
PAGE 11
Handle
Keeper
Roto Operator w/
Channel Guide
Butt Hinge
Spiral Balance
Hung Carrier
Heavy Duty Hung Carrier
Block & Tackle Balances
Class Balance
Bracket
Carrier
Balance Tool
PAGE 12
PAGE 13
Table of Contents
5.1
Hinged Glass Doors ....................................................................................................................................1
5.2
Dual Action Hinged Glass Doors ................................................................................................................1
5.3
Sliding Glass Doors ....................................................................................................................................2
5.4
Miscellaneous Door Hardware ...................................................................................................................2
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
Page 5-i
5.0 Types of Exterior Glass Doors & Related Hardware
There are a number of different exterior glass door products on the market. This manual covers hinged and
sliding exterior glass doors and their associated hardware components.
5.1
Hinged Glass Doors
Sometimes referred to as French doors or terrace doors, hinged glass doors consist of one or more glazed panels
contained within an overall frame. One or more of the glazed panels are operable, swinging either inward or
outward (see Figure 5-1).
Whenever specifying pairs of hinged glass doors, be sure to indicate which door is to be the primary panel and
which is to be the secondary panel. Base this determination on how they are viewed from the exterior. Panels are
typically defined with the symbol “X” for operable or “O” for fixed. The direction of swing is commonly shown on
the floor plan with the use of an arc, which represents the direction of travel.
The water and air infiltration performance of a hinged glass door depends on whether compression seals are
used around the perimeter of the sash and the height of the threshold. Hinged glass doors shall not be confused
with "Storefront" and "Entrance" doors, or all glass doors used in commercial storefront applications.
O
X
X
O
Figure 5-1 Hinged Glass Doors
5.2
Dual Action Hinged Glass Doors
A dual action hinged glass door consists of one or more glazed panels in a single frame. The term "dual action" is
based on the operation of the door. Special hardware is supplied within the sash that allows the door panel to
function in two modes- swinging and hopper. By rotating the door handle in one direction, the door can be
unlocked and swung inward much like a standard hinged glass door. After closing and locking the door, the
handle can be rotated to a different position to operate the sash in the ventilation mode by tilting it in, away from
the top, like a project-in vent.
Page 5-1
Manufacturers offer variations of these doors, including single and double doors, with one or both sash operating.
The hardware generally is arranged to offer multi-point locking locations around the perimeter of the door.
Because of the number of locking points and the fact that many of these doors are typically compression sealed,
they generally offer very tight air infiltration values and can often be tested to high water performance levels.
5.3
Sliding Glass Doors
Sliding glass doors consist of one or more glass panels contained in frames that, in turn, are contained within an
overall frame designed so that one or more of the panels are movable in a horizontal direction. The movable
panels have rollers, which are designed to allow for easy movement.
Sliding glass doors are adjustable and can be arranged in a number of different combinations based on the
number of fixed and operable panels, and how the panels open. The height of the sliding glass door sill can have
an impact on the water performance of the system. When installing a sliding glass door, remember to consider the
height of the threshold and whether a ramp will be needed to allow for wheel chair access.
In Figure 5-2, "X's" and "O's" are used to show which panel is operable and which is fixed. The symbol "X"
represents an operable panel and the "O" indicates a fixed panel.
Whenever specifying sliding glass doors, be sure to indicate which panels are operable and which are fixed,
based on how they are viewed from the exterior. Additionally, an arrow typically represents the direction of slide
when the operable sash is opened.
O
X
X
O
Figure 5-2 Sliding Glass Doors
5.4
Miscellaneous Door Hardware
Numerous types of hardware are used for door operation and locking. There are many examples of the more
common types of hardware installers might find in the field, they are too numerous to show here.
Notes:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 5-2
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_
PAGE 5-3
Table of Contents
6.1
Using Accessories ......................................................................................................................................1
6.2
Panning .......................................................................................................................................................1
6.3
Subsills........................................................................................................................................................2
6.4
Receptors ...................................................................................................................................................3
6.5
Interior Trim ................................................................................................................................................4
6.6
Stool Trim and Sill Members ......................................................................................................................5
6.7
Flashing Materials .......................................................................................................................................6
6.8
Cladding ......................................................................................................................................................6
6.9
Installation Clips/Angles..............................................................................................................................7
6.10
Mullion Clips............................................................................................................................................8
6.11
Mounting Clips or Brackets .....................................................................................................................8
6.12
Integral Ventilating Systems ...................................................................................................................9
6.13
Sash Dividers/Grids/Muntins ............................................................................................................... 10
6.14
Mullion Covers ..................................................................................................................................... 10
6.15
Expanders and Sill Angles ................................................................................................................... 11
6.16
Vertical and Horizontal Mullions .......................................................................................................... 12
6.17
Corner Mullions .................................................................................................................................... 13
6.18
Window Washing Bolts ........................................................................................................................ 14
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
Page 6-i
6.0 Accessory Items and special features
Special accessories are often used to facilitate installation. Accessory items include pre-designed members to
accommodate transitions and allow for movement, and can be used to cover existing building components, allow
for ease of installation, and provide a finished condition after installation. Accessory items can be purchased in
various materials and finishes. Because accessory items may be designed by the manufacturer for specific
applications, consult the manufacturer about the proper use of these products. The following sections provide
general terms and descriptions of how accessory items are used.
6.1
Using Accessories
Accessory items, such as panning and trim, receptors, and subsills are generally not included with the window or
door unless part of the contract. The person ordering the windows and doors must make the decision regarding
whether accessory items are needed to facilitate installation or provide the look the customer desires. If accessory
items are needed, order them at the same time the windows or doors are ordered.
Over the years, special conditions and job requirements have dictated the use of accessories. In the early years
of their development, most accessories were made in the field from coil stock and sheet materials. As the need
for these materials increased, many manufacturers developed standard accessory shapes to meet the demand.
The definitions of accessory items can have different meanings to different users, depending on their background
and their area of construction expertise. To reduce misunderstanding, various items are defined in the following
sections.
6.2
Panning
Panning materials used in commercial construction are used on the exterior of windows and doors for both new
construction and replacement work. In replacement installations, panning materials typically cover existing wood
molding or trim and are often designed to provide the same profiles as the materials they cover.
Panning is generally used around the entire perimeter of the window opening and is either pre-attached to the
new window frame (called wrap-around panning) or installed to the existing opening prior to window installation
(called pre-set panning). These types of panning (see Figure 6-1) will typically be supplied in an extruded form
and are often available in a number of sizes and shapes. When panning is desired, consult with the manufacturer
to determine what profiles are offered.
The seal between the panning and the window must maintain the performance level of the project. Sealing is
generally accomplished by the use of gaskets, sealant or a combination of the two. Always assemble and seal the
panning and window as recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturers often have detailed assembly and
installation instructions that must be followed.
Page 6-1
Figure 6-1 Common Panning Shapes
6.3
Subsills
The term "subsill" in commercial applications refers to a member that is used under windows and doors as an
integral part of the installation (see Figure 6-2). Subsills are available in a number of sizes and shapes. Always
use end dams when using subsills for maximum performance. End dams are an essential part of the water
performance integrity of the subsill system. The subsill and end dam must be high enough to maintain the
performance level of the project. In commercial applications, subsills are most often used to facilitate anchorage
and water drainage.
Attachment through any sill cavity is typically discouraged; however, the use of a subsill offers advantages when
anchoring. By using anchor clips or extended flanges, the subsill can be shimmed level and attached in place.
This makes working with multiple windows easier because the subsill can offer a continuous, level track for
installation of the windows or doors.
Page 6-2
Figure 6-2 Typical Subsill with End Dam and Extruded Anchor Clip
6.4
Receptors
Receptors, also known as “Comp Channels,” are generally one- or two-piece extruded members used at the head
and jambs of windows and doors to allow for building movement, product expansion and contraction, and to
facilitate the installation of the window head and jambs. Receptors are usually shaped like a channel and typically
include gaskets, which form a compression seal against the framing system (see Figure 6-3). Like subsills,
receptors offer the advantage of a continuous track, which is ideal in multiple window configurations.
Because of their design and placement, receptors facilitate the installation of the window head and jambs. The
receptor is generally shimmed and attached in place, allowing for a sealant joint between the side opposite the
window and the building condition.
Receptors are often used to allow for building movement at the head of an assembly. Live load movement from
the floor above can often exceed the designed movement of a typical sealant joint. The receptor system allows for
more movement, without disturbing the sealant joint.
Page 6-3
Figure 6-3 Various Types of Receptors
6.5
Interior Trim
Interior trim is generally used to finish off, or "trim out," the interior side of the opening. Most common to
commercial applications is extruded aluminum trim, usually manufactured in two pieces, which can be snapped
together to form a rectangle or square (see Figure 6-4). Aluminum Interior trim can often be provided in a number
of profiles that resemble the old trim that has been removed in replacement work. Trim clips can either be
supplied in short sections (non-continuous trim clips) or continuous pieces (known as continuous trim clips).
In commercial applications, trim is often used as a device for anchoring the window to the building condition. If the
trim is at least two pieces, the first piece can be applied to both the existing condition and the new window frame.
The second piece is snapped over the first, hiding any fasteners from view.
Figure 6-4 Various Types of Interior Trim
Page 6-4
6.6
Stool Trim and Sill Members
The terms "stool trim" and "sill members" are often confused. Stools are components that are used on the interior,
while sills are used on the exterior. The two are distinctly different components, and have different meanings and
uses.
Stool trim is made of a number of materials, including aluminum, vinyl, wood and marble (see Figure 6-5). The
purpose of stool trim is typically to finish off the interior stool condition. This component usually creates the
transition between the interior finishes and the window. End caps and sealant are commonly used to finish off the
ends and joints, allowing for a visually appealing appearance.
Sill members are used on the exterior of windows and often close off joints in the exterior sill condition (see Figure
6-6). In commercial applications, for example, if a brick veneer wall system is used, extruded sill members are
often installed to close off the cavity between the brick and the wall framing.
Sill members can have an impact on the water and air infiltration performance of an installation. Always install
subsills carefully, according to the manufacturer's instructions. Sill members must include a slope toward the
exterior to facilitate positive drainage. Always include proper sealant selection, joint design and installation
techniques that will not degrade the performance expectations of the window assembly when installing subsills.
Figure 6-5 Examples of Stool Trim
Page 6-5
Figure 6-6 Example of a Sill Member
6.7
Flashing Materials
The term "flashing" has a number of different meanings, depending on how the flashing is used and designed.
Flashing is typically used to prevent water from penetrating the building envelope.
Flashing is typically used at the perimeter of a windows/door and is made from a water-resistant or waterimpermeable material, such as aluminum, copper or stainless steel. These materials are formed into shapes to
control and divert water. For materials that are acceptable for use as flashing, see Chapter 13, Section 13.3.
Be certain that any flashing used at the sill condition does not compromise the thermal barrier in areas where cold
temperatures can be expected.
6.8
Cladding
Cladding is typically used to close off or cover openings. These pieces generally cover areas that would require
an accessory too large to make into an extrusion, or they may be unusual shapes that are not stocked by the
manufacturer. Cladding is usually made from sheets of finished aluminum; however, other materials may be used.
Proper design and fabrication of cladding is essential to good performance on the wall.. On exterior applications,
only use cladding material that is thick enough to resist "oil canning," or deformation caused by expansion and
contraction. The number of bends and the girth of the shape will determine the proper thickness of the stock used.
Page 6-6
If the ends of these components are used adjacent to sealant joints, the ends should be folded over or capped to
allow for proper joint design and backer rod support (see Figure 6-7).
When lengths require splice joints, follow the recommended sealant joint design information shown in Chapter 13,
Section 13.5. When cladding materials are used to cover large voids, the voids should be loosely filled with batt
insulation to maintain the thermal integrity of the completed installation.
Figure 6-7 Cladding with End Caps
6.9
Installation Clips/Angles
An installation clip, or angle, is a piece of material (usually aluminum or steel) used to attach the window into
position. Special clips are often extruded and specially fabricated for this purpose (see Figure 6-8).
Generally, when building movement is a concern, the clips will be slotted to allow for movement and adjustment.
Page 6-7
Figure 6-8 Examples Clip Angles
6.10
Mullion Clips
"Mullion clips" are retainers used to bind two or more windows together into a single, combination unit.
6.11
Mounting Clips or Brackets
"Mounting clips," or "brackets," also referred to as "twist anchors” or “strap anchors,” are brackets that attach to
the window or door frame to provide an anchoring device (see Figure 6-9).
These anchors are commonly made of thin gage galvanized steel. Because they are thin gage, the installer can
typically bend or form them to the desired shape. These clips are often fabricated and pre-punched in the factory
to allow for attachment. Nails or screws are installed through the bracket into the substrate, eliminating the need
for anchoring directly through the window frame.
Page 6-8
Figure 6-9 Examples of Mounting Clips
6.12
Integral Ventilating Systems
With today's tighter buildings, providing for sufficient ventilation is part of most new building codes. In order to
ensure that an adequate amount of outdoor air is provided (without depending on the occupants to open
windows), some specifiers require windows with integral ventilators (see Figure 6-10). These ventilators are
essentially air slots through the top, bottom or side of the window frame, with screens and flaps to keep out the
bugs and rain. Occupants can adjust the opening to control the amount of airflow.
Integral ventilators are also sometimes used to provide an inlet for air when exhaust fans are running in a room.
This prevents the room from becoming depressurized as the fan draws out stale, humid or polluted air.
Page 6-9
Figure 6-10 Integral Ventilating System
6.13
Sash Dividers/Grids/Muntins
"Sash dividers," "grids" and "muntins" are the dividers commonly used when replacing "old-style," historical and/or
colonial windows. Typically, the existing sash was made up of several lites of glass separated by grids and
muntins. Many building owners today want to recreate that look when replacing their old windows.
Some manufacturers make "true divided lite" (TDL) windows using several small panels of insulated double glass.
Glass is installed between dividing crossbars called "muntins." Many manufacturers recreate the divided look by
using full pieces of glazing and either placing a grid between two panes of glass or attaching a grid on the inside
and/or outside surface of the window.
6.14
Mullion Covers
When working with existing mullion conditions, mullion covers are often used to cover over the existing frame.
Mullion covers can be used with or without panning, and are typically snapped over a pre-attached pressure plate
(see Figure 6-12).
Page 6-10
Figure 6-12 Mullion Covers
6.15
Expanders and Sill Angles
Some transitions between the window and the existing frame require more material than available in a common
extrusion. These instances often require the use of an expander or sill angle
The expander is an accessory that is compressed over an existing flange on the window or panning shape. This
accessory can be field trimmed or scribed to suite the condition (see Figure 6-13).
Sill angles are similar in design, but they are more commonly used to provide a return leg to back up the caulk
joint. In either case, the expander/sill angle is sealed to the condition and to the window/panning in order to resist
water penetration.
Page 6-11
Figure 6-13 Expanders and Sill Angles
6.16
Vertical and Horizontal Mullions
A variety of mullions are available for use on commercial jobs. Mullions can be used in horizontal and vertical
applications (see Figure 6-14), but they are designed differently for each application. Mullions come in three
variations:
•
Horizontal stack or vertical stack mullions typically used in a horizontal or vertical position to stack one frame
on top of (or against) one another. There are two variations of stack mullions, those with “zero-sightlines” and
those that are “H-MillionsMullions.”
•
Male/female mullions may be used in either horizontal or vertical applications to join two opposing frames
together.
•
Three-piece mullions with pressure plates and covers, which are often structural mullions designed to carry
the loads imposed by the window/door frames.
Page 6-12
Figure 6-14 Common Mullion Types
6.17
Corner Mullions
Corner mullions are made to handle transitions at the corners. Although almost any shape is possible, the more
common designs are for inside and outside 90º and 135º corners.
Always attach corner frames securely into position at the head and sill condition in order to carry the load imposed
on the mullion by the opposing frames (see Figure 6-15).
Page 6-13
Figure 6-15 Examples of Corner Mullions
6.18
Window Washing Bolts
Window washing bolts are used to allow the maintenance crew (window washers) to attach their belts or
harnesses to a secure attachment. Often required by code, these bolts are used as a safety device when cleaning
windows on a high-rise building.
A number of varieties are available and will depend on the desired design, building condition and the load
requirements. It is important to attach the window washer bolts securely through the building frame in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions (see Figure 6-16).
Page 6-14
Figure 6-16 Example of One Type of Washer Bolt Attachment
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_
Page 6-15
Table of Contents
7.1
Performance Requirements and Testing ....................................................................................................1
7.2
Specific and Optional Performance Requirements ....................................................................................2
7.3
Verification of Performance/ AAMA Certification Labels ............................................................................2
7.4
Field Testing of Installed Units ...................................................................................................................5
7.5
Field Testing of Accessories .......................................................................................................................5
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 7-I
7.0 Performance Requirements
7.1
Performance Requirements and Testing
A material-neutral, standard/specification has been developed through the joint efforts of the members of the
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA), Window and Door Manufacturers Association
(WDMA) and Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This chapter provides a brief overview of the standard and
how it applies to commercial windows and doors.
At the time of this writing, the most recent standard/specification used by the window and door industry to
establish the minimum performance requirements of windows and doors is known as AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440-11 and is titled “North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors, and
Skylights”.
Many of the industry's manufacturers voluntarily subject their products to the testing outlined by the standard.
Certifying to this standard indicates that an independent, accredited testing laboratory has certified that a tested
sample has met the performance criteria for the performance class and grade desired.
The product tested must meet specific performance requirements. There are four mandatory primary performance
requirements. They are:
1.
Structural adequacy to withstand wind loads
2.
Resistance to water leakage
3.
Resistance to air infiltration
4.
Forced-entry resistance
The standard establishes levels of performance for various types of windows and doors. Successfully meeting
these requirements provides a "gateway," or passport, into one of the four performance classifications below:
R
LC
CW
AW
The performance grade criteria for these products are shown below (see Table 7-1).
PAGE 7-1
Product
Minimum design
Minimum structural test Minimum water
performance performance
Minimum
pressure (DP),
pressure (STP),
resistance test
class
Pa (psf)
Pa (psf)
pressure, Pa (psf)
grade (PG)
Windows and doors
R
15
720 (15.0)
1080 (22.5)
140 (2.90)
LC
25
1200 (25.0)
1800 (37.5)
180 (3.75)
CW
30
1440 (30.0)
2160 (45.0)
220 (4.50)
AW
40
1920 (40.0)
2880 (60.0)
390 (8.00)
Unit skylights, tubular daylighting devices, and roof windows
R
15
720 (15.0)
1440 (30.0)
140 (2.90)
CW
30
1440 (30.0)
2880 (60.0)
220 (4.50)
Table 7-1 Performance Criteria per Table 1 of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440-0811
7.2
Specific and Optional Performance Requirements
In order for a product to be classified as R, LC, CW, or AW, the product must meet specific performance criteria
established by the standard. The performance standard dictates a minimum test size for each product. The
performance criteria must be met by products that claim compliance with these standards (see Table 7-1).
The minimum performance requirements are known as the "Gateway Performance Requirements." Optional
performance grades for these products are also possible. Many manufacturers opt to test their products at higher
grade levels once they meet the Gateway Performance Requirements.
7.3
Verification of Performance/ AAMA Certification Labels
After a representative sample of a manufacturer's product line has met the AAMA requirements through
performance testing and in-plant inspections, other similar products that the manufacturer produces may be
labeled with an AAMA performance label (see Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2). The label includes a four-part code
indicating the product type (optional), performance class, performance grade and maximum size tested.
Product Type - indicates the window style, such as casement window or hinged glass doors (see Table 7-2).
Performance Class - offers a general indication of the type of building for which the window was designed. In the
example shown in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2, the window is rated for commercial construction and is designated
as one of the four performance classes (R, LC, CW, and AW). This classification system provides for several
levels of performance so that the purchaser or specifier is permitted to select the appropriate level of performance
depending on climatic conditions, height of installation, type of building, etc.
Refer to Clause 0.2.1 of
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440-08 for a general guide in determining which class is likely best suited for a
particular application.
PAGE 7-2
Performance Grade - a numeric designator that defines the performance of a product. In order to obtain an AAMA
certification label, a tested sample of the product must achieve successful completion of all applicable tests
specified for the product.
Maximum size tested - shows the maximum size of the window that was tested. This may seem like a minor detail
when looking at a window's rating, but the size of the window can have a significant effect on its structural
capability.
PAGE 7-3
Product Types
AP
Awning, Hopper, Projected Window
ATD
Architectural Terrace Door
BW
Basement Window
C
Casement Window
DASHD
Dual-Action Side-Hinged Door
DAW
Dual-Action Window
FD
Fixed Door
FW
Fixed Window
GH
Greenhouse Window
H
Hung Window
HE
Hinged Rescue Window
HP
Horizontally Pivoted Window
HS
Horizontal Sliding Window
J
Jalousie Window
JA
Jal-Awning Window
LW DASHD
Limited water Dual-Action Side-hinged Door
LW SHD
Limited water Side-hinged Door
MA
Mullion Assembly
POW
Parallel Opening Window
RWG
Roof Window – Glass Glazed
RWP
Roof Window – Plastic Glazed
SD
Sliding Door
SHD
Side Hinged Door
SHW
Side Hinged Window
SKG
Unit Skylight – glass glazed
SKP
Unit Skylight – plastic glazed
SLT
Side lite
SP
Specialty Products
SSP
Secondary Storm Product
TA
Tropical Awning Windows
TDDCC
Tubular Daylighting Device – Closed Ceiling
TDDOC
Tubular Daylighting Device – Open Ceiling
TH
Top Hinged Window
TR
Transom
VP
Vertically Pivoted Windows
VS
Vertical Sliding Window
Table 7-2 Product Types per Table 5 of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440-0811
PAGE 7-4
7.4
Field Testing of Installed Units
Project specifications often call for field testing of installed windows and doors. Field testing can be a complex
issue and requires skilled technicians who are familiar with the testing standards, proper test methods and the
tools available to the industry for this purpose.
AAMA 502 provides industry recognized and accepted procedures for field testing. Whenever field tests are
required, they shall be conducted in accordance with AAMA 502.
Additionally, when field testing of installed windows and doors is required, it shall only be conducted by an AAMAaccredited laboratory that regularly engages in field testing. Quite often, test labs are contracted to do this work
immediately after the contract is awarded. Using a qualified test lab will ensure all interested parties that the
proper testing methods are followed and that the results are properly documented. Installers who are involved
with the field testing process are encouraged to review the job specifications and test methods fully and
coordinate their activities with the building contractor and window/door manufacturer.
7.5
Field Testing of Accessories
One type of field test that installers can perform is to field check accessories for water leakage. Field testing of
subsills, for example, is a simple process for the installer to follow. This method of field testing can be
accomplished on a work table or pair of saw horses prior to installation. This test method will pinpoint problems
before the accessories are installed, and can help avoid future callbacks.
The process, as identified in AAMA 511, used for subsills involves taping off weep holes, filling the subsill with
water, and waiting for 15 minutes while checking for any water leakage (see Figure 7-3). By simply watching for
leaks (drips of water), the installer can determine whether the previously applied seals at the end dams are
resistant to water leakage.
Once the testing has been completed, the tape is removed, the weeps holes are reopened, and the subsill is
allowed to dry prior to final installation.
When doing a field test on an accessory item, the installer is strongly encouraged to document the results. If
water penetration occurs during the test, document where the penetration occurred and document the corrective
measures taken to remedy the problem. By understanding the corrective measures taken, the installer can give
more attention to susceptible areas during future work as the project progresses.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 7-5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
HS-C30
Comment [r1]: Update label Staff Item
Figure 7-1 AAMA Label
Figure 7-2 Defining the AAMA Label Code
Comment [r2]: Should this stay or go, applies
to aluminum only. If it stays the reference to
AAMA 502 should be updated
Figure 7-3 Field Testing of a Subsill, when needed
PAGE 7-6
Table of Contents
8.1
Preliminary Site Inspection .........................................................................................................................1
8.1.1.
Condition of the Structure ...................................................................................................................1
8.1.2.
Types of Buildings and Building Components ....................................................................................2
8.1.3.
Identifying the Weather Barrier Systems ............................................................................................2
8.2
Health and Safety Inspection ......................................................................................................................6
8.2.1
Hazardous Materials ...........................................................................................................................7
8.2.2
Job Site Safety Issues ..................................................................................................................... 11
8.3
Access and Barrier Issues ....................................................................................................................... 15
8.3.1
Fall Protection .................................................................................................................................. 15
8.3.2
Jobsite Access ................................................................................................................................. 16
8.4
Pre-installation Inspection........................................................................................................................ 16
8.4.1
Protecting Existing Materials ........................................................................................................... 17
8.4.2
Reporting Construction Deficiencies ............................................................................................... 18
8.4.3
Identifying and Removing Structural Components .......................................................................... 18
8.4.3.1
Checking the Details ........................................................................................................................ 18
8.5
Quality Control Inspection........................................................................................................................ 19
PAGE 8-i
8.0 Site Inspection & Safety
It is a good construction practice to start a project with a work-site inspection and end it with a quality control
inspection. Proper pre-planning and preparation can reduce re-work and prevent the need to remove improperly
installed products and materials.
When possible, meet with the contractor or other approving authority/authorities prior to installation of the
products. The approving authority is responsible for the coordination of the various trades.
A preliminary site inspection is helpful when determining if conditions exist that could cause problems for the
installer. During the course of the project, other inspections may be necessary, including the following:
•
Health and Safety Inspection
•
Preinstallation Inspection
•
Quality Control Inspection (see Chapter 23)
8.1
Preliminary Site Inspection
Before starting a job, conduct a preliminary site inspection. Sample site inspection forms are provided for both
replacement work and new construction at the end of this chapter.
Conduct a site inspection for both new construction and remodeling projects. Make assessments for:
•
Condition of the structure
•
Type of building and components
•
Type of weather barrier system
•
Health and safety issues
•
Access and barrier issues
•
Material and equipment needs
•
Personnel and time requirements
•
Code-related issues
8.1.1.
Condition of the Structure
Always check the condition of the structure and the building substrate where window and door products will be
installed. When replacing windows and doors in an existing structure, inspect the openings to verify proper
structural conditions and check for possible structural damage, as well as other dangerous conditions. Structural
damage can affect the way a newly installed window or door will operate. A thorough check for existing structural
damage is essential, and remedy any problems before window or door installation begins. Below is a checklist for
structural conditions:
•
Is the physical condition of the opening questionable? Verify that the condition of the substrate is adequate for
PAGE 8-1
attachment.
•
Inspect the walls, floors, trim and ceilings around the windows or doors for signs of damage or deterioration.
•
Is the substrate per the contract drawings?
•
Report any damage or deteriorated conditions such as rotted wood, spalled concrete or corroded steel to the
contractor, building owner or approving authority.
8.1.2.
Types of Buildings and Building Components
A variety of materials and methods are used in the construction of commercial buildings. Installers should already
have an understanding of the basic construction principles, materials, building practices, and barrier systems. If
not, review Chapters 1 through 7 of this manual.
8.1.3.
Identifying the Weather Barrier Systems
Two different weather barrier systems are commonly used in commercial construction.
These systems are:
•
Surface Barrier System; and
•
Membrane/Drainage System
The surface barrier system utilizes the outermost surface of the wall as its sole barrier to shed and control water
infiltration. When water does enter behind the exterior face of this system, there is no additional means of
controlling the water and diverting it back to the outside.
The membrane/drainage system also uses the exterior surface to shed the water; however, a water resistant
barrier (WRB) (e.g., building paper, building wrap, sheathing or other water-shedding material) is located behind
the exterior surface of the building. The WRB is designed to divert any residual water that may enter penetrations
in the wall surface outward through pre-determined exit points in the building (e.g., base of wall, floor lines or
flashing points at lintels).
When installing products into retrofit/replacement applications, it is essential to clearly define and understand the
existing weather barrier. Take care to ensure that the window or door has been properly installed into the
previously designed and existing building envelope. Use caution in evaluating the connection of the window or
door to WRB so that the replacement installation does not impair the existing system from working properly (e.g.,
blocking weep holes or slots in the existing system).
In order to control water penetration from behind the WRB, these materials must be installed in weather-board
fashion, with overlapping joints at the appropriate locations. The proper installation and integration of some
materials in weather-board fashion may be difficult to accomplish without taping or overlapping the joints.
Additionally, trades other than the window/door installer apply many of these materials; therefore, the application
of these materials is beyond the scope of this manual.
PAGE 8-2
Installation of windows and glass doors in membrane/drainage wall systems may require special attention and
coordination with the building contractor to ensure that the weather shedding integrity of the building is
maintained.
The construction sequence can impact the effectiveness of the weather barrier system; therefore, take care to
ensure that all components of the weather barrier system are properly integrated into the construction sequence.
The contractor and/or other approving authority is responsible for the coordination of the various trades and
products used to complete the weather barrier system.
When preparing to install products into new construction, it is essential that communication between the installer
and architect, contractor, developer, and/or other approving authority occur regarding the weather barrier system,
as well as the materials and methods used during installation. The proper selection and integration of these
materials will increase the prospect of the installation performing as expected.
Whenever possible, review drawings or details showing how the window or door will be integrated into the
building envelope, along with the various other materials. This would include sketches of how the flashing and/or
sill pan flashing, water resistive barrier, sealant, etc., integrate to form a water shedding, water resistive system.
In order to avoid the potential for long-term performance problems, the installer (and all other responsible parties)
needs to be able to look at these building types/materials and recognize when these materials are not applied (or
not applied correctly), and when it is prudent to refuse to install window/door products until deficiencies are
corrected.
Surface Barrier Systems
•
A surface barrier system is a type of wall in which the outer-most, or first surface of the wall, windows, doors,
etc., is integrated together to form a water resistive wall assembly. Walls considered to be surface barrier
systems are often solid walls (e.g., single width masonry, poured concrete walls, concrete block, and others
that do not include wall cavities) with drainage planes like some types of EIFS (usually direct applied EIFS).
Additionally, other types of walls that involve wall cavities (e.g., concrete panel walls, brick veneer, etc.) that
don't include a water resistive barrier behind the exterior skin are considered surface barrier walls. Walls of
this type do not include a purposely-designed method of controlling and diverting residual water to the exterior
(see Figure 8-1).
•
Caution: Surface barrier systems require product design and installation that eliminate the introduction of water
behind the exterior plane of the outside barrier.
•
Window or door products are integrated into the surface barrier system by means of a sealant joint. The
sealant joint is the sole method for joining the various materials. The joining of these materials becomes the
weather barrier (the only defense) for the completed assembly.
PAGE 8-3
•
Windows and doors used in surface barrier systems are designed to seal to the exterior surface and attached
to the structure through the frame, or may be installed in a receptor system, which is attached to the structure.
•
Do not allow windows to extend beyond the “exterior face” of the building or beyond the exterior water barrier.
Figure 8-1 Surface Barrier Wall System
•
A “membrane/drainage system" is a wall that utilizes a WRB as a weather barrier behind the exterior surface
of the wall. Walls sided with some types of EIFS, stucco and brick or stone veneer are considered
membrane/drainage systems. The key to determining whether a wall is a membrane/drainage system is the
use and integration of the WRB (see Figure 8-2). Walls built with a membrane/drainage system may allow
incidental water to enter behind the outer-most surface of the building, but they are designed to control and
divert this water back out to the exterior.
•
Windows and doors are just one component of the entire building. Buildings employing a membrane/ drainage
system must incorporate the "whole building concept." This concept is based on the knowledge that each
construction element may allow some minor water infiltration; therefore, the water must be controlled and
allowed to escape harmlessly.
•
The whole building concept includes the use of a WRB applied in weather-board (shingled) fashion, which
allows any residual water to drain down to the base where a flashing member, screed or screen diverts it back
out.
•
The integration of the window/door framing, the installation accessories, and the weather barrier is critical.
Flashing and sealant are applied to integrate the window/door and the WRB together.
•
Sealing to the exterior surface (building façade) of a membrane/drainage wall may inhibit or trap water inside
the drainage plane of the wall cavity if allowance for water drainage is not considered. This could result in
water buildup and water infiltration toward the interior of the building and must be avoided.
PAGE 8-4
Figure 8-2 Membrane/Drainage Wall System
EIFS and GFRC Walls
EIFS (Exterior Insulation Finish System) and GFRC (Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete) walls can be considered
either a “surface barrier system" or a “membrane/drainage system,” depending on the manufacturer and the
design of their product.
EIFS systems (see Figure 8-3) are proprietary and may not be compatible with all types of windows and doors,
flashing systems and sealants. Work with the approving authority to verify the requirements of the window/door,
flashing, sealant and EIFS suppliers to ensure the compatibility of these materials in the completed assembly. If
conflicts exist, seek written direction from the approving authority on how to proceed with the work.
•
Drainable EIFS walls require a water resistive barrier over the sheathing, which allows the system to be
mechanically attached through the barrier into the supporting wall structure. A drainage plane can be
introduced by placing a plastic mesh between the EIFS and the water resistive barrier. Weep holes or
drainage tracks installed at the bottom of the walls and the floor lines eliminate the buildup of incidental water,
permitting it to drain to the exterior. Install flashing at the lintels in such a way as to allow for termination of the
WRB so incidental water can drain out at the head condition.
•
Wall systems that do not incorporate a WRB (such as building wrap or building paper) behind the exterior
face to allow for drainage must be treated as a surface barrier system. Barrier EIFS walls that are recognized
as a surface barrier system must incorporate flashing at the head and sill condition.
PAGE 8-5
•
The general contractor (GC) or construction manager (CM) must coordinate with the window/door installer
and the EIFS cladding supplier and architect to obtain information regarding the type of EIFS system to be
installed in order to determine the appropriate method of installing the windows and doors and related flashing
materials.
Figure 8-3 Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS)
8.2
Health and Safety Inspection
Contractors and installers are required to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Standards (29CRF Parts 1910 and 1926) if they have employees; OSHA requires all employers to provide a safe
and healthy workplace for their employees. In addition to OSHA's requirements, it is also important to protect the
occupants from health and safety hazards, as well as to protect their possessions from damage resulting from the
installation process.
Health and safety on the job site are very important. Over 90 percent of construction-related major accidents are
the result of four factors:
1. Falls (from heights)
2. Electrocutions
3. Crushing injuries (i.e., trench cave-ins)
4. Being struck by equipment or materials
On the job, a little caution and care can go a long way. Make health and safety awareness a habit. Workers can
avoid most accidents by using common sense, working at a reasonable pace, and maintaining constant
awareness of their surroundings.
PAGE 8-6
Contractors and/or installers can maintain a safe and healthy workplace by conducting a health and safety
inspection of the work site before, and during, each job.
When health and safety issues are discovered, a competent person must remedy them before starting work.
Inspect the site for:
1. Hazardous Materials
•
Lead-based paint
•
Asbestos-containing materials
•
Other chemicals
2. Hazardous Conditions
•
Exposure to walkways above pedestrians
•
Unprotected floor lines
•
Broken glass
•
Low electrical lines
•
Trash and debris
•
Trenches or holes on the building site and/or floor spaces
•
Insect nests
8.2.1
Hazardous Materials
When working on older buildings, installers may encounter a number of hazardous materials. Two of the most
common hazardous materials are lead-based paint and asbestos-containing materials; this is particularly
important when considering sealant removal as both lead-based paint and asbestos-containing materials may be
present.
Whenever possible, the installer should consider “jumping over” the existing sealant line in order to avoid
disturbing both the existing paint and seal.
Lead-Based Paint (LBP)
Lead-based paint was banned from use on residential structures after 1978; however, it’s still allowed to be used
on commercial and industrial structures. Studies of leaded paint on older buildings found that exterior wooden
components, such as windows, doors, siding and trim, may contain higher lead levels than other building
components.
Guidelines for working on building components coated with lead-based paints have been developed by the U.S.
Departments of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). It is
recommended that research be performed to be sure that the most current requirements are followed.
PAGE 8-7
Installers are required by federal law to provide customers/building owners with a copy of an EPA #747-K-99-001,
entitled “Protect Your Family from Lead in Your Home,” if they disturb more than 2 sq. ft. of lead-based paint on
the interior, or 10 sq. ft. on the exterior. Additional information can be obtained from the following website:
www.hud.gov/offices/lead/outreach/communityoutreach.cfm.
In the workplace, OSHA's “Lead in Construction Standard” (1926.62) and “Hazardous Communication Standard”
(1926.59) require employers to address lead exposure and train their workers on how to handle leaded materials.
Be aware that a number of states and local jurisdictions may have instituted their own lead regulations which
differ from the federal requirements (see Figure 8-4).
Figure 8-4 Safely Working with Lead-Based Paint
To reduce the workers’ and occupants' potential for danger due to exposure, test all painted building components
that will be disturbed for the presence of lead before they are worked on.
In lieu of testing, one can assume that all pre-1978 structures contain lead-based paints and work accordingly.
OSHA does not require the testing of coated surfaces, but it does require the monitoring of workers for exposure
to lead and asbestos.
The installer can consult with the contractor about providing the necessary safeguards.
The following
suggestions are offered as tips on handling lead-based paint.
1.
Do not turn leaded paint into leaded dust.
2.
Do not dry scrape, sand, or plane lead-based paint unless using a heat gun that operates below 1100°F.
Instead, use wet sanding, scraping, or planing methods (see Figure 8-5).
3.
Use a utility knife to score painted joints between jambs, trim, and walls.
4.
Do not use open-flame burning or torching techniques.
5.
Do not machine sand or grind, or conduct abrasive blasting or sandblasting of lead-based paint unless used
with a High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter exhaust control system.
6.
Confine dust and debris to as small an area as possible by containing it. Use 6 mil polyethylene disposable
plastic drop cloths under all areas where moderate-to-high levels of leaded dust may be generated.
7.
Do not smoke, eat, drink or chew tobacco or gum while working with leaded materials.
8.
Do not allow children or pets in the work area until the work is finished and the area has been thoroughly
cleaned.
PAGE 8-8
9.
Whenever possible, do not cut lead-painted materials (doors, jambs, windows, etc.) inside a building or
apartment.
10. Do not leave any debris that the occupants will have to remove.
11. Do not use the occupants' brooms, dustpans or vacuum cleaners.
12. Do not take the dust generated on the job home! Change work clothes and shoes before going home.
13. Keep work areas as free as possible from dust and debris—keep it clean! Dispose of leaded material in 6 mil
polyethylene bags.
14. Do not track dust around the building where the work is being done. Place 6 mil poly sheeting along the
pathway from the exterior of the unit to the work area to reduce contamination on the floor.
15. Use a High Efficiency Particulate Air filter (HEPA) vacuum to clean up dust/debris.
16. Wet-clean the work area with an appropriate detergent after it has been HEPA vacuumed
17. Use HEPA vacuum attachments on tools that generate dust.
Figure 8-5 Lead Precautions
Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)
Both the EPA and OSHA regulate disturbing and/or demolishing ACM.
Treat ACM the same as lead-based paint in terms of inspection, work-site preparation, disturbance, and clean up.
Consult with the contractor about taking the following precautions when disturbing joint compounds that may
contain asbestos:
PAGE 8-9
1.
Verify that the building has been tested for asbestos before disturbing a potential asbestos containing
material. A certified inspector is required to send "grab samples" to an accredited asbestos testing laboratory
to determine the asbestos content.
2. Place a layer of 6-mil plastic (poly) at least 6 ft in every direction around the window on which you are
working.
3.
If a significant amount of dust will be generated, a containment system will have to be installed around the
window.
4.
Always wet the asbestos-containing material using a fine mist of water containing a few drops of detergent
before, and while, you are disturbing it.
5.
Use a utility knife to score the joint between trim and walls before removing the window trim. This will reduce
breakage and pulverization of the wall material.
6.
Do not dust, sweep, or vacuum debris that may contain asbestos. These steps will disturb tiny asbestos
fibers and may release them into the air.
7.
Remove dust by vacuuming with a HEPA vacuum cleaner.
8.
If the floor can be mopped, wet mop around the window and the pathway in and out of the building which
workers use.
Other Chemical/Material Hazards
There are other potentially hazardous chemicals used on window installation jobs. The “Hazardous
Communication (HazCom) Standard” (1926.59) requires all employers to review the Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) for every chemical used on the job. Review MSDS for sealants with workers before the products are
used.
To obtain an MSDS for sealants, primers, solvents and other products, call the material manufacturer. Often
suppliers have the MSDS but fail to provide them to the purchasers.
California installers must also comply with Proposition 65 chemical and notification requirements.
Respirators
Respirators are commonly issued by employers to their employees to protect them from known and/or unknown
hazards. OSHA considers respirators as the "last line of defense" on the work site. Therefore, a respirator is the
last line of safety to be issued to reduce employee hazards; all other hazard-reduction measures must be
instituted first to control hazards before relying on a respirator to protect an employee.
For an employer to issue a respirator, the conditions of OSHA's “Respirator Standard” (29CFR 1910.139) must be
met. The “Respirator Standard” does not allow the issuance of respirators, which include dust masks as well as
standard respirators, without an employer conducting the proper assessments, a written respirator protection
program, and employee training. Both the lead and asbestos standards require atmospheric monitoring to
determine appropriate respirator usage.
PAGE 8-10
8.2.2
Job Site Safety Issues
Working safely with safe equipment is a must—not only for workers' safety, but also for the safety of occupants
and others at the job site. Use only tools and equipment that are maintained in a safe and hazard-free condition.
Equipment Safety
When setting up temporary portable tools and equipment, assume they will be used long-term. When installing
equipment, always set it up on secure footing, taking the extra precautions necessary to insure that it is on solid
ground and firmly planted. Apply all equipment locks and pins during the initial setup and do not remove them for
any reason until disassembly. Never take setting up equipment for granted; the installers’ safety and the safety of
others depend on proper use.
Electrical Safety
Review OSHA electrical safety suggestions and the six tips below:
1. Use a ground fault circuit interrupter when running power cords outside.
2. Use grounded power cords.
3. Make sure that extension cords have the capacity to handle the amperage draw of the power tool, and never
use an extension cord longer than 100 ft.
4. Before working on or adjusting power tools, unplug them.
5. When electrical equipment or circuits are de-energized in order to be worked on, they must be locked out and
tagged at all points where the equipment or circuits can be energized. Follow OSHA's lockout and tagging
procedures.
6. Make sure all power tools are in proper working condition before they are used.
Tool Safety
Improper and careless tool usage can cause injuries. All workers must be properly trained on each tool they use.
1. Match the tool with the job. (Pliers make terrible hammers.)
2. Inspect tools regularly. Repair or replace defective equipment.
3. Transport tools carefully.
4. Use the safety equipment that comes with the tools. Leave the guards in place; do not remove or disable
them.
5. Always wear safety glasses or goggles with anything that generates flying objects.
6. Use appropriate caution when working in situations where tools can be dropped on the public below or
expose the public to unexpected hazards.
PAGE 8-11
Accessibility Safety
Installers must have safe access to windows and doors. Performing a thorough inspection of openings will allow
the installer to decide what equipment will be needed to install products safely in each opening.
One of the first questions an installer must ask is whether the window or door opening is accessible. This factor is
very important when working with windows and doors, especially on multistory buildings. When working on
windows from the inside, make sure that there is sufficient room to do the job. To protect the occupant's
belongings and provide room to work, make sure the owner has cleared an area around the opening and a
pathway to the opening.
Evaluate the height above the ground or other fixed work areas, and accessibility of building openings to
determine the appropriate use of scaffolding and ladders per OSHA guidelines. Use scaffolding, power lifts or
swing staging when working on buildings higher than one story to provide a safe work place.Scaffolding and
Ladder Use
This reference manual does not address all of the rules for the proper use of scaffolding and ladders. Always use
this equipment as directed by the manufacturer. Scaffolding and ladders are intended to be used in specific ways
and include guidelines appropriate to their use in a safe and effective manner. When manufacturers' information is
not available, consult OSHA specifications for proper use. Consider the following supplemental guidelines when
using ladders or scaffolding.
Familiarize yourself and your employees with the provisions of OSHA's “Scaffolding Standard” (3150, 2002
Revised). Eleven key provisions from the document are listed:
PAGE 8-12
OSHA 3150
1. Fall protection is required on scaffolding for a 10 foot height above a lower level, 6 foot on other surfaces.
2. Guardrail height—The height of the top rail for scaffolds manufactured and placed in service before
January 1, 2000, can be between 36 inches (0.9 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). The height of the top rail for
scaffolds manufactured and placed in service after January 1, 2000, must be between 38 inches (0.97 m)
and 45 inches (1.2 m).
3. When the cross-point of cross-bracing is used as a top rail, it must be between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48
inches (1.3 m) above the work platform.
4. Support scaffold footings should be level and capable of supporting the loaded scaffold. The legs, poles,
frames, and uprights should bear on base plates and mud sills.
5. Supported scaffold platforms should be fully planked or decked.
6. Guying ties, braces, or the equivalent must be used on supported scaffolds with a height-to-base
measurement of more than 4:1 so that it is restrained from tipping.
7. Scaffolds and scaffold components must support at least 4 times the maximum intended load. Suspension
scaffold rigging must be able to support at least 6 times the intended load.
8. Midrails must be installed approximately halfway between the top rail and the platform surface. When a
cross-point or cross-bracing is used as a midrail, it must be between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8
m) above the work platform.
9. Erecting and Dismantling—When erecting and dismantling supported scaffolds, a competent person must
determine the feasibility of providing a safe means of access and fall protection for these operations.
10. Training—Employers must train each employee who works on a scaffold on the hazards and the
procedures to control the hazards.
11. Inspections—Before each work shift, and after any occurrence that could affect the structural integrity, a
competent person must inspect the scaffold and scaffold components for visible defects.
Scaffold Capacity Requirements
Consult OSHA guidelines before starting the design of scaffolding. Listed below are four helpful hints when
considering scaffolding capacity:
1. Each scaffold and scaffold component must support, without failure, its own weight and at least four times the
maximum intended load applied or transmitted to it.
2. Only load scaffolding in accordance with a scaffolding design developed by a qualified scaffold designer.
3. Scaffolds and scaffold components must not be loaded in excess of their maximum intended loads or rated
capacities, whichever is less.
2
4. Load-carrying timber members shall be a minimum of 1,500 lbf/in construction grade lumber.
PAGE 8-13
Use of Ladders
1. When portable ladders are used for access to an upper-landing surface, the side rails must extend at least 3
feet (.9 m) above the upper-landing surface. When such an extension is not possible, the ladder must be
secured and a grasping device such as a grab rail must be provided to assist workers in mounting and
dismounting the ladder. A ladder extension must not deflect under a load that would cause the ladder to slip
off its supports.
2. Ladders must be maintained free of oil, grease, and other slipping hazards.
3. Ladders must not be loaded beyond the maximum intended load for which they were built or beyond their
manufacturer's rated capacity.
4. Ladders must be used only for the purpose for which they were designed.
5. Non-self-supporting ladders must be used at an angle where the horizontal distance from the top support to
the foot of the ladder is approximately one-quarter of the working length of the ladder. Wood job-made
ladders with spliced side rails must be used at an angle where the horizontal distance is one-eighth the
working length of the ladder.
6. Fixed ladders must be used at a pitch no greater than 90 degrees from the horizontal, measured from the
back side of the ladder.
7. Ladders must be used only on stable and level surfaces unless secured to prevent accidental movement.
8. Ladders must not be used on slippery surfaces unless secured or provided with slip-resistant feet to prevent
accidental movement. Slip-resistant feet must not be used as a substitute for care in placing, lashing, or
holding a ladder upon slippery surfaces.
9. Ladders placed in areas such as passageways, doorways, driveways, or where they can be displaced by
workplace activities or traffic must be secured to prevent accidental movement or a barricade must be used
to keep traffic or activities away from the ladder.
10. The area around the top and bottom of the ladders must be kept clear.
11. The top of a non-self-supporting ladder must be placed with two rails supported equally unless it is equipped
with a single-support attachment.
12. Ladders must not be moved, shifted, or extended while in use.
13. Ladders must have non-conductive side rails if they are used where the worker or the ladder could contact
exposed energized electrical equipment.
14. The top or top step of a stepladder must not be used as a step.
15. Cross-bracing on the rear section of stepladders must not be used for climbing unless the ladders are
designed and provided with steps for climbing on both front and rear sections.
16. Ladders must be inspected by a competent person for visible defects on a periodic basis and after any
incident that could affect their safe use.
17. Single-rail ladders must not be used.
18. When ascending or descending a ladder, the worker must face the ladder.
19. Each worker must use at least one hand to grasp the ladder when climbing.
PAGE 8-14
20. A worker on a ladder must not carry any object or load that could cause him/her to lose balance and fall.
21. Generally it is a good idea to tie off the top and base.
8.3
Access and Barrier Issues
Prior to coordinating the work for any project, the contractor/employer needs to determine what kind of access
and/or barrier issues exist that are pertinent to the installation of commercial windows and doors. This involves
determining the measures that are necessary to perform the work in a safe and effective manner for both the
installer and the general public.
8.3.1
Fall Protection
OSHA 3146-1998 Revised “Fall Protection in Construction” provides a host of guidelines relative to fall hazards
and protection from falling objects. This manual is not meant to cover all of the issues relative to fall protection,
but outlines the concerns so that installers are aware of the hazards.
OSHA reports that falls are the leading cause of worker fatalities. Each year, according to the OSHA report, an
average of between 150 and 200 workers are killed, while more than 100,000 are injured due to construction site
falls.
The provisions covered under the standard include:
•
The duty to provide fall protection
•
Criteria and practices for fall protection systems
•
Hazard assessment
•
Fall protection and safety monitoring systems
•
Controlled access zones
•
Safety nets and guardrails
•
Personal fall arrest systems
•
Warning lines and barriers
•
Train and educate yourself and your employees to protect themselves and others from possible injury due to falls
and falling objects. For more information on training, contact:
OSHA Training Institute
Office of Training and Education
2020 South Arlington Heights Road
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60005-4102
(847) 297-4810
PAGE 8-15
8.3.2
Jobsite Access
Although typically not a safety issue, jobsite access can be a problem when it comes to material delivery.
Installers should check the perimeter of the building in order to determine parking and unloading constraints. This
is particularly important in cities where parking and access are at a premium, as it may determine when deliveries
can be made. The route taken to deliver is also critical. Check for height restrictions and overhead obstructions
that may cause problems for delivery.
Although parking is probably the last thing that might be thought about, it may be a critical factor to installers and
their ability to be effective. Always determine in advance where parking is permissible in order to avoid job costs
that were not considered during the bidding stages. As parking may change over the course of the job due to the
kind of work that is being performed, always stay in touch with the contractor for the latest requirements as they
relate to worker parking and delivery parking.
Elevator and hoist access is also a critical issue when unloading materials. Whenever possible, try to coordinate
these activities with the contractor in order to avoid jobsite delivery problems and delays. Also consider the
necessity of installing products in hoist bays at a later time, when equipment is removed, allowing access to the
openings.
Elevator access and size can play a critical role in determining how materials will be delivered. Many times the
elevator is designed to carry personnel, not materials or equipment. The size of the elevator and your access for
use may actually determine the shipping length of accessories, like subsills and receptors. As an example, if the
maximum diagonal dimension from corner to corner inside the elevator is 18 ft, a 20ft box of trim will have to be
hoisted another way. Determining these factors in advance of material delivery can be a critical factor in getting
the work started.
8.4
Pre-installation Inspection
A pre-installation inspection differs from a preliminary inspection in that all the materials and installation methods
have been decided upon based on the preliminary inspection. The pre-installation inspection usually occurs when
the installation crew arrives and involves an inspection of each opening. As part of the inspection:
1. Identify any unsafe building components, protruding nails and other structural hazards.
2. Check the structural soundness of the sill, head and jambs.
3. Check the opening for plumb, level, and square, and check rough opening dimensions.
4. Look for obvious signs of moisture (see Figure 8-6) before replacing windows and doors. Check doors,
windows and the adjacent walls for evidence of damage from condensation or water leakage, as indicated by:
•
Water stains, mold or mildew. This can be evident by sight or by smell.
•
Stains and/or flaking at head of the old window.
•
Staining or loose finish on the window frame.
•
Stains below the corner of the opening, on the wall.
•
Wet carpet or stains on the floor below or to the side of the opening.
PAGE 8-16
•
Ceiling or upper wall stains from the floor level above the opening.
Figure 8-6 Signs of Water Penetration
8.4.1
Protecting Existing Materials
When replacing windows and doors, installers must take extra precautions to protect the customer's furnishings,
floors and wall treatments.
•
Place clean plastic drop cloths or other suitable covering materials over furnishings and on the floor to avoid
damaging them.
•
Do not remove windows or doors unless they can be replaced the same day. Inclement weather can be a
primary source of damage to the existing construction and interior furnishings; therefore, never leave the
interior of the building exposed for extended periods of time.
•
In apartment buildings, be sure to coordinate the schedule for installation of the products with the building
occupants, or property manager, prior to entry.
Safety is also an important consideration when removing existing windows and doors.
PAGE 8-17
•
Erect barriers around exterior walkways, patios and other areas of potential harm to block them off from
harming occupants or visitors. This may include overhead protection as well as guardrails in accordance with
OSHA standards.
•
Tape the existing glass panes so that in the event of breakage, shards of glass will be restricted from falling
out of the window.
•
Whenever possible, use a safety line to tie off existing windows and the new windows to be installed to avoid
losing control and/or causing damage.
8.4.2
Reporting Construction Deficiencies
While inspecting the openings, whether new construction or replacement, check for construction deficiencies.
These may include the use of inappropriate construction practices, lack of required construction components, and
decaying materials.
If problems are detected, report the deficiencies to the approving authority in writing. This may be the building
owner on replacement projects, or the general contractor on new construction projects. If directed to continue, be
sure to get a written wavier of responsibility before proceeding.
8.4.3
Identifying and Removing Structural Components
Avoid removal of any structural components whenever possible. Where it is necessary to remove a structural
component of the building, consult with the proper authority before proceeding.Typically, it may be necessary to
consult with a licensed professional engineer, who is experienced in sizing framing materials before removal, and
replacement of structural components.
Whenever structural components must be removed, install a properly sized temporary support. For example, if the
existing opening is to be enlarged, install a temporary support to support the existing load before removing loadbearing components.
8.4.3.1
Checking the Details
Prior to beginning any work, determine the specifics (details) about what will be removed (in the case of
replacement work), what will be installed, and how much clearance is necessary. Installers are encouraged to
review all construction documents and communicate on the specific needs of the job with the contractor prior to
installation of any materials.
It is not uncommon for problems to be overlooked and show up entirely too late in the installation phase. As an
example, suppose that the windows being installed are out-swinging-type casements. In this example, screens (if
desired) may interfere with the drywall returns that are supposed to butt up to the window at the jambs.
PAGE 8-18
Another common problem occurs when there isn’t enough clearance at the sill condition to allow for operating the
rotating hardware handle. After the windows are installed and the finished sill is applied, it’s too late to discover
that the windows won’t operate because the handle hits the sill.
Although it is ordinarily the designer’s responsibility to catch these kinds of problems, they are often overlooked.
Many of these types of problems can be avoided if all parties involved in the work review the contract
documents/drawings carefully.
8.5
Quality Control Inspection
Quality control inspections are meant to take place periodically during installation (after a small percentage of the
windows are installed), and again after all the windows and doors are installed. It is to the installer’s benefit to
have the initial installation checked and approved as early as possible in order to avoid the potential for rework
later.
Communicate with the approving authority when the job is ready for the initial inspection. This is often
accomplished when the first few units are installed and anchored in place. It’s recommended that anchor
conditions are left exposed so a visual inspection can be performed. Take into consideration access to both the
interior and exterior side of the units that are installed, and gain access to them as soon as possible. As an
example, when working from the exterior on scaffolding, it would be much better to do a initial inspection before
installation, as opposed to when the job is completed and access to the exterior is limited, or other materials are
obstructing the view of critical areas.
Once the installation of all of the windows/doors and associated trim pieces is complete, the final quality control
inspection can be performed. See Chapter 23 for detailed information regarding this process.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
____
PAGE 8-19
Sample Inspection Form
Other ______________
(Replacement Work)
Exterior Trim
(Page 1 of 2)
Window Location
Poor Anchorage
Wood
Other Construction
Metal
Deficiencies (List)
Other ______________
Location of Windows and Doors
Unsound Ceiling
Inspect for Moisture
None
Water stains inside around
North
Historic Preservation of Trim is
door/window
South
Required
Stains or flaking of paint at
East
Wall Type
West
head of old window
Brick
Staining or loosened finish
Block
on the window frame
First Story
Concrete
Stains
Second Story or Higher
Stud
interior wall
Obstructions
Post
Wet carpet on floor below or
Landscaping
Other ______________
to the side of the window
Accessibility of Existing Openings?
Structures
Flashing
below
corner
Ceiling or upper wall stains
Existing HVAC/Duct Work or
Existing at Sill
from
Plumbing
Existing at Head
opening
Hoist Availability
Not Existing
Mold/Mildew Present
Elevator Availability
Do Not Know
Other ______________
Interior Finish
Specific Location Notes
Drywall
____________________________
Plaster
____________________________
Wood Panel
__________
Removable
Weather Barrier System
Other ______________
Surface Barrier
Interior Trim
Wood
EIFS/GFRC Walls
Marble/Stone
Obtained
Project
Details
&
Documentation
Window Inspection
Existing Window Frame
Aluminum
Metal
Wood
Vinyl
Steel
Other ______________
Structural Inspection
Inspect for Structural Damage
Deteriorating Foundation
Walls Out of Square
Head/Sill Not Level
Unsound Head/Lintel
Unsound Jambs
Unsound Roof
on
upstairs
window
Reason for Items Above
_________________________
___________________
Inspect for Lead
Windows
installed
after
1978
Windows installed before
1978
Inspect for asbestos
Siding
Joint Compound
Other ______________
Job Site Inspection
Job Site Hazards
Low Electrical Lines
Broken Glass
Insect Nests
Building Occupied
Trash and Debris
PAGE 8-20
Overhead Work
Other Potential Hazards
____________________________
________________
PAGE 8-21
Sample
Inspection
Form
_____________________________
Receptors
(Replacement Work)
_____________________________
Subsills
(Page 2 of 2)
________
Other_______________
New Windows/Doors
Planned Access
Needed To Access Openings
Sightlines Must Match Existing
Mullion Anchorage
(Historical)
None - Floating
Floor Work
Eyebrow at Head
Clip Angle At Head And Sill
Scaffolding
Arch Top
Of All Mullions
Ladders
Circle Top
Special Considerations
Scissor/Boom Lift
Equal Leg Frame
Other_______________
Unequal Leg Frame
Transition From Full Height
Other_______________
Opening to Partial Height
Availability of Parking/ Delivery?
No Known Problems
New Exterior Trim/Pan
Transitions
90º/135º Inside Corner
Limited Worker Parking
90º/135º Outside Corner
Limited Delivery Times
(Historical)
Special Corners
Must Coordinate All Deliveries
Colonial Panning
Horizontal Ribbons w/
Other ______________
Historical Panning
Male/Female Mullions
Specific Details for Above
Preset Panning
Vertical Stack Windows
____________________________
Wrap Around Panning
Stack Mullions
________________
Wood Mullion Covers
Parapet Wall Intersect.
Extenders/Expanders
Fixed Sidelites
Coordinate Integration of Various
Formed Trim/Capping
Other_______________
Products
Other_______________
Construction Integration
Flashing Materials
Interior Trim
Screens/Child Guards
Full Screens
Wall Weather Barrier
Reuse Existing
Half Screens
Sealant Type, Selection, Use &
Rectangular Trim
Fiberglass Mesh
Compatibility
Square Trim
Aluminum Mesh
Reuse of Existing Treatments
Special Shape Trim
Security Screens
Must Not Disturb Interior
Curved Trim (Arch Top)
Existing Child Guards
Existing Window/Door
New Extended Stool
New Child Guards
Other_______________
Other_______________
Treatments Are To Be Reused.
Remove Treatments and Turn
Over to Client
New Treatment Sizes Will
Match Existing
Specific Treatment Info.
Anchorage Requirements
Window/Door Anchorage
Hardware Requirements
Limit Opening _____
Steel Twist Anchor
Pole Operating Hdw.
Through Wall Anchor
Security Locks
Aluminum Clips
Roto Operators
Anchor Through Trim
Stainless Steel Req’d.
Steel Clips
PAGE 8-22
Egress/ADA Requirements
Allow for Egress (where
required)
Allow for Ramps at SGD
None Known
Other ______________
PAGE 8-23
Sample Inspection Form (New
Wall Type
Other Construction
Construction)
Brick
Deficiencies (List)
(Page 1 of 2)
Block
Contractor
Concrete
Documentation is On File
Stone
________________
Window Location
Location of Windows and Doors
Notified
and
EIFS/Stucco
Specify Problems
North
Steel Stud
_________________________
South
Wood Stud
_________________________
East
Other ______________
_________________________
West
Accessibility of Existing Openings
First Story
Second Story or Higher
_____________
Thru Wall Flashing
Existing at Sill
Job Site Inspection
Existing at Head
Job Site Hazards
Interior Finish
Low Electrical Lines
Obstructions
Drywall
Landscaping
Plaster
Structures
Wood Panel
Hoist Availability
Other ______________
Elevator Availability
Removable
Other ______________
Trash and Debris
Overhead Work
Protected Walkway Will Be
Required
Interior Trim
Guardrails Required
Specific Location Notes
Wood
____________________________
Metal
____________________________
Marble
____________________________
Other ______________
____________________________
____________________
Weather Barrier System
Openings in Floors
Other Potential Hazards
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Construction Integration
Coordinate Integration of Various
Planned Access
Products
Used To Access Openings
Surface Barrier
Flashing Materials
Wall Weather Barrier
EIFS/GFRC Walls
Sealant Type, Selection, Use &
Opening Inspection
Existing Opening Cond.
_____________
Floor Work
Scaffolding
Ladders
Compatibility
Scissor/Boom Lift
Structure Inspection
Plumb
Inspect Openings for Structural
Level
Problems
Hoist Use Permitted
Elevator Use Permitted
Square
Condition of Substrate
True
Poor
Rough Opening Dimensions
conditions
Anchorage
Framing Missing
or
Other_______________
loose
Availability of Parking/ Delivery?
No Known Problems
Limited Worker Parking
Limited Delivery Times
PAGE 8-24
Must Coordinate All Deliveries
Specific Details for Above
PAGE 8-25
Sample Inspection Form (New
Steel Clips
Roto Operators
Construction)
Receptors
Stainless Steel Req’d.
(Page 2 of 2)
Subsills
Window Washer Bolts
Other______________
Multi Point Locks
New Windows/Doors
Mullion Anchorage
Heavy Duty Balances
Eyebrow at Head
None – Floating
Stainless Stl. Door Track
Arch Top
Male/Female Combo
Alarm System
Circle Top
Clip Angle At Head And Sill Of
Equal Leg Frame
All Mullions
Unequal Leg Frame
Other______________
New Exterior Trim/Pan
Special Considerations
Transitions
Egress/ADA Requirements
Allow for Egress at Sleeping
Rooms
Transition From Full Height
Allow for Ramps at SGD
Opening to Partial Height
None Known
(Historical)
90º/135º Inside Corner
Other _____________
Colonial Panning
90º/135º Outside Corner
Historical Panning
Special Corners
Security Glass
Preset Panning
Splay Wall
Tempered Glass Doors
Wrap Around Panning
Horizontal Ribbons w/
Tempered Glass Sidelites
Three Piece Mullions
Male/Female Mullions
Tempered Glass Windows
Receptors
Vertical Stack Windows Stack
At The Following Locations
Subsills
Mullions
______________________
Sill Member
Parapet Wall Intersect.
______________________
Other______________
Fixed Sidelites
_____________
Overhead Transom
Breather Tubes Req’d.
Rectangular Trim
Special Flashing/Coping
Spandrel Glass
Square Trim
Other______________
Panels for AC Units
Interior Trim
Special Shape Trim
Screens/Child Guards
Special Glass Requirements
Between Glass Blinds
Curved Trim (Arch Top)
Full Screens
Aluminum Stool
Half Screens
Wood Stool
Fiberglass Mesh
Testing By Lab/Consult.
Marble Stool
Aluminum Mesh
Testing By Manufacturer
Other______________
Security Screens
Contract Documents
Anchorage Requirements
Window/Door Anchorage
Steel Twist Anchor
Child Guards
Other______________
Hardware Requirements
Other ______________
Field Testing Required
Governing Documents
Job Specifications
Architectural Drawings
Through Wall Anchor
Limit Opening _____
Detailed Shop Drawings
Aluminum Clips
Pole Operating Hdw.
Mfg. Install. Instructions
Anchor Through Trim
Security Locks
Estimate/Contract
PAGE 8-26
Other _____________
Other Job Specific Notes:
____________________________
____________________________
____________________________
__________________________
PAGE 8-27
Table of Contents
9.1
Building Codes ............................................................................................................................................2
9.1.1
Development of Codes .......................................................................................................................2
9.1.2
Regional Model Building Codes .........................................................................................................3
9.1.3
Model Energy Codes ..........................................................................................................................3
9.1.4
Standards............................................................................................................................................4
9.2
Home Rule Doctrine ...................................................................................................................................6
9.3
Accessibility ................................................................................................................................................6
9.3.1
Windows .............................................................................................................................................6
9.3.2
Doors ..................................................................................................................................................6
9.4
Emergency Escape Requirements .............................................................................................................7
9.5
Safety Glazing ............................................................................................................................................9
9.5.1
Types of Safety Glass .........................................................................................................................9
9.5.2
Safety Glass Labeling ...................................................................................................................... 10
9.5.3
IBC Safety Glass Standards ............................................................................................................ 10
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 9-I
9.0 Codes, Standards and Specifications
9.1
Building Codes
The construction industry is governed by a group of regulations and requirements. These rules and regulations
are designed to provide uniformity on minimum design and construction practices, thereby avoiding
inconsistencies arising from differing approaches of architects, builders and installers. Once national, state or
local codes are adopted by jurisdictions, they become law and must be followed.
9.1.1
Development of Codes
Regulations and requirements represent input from various interested groups. Because of the large number and
diversity of these groups, it is virtually impossible to develop one single set of criteria or standards to govern the
manufacture, selection, installation and maintenance of windows and doors.
Numerous standards, codes and ordinances have been developed. Installers must comply with the code that
relates to their work. However, overlap in requirements can be confusing without a basic understanding of their
development and enforceability.
Local government regulates the construction industry by means of building codes that are developed through an
arduous process. First, specifications are developed to clearly describe technical requirements for materials,
procedures and services. Specifications may state the requirements for a desired product and the process used
to produce it.
Standards are guidelines or principles that are agreed upon by a broad spectrum of the industry, typically working
through an association.
Once standards or requirements are published, they may become codes. Once that code is adopted by a
jurisdiction, it becomes law (see Figure 9-1).
PAGE 9-2
Figure 9-1 Development of Codes
9.1.2
Regional Model Building Codes
In the past, there were three regional model building codes written by three separate organizations of building
officials. Each state, county and municipal jurisdiction typically adopted one of these regional codes. They were
known as the Uniform Building Code (UBC) published by ICBO, the BOCA National Building Code, and the
SBCCI Standard Building Code.
In order to try to create one uniform code used by all jurisdictions, an International Code Council (ICC) was
developed to replace the previous three. The code developed by the ICC to address commercial construction is
the International Building Code (IBC). An updated edition of the code is published every three years. This code
and its revisions don't become law until adopted by the local jurisdiction.
9.1.3
Model Energy Codes
About one-third of all energy in the United States is consumed in buildings. This high level of usage led to the
development of various energy standards and codes, with support from the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE).
Many states, such as California and Oregon, publish their own energy codes. Other states rely heavily on the
Model Energy Codes, or the International Energy Conservation Code, which replaced the Model Energy Code in
2000.
The Model Energy Codes were initially developed through a joint effort of the three model code agencies, BOCA,
ICBO and SBCCI, called CABO (Council of American Building Officials). This joint effort was superceded by the
formation of the International Code Council (ICC) by these same three agencies in 1995. Subsequently, the name
of the Model Energy Code was changed to the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) to be consistent
with the other codes published by the ICC. See Table 9-1 for contact information.
PAGE 9-3
ICC (International Code Council)
500 New Jersey Avenue, NW
6th Floor,
Washington, DC 20001-2070
Phone: 888/722-7233
Fax: 202/783-2348
Web: www.iccsafe.org
Table 9-1 Building Code Agencies
There are also several housing codes that may refer to window and door installation. They include the following:
•
Basic Housing - Property Maintenance Code
•
HUD Code
•
ICC - International Building Code
•
SCBBI SSTD 10, “Standard for Hurricane Resistance Residential Construction”
9.1.4
Standards
There are numerous groups that work diligently to develop standards for the window and door (see Table 9-2).
Agencies and departments within the federal government also develop standards to protect the health, safety,
and welfare of citizens. Many of their standards, which have been adopted as federal codes, address window and
door requirements and must be followed.
•
ADA — Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) became law in 1990 and was implemented by the Department
of Justice on July 26, 1991. These regulations have had far-reaching effects upon the glazing trade,
especially regarding access to, and use of, buildings by the disabled.
•
CPSC — Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) is a federal agency that regulates product safety.
Safety glazing regulation 16 CFR Part 1201 became law on July 6, 1977, and mandates safety glazing in all
doors designed primarily for human passage.
•
OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) is a division of the U.S. Department of
Labor that develops and enforces safety requirements for the protection of employees in the workplace.
PAGE 9-4
AAMA (American Architectural Manufacturers Association)
1827 Walden Office Square
Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
Phone: 847/303-5664
Fax: 847/303-5774
Web: www.aamanet.org
ANSI (American National Standards Institute, Inc.)
25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor
New York, NY 10036
Phone: 212/642-4900
Fax: 212/398-0023
Web: www.ansi.org
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
100 Barr Harbor Drive
PO Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428
Phone: 610/832-9585
Fax: 610/832-9555
Web: www.astm.org
IGMA (Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance)
1500 Bank Street, Suite 300
Ottawa, Ontario K1H 1B8
CANADA Phone: 613/233-1510
Fax: 613/482-9436
Web: www.igmaonline.org
NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council)
6305 Ivy Lane, Suite 140
Greenbelt, MD 20770
Phone: 301/589-1776
Fax: 301/589-3884
Web: www.nfrc.org
PAGE 9-5
WDMA (Window & Door Manufacturers Association)
1400 East Touhy Avenue, Suite 470
Des Plaines, IL 60018-3337
Phone: 847-299-5200
Fax: 847-299-1286
Web: www.wdma.com
Table 9-2 Agencies Developing Standards
9.2
Home Rule Doctrine
Because of the large number of specifications, codes and standards that affect the window and door industry,
conflicts between their requirements will inevitably arise. When a conflict occurs, one shall remember the concept
of "Home Rule Doctrine," which means, “the most stringent requirement applies." Our governmental structure
allows the lowest governing body to have final control, as long as their requirement is equal to, or more stringent
than, the state or federal requirement.
An example of "Home Rule Doctrine" might be maximum sill height for an egress window in an apartment building
(see Figure 9-2). The 2003 IBC allows a maximum of 44 in. A state code may reduce this to 42 in. The county
code may be 40 in, and the local code may be even lower, specifying a maximum of 38 in. In this case, the 38 in
maximum would be enforced because it is the most stringent. The Property Owners' Association's CC&Rs
(Covenants, Conditions and Restrictions) could reduce the sill height even more.
9.3
Accessibility
The Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988 and the American Disabilities Act Access Guidelines (ADAAG)
require that public buildings and multifamily dwellings (generally considered to be buildings consisting of four or
more dwelling units) include certain features of accessible design. Therefore, installers of doors must have an
awareness of the Fair Housing Act and ADAAG design and construction requirements.
9.3.1
Windows
The Fair Housing Act Amendment requirement does not apply to windows; however, the ADAAG and ICC/ANSI
A117.1 do have requirements for accessible windows. These requirements are provided in Chapter 11 of the IBC.
9.3.2
Doors
The ADAAG and ANSI A117.1 require some doors to be accessible. The requirements can be found in Chapter
11 of the IBC. The requirements apply to all doors that are on an accessible path of egress in the building, which
includes accessible spaces or dwelling units, and most public areas in buildings where accessible spaces or
dwelling units are required. This includes most commercial buildings, and the common areas of multi-family
housing developments.
When installing exterior glass doors in multi-family dwelling units, consider this list of pointers and cautions:
PAGE 9-6
•
Doors must be wide enough to enable a person in a wheelchair to maneuver through easily.
•
Doors must have a minimum clear-opening width of 32” (measured from face of door to the stop with door
open 90 degrees) for wheelchair access.
•
Exterior door thresholds and sliding door tracks typically are not to exceed 1/2” to 3/4" in height.
Thresholds and changes in level at these locations are to be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2.
Consult with governing authorities for specific height dimensions.
•
Minimum clear width for an accessible route inside the unit is 36”.
•
All types of doors used for human egress are covered - hinged, sliding and folding. Overhead doors and
similar doors used for the movement of goods and equipment are not covered.
•
Doors leading to any outdoor amenities that the accessible dwelling may have (e.g. balcony, patio, deck)
shall comply with these requirements. If a deck or patio has doorways leading into two or more separate
rooms, all these doors must be accessible. Requirements apply to:
-
Public and common-use doors;
-
Doors leading into an individual dwelling unit that is required to be accessible. The number of
accessible dwelling units required depends upon the total number of dwelling units provided, and is
given in tabular form in Chapter 11 of the International Building Code; and
-
Most doors within the accessible dwelling unit itself. There are some exceptions for doors within the
accessible dwelling unit that are not normally considered egress doors, such as doors to small closets
or access doors for mechanical equipment.
•
Doors in public or common-use areas, when installed, must be in conformance with ICC/ANSI A117.1.
•
Hallways, passages and corridors must be wide enough to allow room to maneuver a wheelchair
throughout.
9.4
Emergency Escape Requirements
Emergency escape and rescue opening (previously called “emergency egress”) refers to a means of exiting a
building in the event of emergency, or defines the opening by which an emergency rescue can be performed. The
Model Codes (and the National Fire Protection Association NFPA 101) include specific requirements for
emergency escape and rescue for doors and windows.
This section briefly discusses emergency escape, which is titled "Emergency Escape and Rescue Openings" in
the 2006 IBC, Section 1026. Each sleeping room in buildings of four stories or less, above grade (some
exceptions may apply), is required to have at least one emergency escape and rescue door, window or skylight.
An emergency escape and rescue opening must conform to the following requirements (see Figure 9-2):
•
A minimum net clear openable area of 5.7 square feet,
•
A minimum net clear openable height dimension of 24",
•
A minimum net clear openable width dimension of 20" and
•
A finished sill height of not more than 44" above the floor.
PAGE 9-7
•
The required dimensions are to be achieved through the “normal operation” of the window without the use
of keys or tools. “Normal operation” of the window does not include removing a sash or removing a pin on
the casement hardware to swing it fully open.
When installing windows (new construction and replacement windows), the installer must be aware of the
emergency escape and rescue requirements enforced by the local jurisdiction. Often one type of window, such as
casement, will meet the requirement, but a slider or hung window of the same size would not.
The installer shall not install windows into residential sleeping rooms that do not meet emergency escape
requirements. This limitation includes retrofit windows installed into existing window frames that may significantly
reduce the emergency escape opening dimensions. Some jurisdictions have adopted special regulations that
dictate the amount the emergency escape and rescue opening can be reduced. This permitted reduction varies
from 3” to 6”, depending on the jurisdiction, and is generally permitted in both the vertical and horizontal direction.
To be safe, an installer shall always consult the local building official on the requirements in their particular area
before installing windows.
Some manufacturers offer windows or skylights that are designed specifically for emergency escape and rescue.
They might be used in areas that open up directly onto a roof or balcony. Windows of this nature are designed for
emergency escape and rescue only, and may incorporate a label that signifies “Emergency Escape Only.” This
typically means that the window is large enough to be used in an emergency, yet it’s not designed to be used to
provide typical everyday ventilation.
If emergency escape and rescue windows or skylights of this type are used for purposes other than emergency
escape and rescue, especially if they open to the exterior or are left open for extended periods of time, they may
pose a significant liability issue. Always caution building owners against allowing the use of these windows for
anything other than emergency escape and rescue, and insist that the warning labels not be removed.
PAGE 9-8
Figure 9-2 Emergency Escape Requirements
9.5
Safety Glazing
The IBC, as well as the federal government and each of the three previous model codes, requires safety glass to
be installed in hazardous locations (locations subject to human impact). This requirement is intended to protect
occupants from injury caused by hitting the glass with a dynamic force, which may be caused by running, walking,
or falling into the glass.
The requirements discussed in this chapter are based on safety glazing requirements set forth by the 2003
International Building Code, Section 2406. The sections that follow provide an overview of the safety glass
requirements; however, the prevailing code must be reviewed for each specific locality. The most current version
of the International Building Code is the 2006 IBC.
9.5.1
Types of Safety Glass
The most common forms of safety glass used in commercial applications are tempered and laminated. Safety
glass can be plain, patterned, clear, tinted or translucent (such as "obscure" panels sometimes used adjacent to
entry doors).
All safety glass must be manufactured and tested to one, or both, of the following safety glass standards:
American National Standards Institute ANSI Z97.1-1984 (reaffirmed 1994), and the Code of Federal Regulations
CPSC 16 CFR 1201. The 2003 IBC Section 2406.1.2 permits compliance with ANSI Z97.1 instead of CPSC 16
CFR 1201, only for wired glass in assemblies that are required to be rated for fire resistance These assemblies
are not permitted in educational buildings (kindergarten through grade 12), or in the playing areas of athletic
facilities (gymnasiums, basketball and racquetball courts, etc.). The 2006 IBC does not reference this exception.
The IBC dictates which assemblies are required to be fire resistance rated.
PAGE 9-9
9.5.2
Safety Glass Labeling
Each lite (pane) of safety glass must be permanently identified with a label etched or painted with a ceramic frit
fired into the glass. A permanent identification label, commonly called a "bug", must be present on each pane of
glass installed where safety glazing is required. The permanent label must identify the labeler (whether
manufacturer or installer) by name or logo, and state the ANSI or CPSC safety glazing standard it complies with.
In the IBC, the label is to be provided through participation in a third-party, quality control program that reviews
the testing of the product, and conducts periodic inspection of its production. There is no standard specifying the
location of permanent labels on safety glass; however, manufacturers most commonly place them in a bottom
corner.
Shown in Figure 9-3 are examples of three "bugs" and the information they typically contain.
Figure 9-3 Permanent Label "Bugs"
One of the first things any installer shall do is to check each window on the job for the safety glazing identification.
This will help installers recognize that there is a requirement for safety glazing on the job and assist them in
making the determination as to the correct location of the product.
9.5.3
IBC Safety Glass Standards
The most widely enforced safety glass requirements for windows and doors are based upon the 2000 or 2003
IBC. The following information is a summary of what is presented in Chapter 24 of the 2003 IBC. Always refer to
the latest version of the code for complete and up-to-date information as well as those items not covered in this
summary. The latest version of the International Building Code is the 2006 IBC.
Glazing in Operable Windows and Fixed Glazed Panels (Adjacent to Doors)
1. Safety glass is required in any operable window or fixed panel adjacent to a door (see Figure 9-4) where:
PAGE 9-10
•
The nearest exposed edge of the glazing is within a 24” arc of either vertical edge of the door in a closed
position; and
•
Where the bottom exposed edge of the glazing is less than 60" above the walking surface.
Exceptions: Not required when there is an intervening wall or other permanent barrier between the door and the
glazing.
Not required for glazing in walls that are perpendicular (90°) to the plane of the wall the door is in.
Figure 9-4 Safety Glass for Operable Windows and Fixed Glazed Panels (Adjacent to Doors)
Glazing In Operable Windows and Individual Fixed Panels (Not Adjacent to Doors)
1. Safety glass is required in individual fixed or operable panels which meet all of the following conditions:
•
The exposed area of an individual pane is greater than 9 ft ;
•
The exposed bottom edge of the glazing is less than 18” above the floor;
•
The exposed top edge of the glazing is greater than 36” above the floor; and
•
One or more walking surface(s) is within 36” horizontally of the plane of glass (see Figure 9-5).
2
Exceptions: Not required when a protective bar 1½” or more in height, capable of withstanding a horizontal load of
50 pounds per linear foot without contacting the glass is installed on the accessible sides of the glazing 34” to 38”
above the floor.
Not required in the outboard lite in an insulating glass unit or multiple glazing where the bottom exposed edge of
the glass is 25” or more above any grade, roof, walking surface or other horizontal or sloped (within 45° of
horizontal) surface adjacent to the glass exterior.
PAGE 9-11
Figure 9-5 Safety Glass in Fixed and Operable Panes (Not Adjacent to Doors)
Glazing In Guards and Railings or Walls and Fences Enclosing Swimming Pools, Hot Tubs and Spas, etc.
Glazing in special areas like those listed above is outside the scope of this manual; however, installers shall be
aware that special requirements may apply. Always refer to the governing code for special requirements.
Safety Glazing in Hazardous Locations (Swing and Sliding Glass Doors)
The following are considered specific hazardous locations and require safety glazing according to the IBC:
•
Glazing in swing doors, except jalousies
•
Glazing in fixed and sliding panels of sliding door assemblies
•
Glazing in unframed swing doors.
Exceptions: Not required for glass in doors where a 3” sphere would be unable to pass through the glass opening.
Safety Glazing in Stairways, Ramps, Athletic Facilities and Glass in Floors and Sidewalks
The IBC specifically covers additional special areas requiring safety glazing, which are outside the scope of this
manual. Always consult the codes to determine safety glazing requirements for special areas on your particular
project.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
PAGE 9-12
Table of Contents
10.1
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions ..................................................................................................1
10.2
General Installation Guidelines ...............................................................................................................2
10.3
Following Shop Drawings .......................................................................................................................2
10.4
Special Circumstances ...........................................................................................................................2
10.5
When Conflicts Arise ..............................................................................................................................2
10.6
Common Cautions For Installers ............................................................................................................3
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
Page 10-i
10.0 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
There are numerous manufacturers of windows and glass doors across the country. Many manufacturers have
developed specific uses and installation procedures for their products, which are referred to as "manufacturer's
installation instructions."
These manufacturers provide installation instructions for guidance and direction in the proper installation of their
products. Never take action(s) inconsistent with the manufacturer’s installation instructions without consultation
with all appropriate parties.
Manufacturer's instructions shall be considered a requirement, not an option. At any time that the manufacturer's
instructions appear inconsistent with the job requirements, the installer must seek further information from the
responsible architect, builder, and manufacturer. Action(s) inconsistent with manufacturer instructions must never
be taken without consultation with all appropriate parties.
10.1
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
Manufacturers develop and build products to meet industry standards. These products must meet specific
performance requirements when built and installed in a certain manner. It is not the intent of this manual to
override the manufacturer's recommendations on proper installation techniques. This manual is meant to provide
guidance and to reinforce the use of the manufacturer's installation instructions.
For example: Assume that there are no architectural drawings, specifications, or shop drawings. If a
manufacturer's installation instructions indicate that the products are to be installed with 1/4" diameter × 3" long
anchor bolts at 16” on center, those recommendations must be followed. The manufacturer is being specific
regarding the need to attach the product at certain locations. It is entirely possible that the manufacturer has
determined through testing and/or calculations that the product will perform better when attached in this manner.
If another source, such as this manual, indicates that products are to be attached at a minimum of 18” on center,
the manufacturer's instructions shall still be followed. Understanding this distinction is critical to an installer's
success in meeting his obligation to install the products in an appropriate manner.
To reduce the potential for confusion on the requirements of the project, carefully review the construction
documents listed below:
•
Local, Regional and National Building Codes
•
Contract Documents
•
Architectural Specifications and Drawings
•
Detailed Shop Drawings, Installation Instructions and Job Calculations
Page 10-1
10.2
General Installation Guidelines
The guidelines and principles outlined in this manual are general installation guidelines and minimum
recommended project requirements. The manufacturer's instructions always take precedent over the guidelines
contained in this manual.
This manual does not offer recommendations specific to every manufacturer, but it does offer recommendations
for basic installation practices. The installation practices outlined in this manual have been developed by
consensus among industry experts in the field of building construction.
10.3
Following Shop Drawings
If installation instructions are not provided with the product, consult the contractor, manufacturer or dealer to
determine if detailed shop drawings are available before proceeding. Shop drawings are commonly provided, and
may include job specific applications based on architectural drawings, specifications and other contract
documents. Whenever job approved shop drawings are provided, follow the installation procedures specific to the
job. When no installation instructions or shop drawings are available, use the procedures outlined in this manual
as a minimum installation requirement.
10.4
Special Circumstances
Occasionally, the installation of windows and doors differs from the "norm." If the manufacturer's installation
instructions and the guidelines offered in this manual, do not address a special circumstance found on the job, the
installer is responsible for contacting the contractor or manufacturer for specific instructions relative to the job in
question. Many manufacturers have trained engineering personnel on staff who can assist with special
applications. Often the manufacturer provides products based on a specific order without knowing the intended
use of the products. Share detailed information with the manufacturer to correctly address the special
circumstances that arise.
10.5
When Conflicts Arise
There will be cases when conflicts arise between the installer and the approving authority. An installer may be told
to install a product in a certain manner, which is in direct conflict with the manufacturer's instructions, job
calculations, and/or the principles outlined in this manual. When this situation occurs, immediately contact the
responsible party about the situation. The responsible party shall handle and resolve any disputes and get a
written wavier of responsibility if the work is to proceed as instructed by the approving authority.
Full documentation of the situation including the conflicting instructions, specific details, photographs and the
actions taken by the installer must be done in writing as a matter of permanent record. Installers and their
management are encouraged to maintain these records for a period of not less than 10 years.
Page 10-2
10.6
Common Cautions For Installers
Manufacturers report that a number of common problems are found in the field. The following list of cautions is
provided to help the installer avoid these problems:
•
Always follow the installation instructions and/or shop drawings.
•
When working from shop drawings or measurement sheets, make sure you have the latest version.
•
Check the route for the manufacturer’s delivery vehicle making sure that it can meet the height
restrictions and deliver to the site, especially under bridges and viaducts.
•
Upon arrival, make sure to account for all materials delivered at the job site. Place these materials in a
secure area to avoid damage and/or loss.
•
Make sure to pinpoint where tempered, laminated, or obscure glass is required once the materials arrive
on site.
•
To avoid damaging the corners of the frames, use a protective mat on the ground when offloading
products from the truck.
•
Make sure that the condition you are anchoring to is of sufficient strength (especially on replacement
work). Upon investigation you may find that the condition is rotten or loose.
•
Handle windows/doors with grids carefully in order to avoid damaging the grids.
•
Always check screen quantities, locations and sizes. However, in order to avoid damage, leave the
screens off the product until the job is finished.
•
Always check existing back seals that were applied in the factory. If the seal is damaged, contact the
factory on the proper materials/methods required for resealing.
•
Always check the windows/doors for missing or damaged weep hole covers which may have occurred
during transport.
•
In replacement applications always check for obstructions like columns, sheer walls, spandrel areas, etc.
to determine if special installation techniques will be required.
•
Be careful when removing existing window treatments if they are to be reused. Find out if the treatments
are to be reused, and if they will still work based on the new window sizes and configurations.
•
When sash must be removed, make sure to mark the sash and the corresponding frame (example: F-12
and S-12). Always place sash back in the correct frame; it may have been adjusted in the factory to
specifically fit that unit.
•
Inspect the opening conditions not only for the correct size, but also for square, anchorage and sealant
adhesion.
•
Don’t remove any windows until double-checking the openings to verify the correct fit.
•
Check the drawings and the actual building conditions for hardware operation clearance. Raised stools,
blinds and window treatments often block the rotation and/or access to operable hardware handles.
•
Make sure enough of the correct size and type fasteners and shims for installation are available.
Page 10-3
•
Non-corrosive hardware and fasteners are commonly provided as an upgrade to avoid corrosion in
coastal areas. If the project is in proximity of a coastline, make sure the manufacturer is informed at the
time of order.
•
Make sure all accessories and the window/door frames are set plumb, level and square.
•
Never block weep holes with sealant or any other materials that will keep water from draining properly.
•
Check windows for hardware damage and proper operation. Operate and adjust hardware as required in
order to avoid future damage and/or accidents to those who might use them in the future.
•
Don’t drill through window/door frames to apply alarm systems. Drilling through frames often allows water
into places where it can’t get out.
•
To avoid sagging, use extra precautions when attaching the hinge jamb of casement windows and hinged
doors.
•
Don’t apply films to the glass without first consulting with the window/door or glass manufacturer. Films
can often lead to heat buildup and glass breakage.
•
Don’t block the drainage path (weep holes) at doors when used in conjunction with patios involving brick,
stone or concrete pavers. When necessary, use a starter sill, and/or shim the door high enough to clear
any obstructions.
•
Don’t attach through the glazing cavity with fasteners. This may cause glass breakage in the future.
•
Don’t apply field limit devices or other types of hardware without first consulting with the manufacturer.
Limit devices may cause additional clearance and/or operation problems, and may void the warranty or
violate ventilation codes.
•
Don’t block breather holes with sealant on dual sash. Breather holes are meant to allow air circulation.
•
Always seal metal-to-metal joints. Also make sure end dams are sealed properly on sub-sills.
•
Be careful about stripping out the head of fasteners on hardware or other materials that may require
future removal or adjustment. If the head looks like it is starting to strip out, replace it with the same size
fastener.
•
Use compatible sealants that are meant to allow for movement due to expansion/contraction and/or interstory displacement.
•
Know the sealant manufacturer’s guidelines for maximum and minimum temperatures when applying
sealant.
•
If a sealant will be used for purposes other than those specified or recommended, check with the window
and sealant manufacturers to ensure that the substituted sealant has adequate adhesion, and is
compatible with all contact surfaces.
•
Check blind tilt control knobs to ensure they are not missing or damaged.
•
Don’t use (or allow others to use) the finished window/door opening as an access for material delivery.
This often results in the build up of debris inside the frame and/or causes damage to window frames and
door thresholds.
•
Make sure the framing surfaces are protected from corrosive materials such as mortar and sulfuric acid,
which are commonly found in most external cleaning solutions.
Page 10-4
•
Don’t leave adhesively applied covers on the finish for extended periods of time. Be sure to remove these
materials prior to the final perimeter seal.
•
Be extremely careful about welding after installation. Shield the glass and frame from weld flash as
damage/breakage may occur.
•
Use extreme caution when field applying items such as air conditioners, security screens, sun shades,
window guards, window treatments and others, as drilling and mounting to frames may cause water and
air infiltration and may have an effect on the operation of the units.
•
When drilling through the frame to make attachments, make sure to seal the penetration.
•
Don’t assume anything. If you need clarification, seek guidance.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________
Page 10-5
Table of Contents
11.0 Measuring and Ordering .....................................................................................................................................1
11.1
Taking Measurements ................................................................................................................................3
11.1.1
Following Manufacturer's Requirements ............................................................................................3
11.1.2
Vertical and Horizontal Measurements ...............................................................................................3
11.1.3
Measuring Spring Lines and Making Templates for Curves ...............................................................6
11.1.4
Wall Depth and Window Location .......................................................................................................9
11.1.5
Checking Wall for Plumb ....................................................................................................................9
11.1.6
Checking Level ................................................................................................................................ 10
11.2
Clearance Provisions ............................................................................................................................... 10
11.2.1
Allowing for Clearances ................................................................................................................... 10
11.2.2
Allowance for Out-of-Square ........................................................................................................... 10
11.2.3
Allowing for Accessories .................................................................................................................. 10
11.3
Installation Tolerances ............................................................................................................................. 16
11.4
Shipping Instructions ............................................................................................................................... 17
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 11-I
11.0 Measuring and Ordering
Many factors must be considered before ordering a window or door. Frequently, windows and doors arrive on site
and do not fit in the opening properly because the exact opening measurements were not taken. Additionally,
some errors occur when the proper allowance for clearance, sealant joints or accessory items are not taken into
consideration.
In addition to opening measurements, it is critical to determine the following factors prior to ordering a window or
door:
1. The Type of Wall
•
Masonry or Concrete Block
•
Pre-cast Concrete
•
Wood Frame
•
Steel Stud
2. The Frame Style (see Figure 11-1a)
•
Equal Leg Frame
•
Unequal Leg Frame
•
Equal Leg Frame (with Receptor System)
•
Equal Leg Frame (with Panning Trim)
•
Extended Flange (Retro Flange)
•
Welded Vinyl Frame (see Figure 11-1b)
PAGE 11-1
Figure 11-1a Various Styles of Frames
Figure 11-1b Welded Vinyl Frame
3. Types of Windows or Doors and their related hardware (see Chapters 4 and 5)
4. Desired Thermal Factors (see Chapter 2, Sections 2.4 through 2.10)
5. Other Design Considerations (see Chapter 2, Sections 2.11 through 2.14)
6. Check for Obstructions and Other Special Conditions
PAGE 11-2
•
Build-ups at the head, sill, or jambs where the original detail has been covered with ceramic tile, Corian,
marble, mirrors, sheetrock or other materials that will affect the installation or anchorage of the new
window.
•
Consider the presence and location of louvers, air-conditioners, electrical wire, and conduits and
determine whether these materials need to be removed and reinstalled
•
Obstructions such as a drop ceiling, window treatments or sill conditions that will prevent the proper
operation of the window must be considered.
•
Check the entire pathway, starting from where the trucks are to be unloaded to where the final installation
will take place for each opening. This must be done in order to determine if the windows and/or
accessories can be distributed without possible damage.
Most manufacturers build windows to order based on exact sizes provided by the customer. Others, as part of
their contract, determine the appropriate size based on field measurements. The process of establishing field
measurements for window/ door sizing is critical to the proper determination of the exact product size.
In new construction applications, the sizes are generally based on a set of architectural drawings and/or shop
drawings. In the case of retrofit construction, the window sizes are based on a set of field measurements taken by
professionals at the job site. Examples of "Field Measuring Sheets” are provided at the end of this chapter.
11.1
Taking Measurements
If the installer is the party responsible for ordering the window or door, he must first determine the exact
measurements of the opening. There are three critical opening measurements:
•
Width (Exterior and Interior)
•
Height (Exterior and Interior)
•
Squareness (Diagonals)
An installer is required to practice the correct methods of taking measurements, and make allowances necessary
for any field problems or clearance requirements. Remember:
1. When replacing or installing more than one product in a building, measure each opening.
2. Use consistent measuring units for the project, either the inch-pound units of feet, inches, etc., or metric units,
but never mix two measuring systems on the same project.
3. Always show width dimension first.
11.1.1
Following Manufacturer's Requirements
Installation practices and measuring requirements may vary among manufacturers. It is important to check the
manufacturer's measuring requirements before measuring.
In the event that the manufacturer's measuring instructions provided with a product differ from the requirements of
this manual, the manufacturer's instructions shall prevail.
11.1.2
Vertical and Horizontal Measurements
Construction methods and/or building movement can alter the size of an opening from bottom to top and from
side to side. An opening may measure (from jamb to jamb) 4'-5" at the top of the opening and measure 4'-5½" at
the bottom. To eliminate the problem of inaccurate measuring, measure the opening at three different locations,
horizontally and vertically, to ensure he is using the proper dimensions.
PAGE 11-3
Width
When ordering a product, the width measurement is given first. Measure the width from jamb to jamb for new
construction openings as well as for replacement products (see Figure 11-2).
1. Measure width at three locations:
•
Top
•
Middle
•
Bottom
2. Record the three dimensions and use the smallest dimension for determining the new window size. For
existing steel frames that are to remain, measure to the smallest daylight opening.
Figure 11-2 Measuring Width
Height
The height of the window is calculated by measuring from the sill to the header. Replacement products are
sometimes measured from head jamb to finish sill (see Figure 11-3). Use the steps below to measure the height
of the opening:
1. Measure the height at three locations:
•
Left side
•
Center
•
Right side
2. Record the three dimensions and use the smallest dimension. For existing steel frames that are to remain,
measure to the smallest daylight opening.
PAGE 11-4
Figure 11-3 Measuring Height
Measuring for Square
Openings are seldom square. Always measure the diagonals for squareness before ordering a product (see
Figure 11-4).
Out-of-square openings can force a new product out-of-square during installation, resulting in seal failure, water
leaks and incorrect operation of locks.
Determine if the opening is square by:
1. Measuring from bottom left corner to top right corner
2. Measuring from bottom right corner to top left corner
•
Record the two dimensions. If they are equal, the opening is square.
•
If they are not, the opening is out-of-square.
Note: For more information on openings that are out-of-square, see Chapter 11, Section 11.2.2.
PAGE 11-5
Figure 11-4 Measuring For Square
11.1.3
Measuring Spring Lines and Making Templates for Curves
Curve-top windows, or windows with other arches, require special measurements. When taking field
measurements for windows to be installed in arched openings, determine the spring line (the point at which the
arch starts) and provide accurate templates of the opening. Templates allow the windows, panning, and trim to be
made to the exact curvature of the opening. Providing physical templates with detailed dimension points is a great
way of reducing the chance for miscommunication or error.
To make a template, use the following steps to determine the location of the spring lines:
1. Perform a visual inspection of the opening.
2. Find the point on the opening at the jamb where the straight vertical wall intersects with the arched portion.
3. Place a straight edge across the full width of the opening (plus 6” or more), aligning one side with the
previously found spring line.
4. Next, use a carpenter’s level to move the straight edge to a level position while maintaining the original
starting point (see Figure 11-5).
PAGE 11-6
Figure 11-5 Determine Spring Line and Center Line
5. Once the straight edge is level, it can be nailed in place on the wall using a small nail at each end.
6.
After securing the straight edge in position, draw a 4” line (or apply a piece of tape) as a reference point on
each side of the opening. These lines represent the spring lines at the jambs.
To find the center of the arc, continue using the straight edge and follow these steps.
1. Measure the width of the opening and locate a mark on the straight edge corresponding to half the width.
2. Use a plumb line to transfer the center of the opening on the straight edge, 4” above the top of the opening.
3. You now have three marks on the opening corresponding to the spring line and centerline of the opening.
To make a template, use the following steps and the marks that were previously made.
Note: These instructions are for partial templates; for a full size template, cut the paper 6” larger than the full
height of the opening.
1. Cut a piece of cardboard or heavy paper 6” wider than the opening, and 6” taller than the opening at the
spring line (see Figure 11-6).
PAGE 11-7
Figure 11-6 Prep Paper/Cardboard for Template
2. Draw a straight line 3” from the bottom edge of the paper along the full width of the template.
3. Determine the location of the center of the paper (horizontally), and then draw a line (perpendicular to the
bottom horizontal straight line) up the full height of the template.
4. Place the template paper on the wall and align the horizontal lines with the marks on either side of the
opening (see Figure 11-7).
Figure 11-7 Scribing the Template
5. Slide the paper from side to side until the centerline on the paper lines up with the centerline on the arch.
PAGE 11-8
6. Tape the template to the wall. Stretch the template tight across the opening being sure to remove all wrinkles;
verify all marks line up.
7. Using a smooth piece of plywood or hardboard, cover the template on the inside; from the opposite side,
transcribe the arch onto the template.
8. Add any notes or dimensions that will be of help to the manufacturer in making the desired finished product.
11.1.4
Wall Depth and Window Location
Although walls are generally of standard thickness, wall thickness can vary in old or remodeled buildings (see
Figure 11-8). Wall depth will influence the type of product ordered, and the size of jamb extensions or interior trim,
when needed.
Observe the following steps when measuring wall depth and locating the product in the opening:
1. Measure wall depth from interior to exterior.
2. Determine the location of the product in the wall. (Where will it be positioned?)
3. Determine if jamb extensions or interior trim will be necessary. Take into consideration the projection
(extended depth) of the panning if it is being used.
4. Determine whether the manufacturer will provide the jamb extensions and/or trim, or whether it is necessary
to build them on site.
Figure 11-8 Check Wall Depth
11.1.5
Checking Wall for Plumb
Sometimes the settling of the foundation of a building will force a wall out-of-plumb. If the wall is out-of-plumb, it
may affect how the product will fit in an opening.
Check for plumb by placing a level against the wall on both sides of the opening. Be prepared to make
adjustments when installing the product if the wall is out-of-plumb.
PAGE 11-9
11.1.6
Checking Level
When products rest on a rough sill, it is important that the sill be level. Out-of-level sills may distort the frame and
cause problems with the operation.
1. Determine if the opening is level by placing a level at the head and the sill.
2. If the opening is not level, placement of bottom shims can help to level the sill (see Chapter 13, Section 13.2,
"Shims").
11.2
Clearance Provisions
11.2.1
Allowing for Clearances
Always provide adequate clearance to prevent distortion of the frame. Some manufacturers build the frame to the
dimensions provided by the installer. Others take the net opening dimensions and undercut a specified amount.
Always follow the manufacturer's measuring and ordering procedures.
Proper clearances allow for installation clearance as well as building and installation tolerances. In proper
installation practices, installers provide clearance between the window/door and the opening. Remember the
following:
1. Clearances shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications.
2. Unless otherwise specified, provide at least 1/4" at the top and 1/8" clearance on each side in applications
where a sealant joint isn’t being applied between the window and the substrate. In applications where a
sealant joint is being used, allow for a 3/8” nominal joint (more if necessary, based on the frame size) around
the entire perimeter.
3. Large windows and doors may require more clearance. (See Chapter 17, Section 17.1.3 for expansion and
contraction guidelines.)
11.2.2
Allowance for Out-of-Square
Out-of-square openings require more clearance than square openings. It’s common to find openings out-ofsquare, especially when doing replacement work.
When taking measurements to order products, it may be necessary to make adjustments to the product size for
out-of-square openings.
To determine if the opening is out-of-square, measure both diagonals from corner to corner of the rough opening
or existing window. To avoid interference with the rough opening or existing window frame, the installer should
strongly consider ordering a smaller product if the diagonal measurements differ by more than 1/4".
11.2.3
Allowing for Accessories
Some accessories may affect the clearance and the exact window size. Before ordering the product, determine
how much (if any) additional clearance (often called deducts) will be required to accommodate accessory items.
Establishing a deduct involves determining what dimension needs to be deducted from the opening size in order
to determine the window size, while allowing for the appropriate clearance to fit the window and accessories in
place. The following accessory items are commonly used in the field and may require specific deducts.
Panning Use
When planning to use panning, keep in mind that numerous styles, shapes and configurations are available.
Typically the type of panning selected is determined by making a sketch of the existing brick mold. If trying to
PAGE 11-10
replicate the existing building trim (brick mold), the sketch will help the manufacturer find an existing shape within
their inventory that is suitable for use on the project.
Some manufacturers may agree to provide custom panning to match the configuration on the job (see Figure 11-9
for some examples of common panning shapes).
Figure 11-9 Examples of Common Panning Shapes
If an exact replication isn't necessary, or if the building owner desires to change the look of the existing window
trim, manufacturers typically have standard shapes that will meet the intended look.
A few important things to consider when deciding to use panning are:
•
The amount of clearance between the existing window and the new window.
•
The depth the new panning must reach in order to extend out and over the existing trim.
•
The amount that the new panning must extend in order to cover over the existing trim and sealant while
allowing enough tolerance for field trimming.
•
Whether the panning will have a contoured appearance often called historical panning, or whether the
panning will have a relatively flat profile. Historical (contoured) panning normally requires that the head and
jamb pieces be identical in shape, and that they be mitered together at the corners.
All of these factors will play an important part in determining what the new panning shape will look like, as well as
determine how much to deduct from the opening size in order to get the exact order size for the new window.
(See Figure 11-10 to see how two different types of panning will change the deductions made when determining
the exact window size.)
PAGE 11-11
Figure 11-10 Panning Height and Projection
Determine Like Sizes
Ordering windows also involves grouping like sizes together in replacement applications. After determining all of
the opening sizes, group like sizes (openings within 1/4”) together. When doing this, group sizes together that are
less than (smaller than) the largest size in the group.
For example, assume there are openings that measure 28-1/2”, 28-3/8”, 28-5/16” and 28-1/4". Each of these
could be grouped together based on the smallest opening size of 28-1/4" and still fit nicely in the opening. When
deciding to group windows, always verify the acceptable tolerance for grouping with the manufacturer.
Trim Use
When using panning, trim is often used as a finished piece on the interior. Trim is also available in numerous
shapes, sizes and configurations (see Figure 11-11).
Because trim may be used to hold the window into position and is often a structural component, the design of the
trim must take into consideration the amount of overlap on the both the window and the existing condition.
The amount of overlap, the clearance provisions and the configuration of the existing trim (if it is to remain in
place) all have an impact on the size and profile of the new trim. (See Figure 11-12 for examples of how trim size
and shape are determined.)
PAGE 11-12
Figure 11-11 Common Types of Trim
Figure 11-12 Determining Trim Requirements
Receptor and Subsill Use:
Receptors and subsills are often used in situations where more clearance is required due to field tolerances and
various types of movement. Custom shapes are often used in buildings where excessive movement is expected
PAGE 11-13
from building live load, product expansion and seismic movement. (See Figure 11-13 for examples of various
receptors and subsills.)
The type of receptor and subsill used also has a bearing on the exact size of the window/door ordered. Often the
specifications and/or architectural drawings will dictate the amount of movement expected. Using this information,
and considering the amount of overlap between the receptor and the window, an exact window size can be
determined.
(See Figure 11-14 for an example of how to establish exact sizes based on the required overlap and the
allowance for movement.)
Other accessory items will have an impact on the exact sizing of the new windows and doors ordered for a
particular job. Always consult with the manufacturer for assistance in establishing the exact window size when
ordering the windows.
Regardless of who is responsible for placing the order, the installer is responsible for making sure the intent is
followed. This means a coordinated effort between the installer and the manufacturer to ensure that the design
intent, clearance provisions and allowance for movement are followed.
Caution: When using high performance subsills, consult with the owner about the overall sill height (as measured
from the floor) and the potential for a trip hazard. To reduce the potential for trip hazards, installers may want to
offer to build a suitable step or ramp in front of the door opening.
PAGE 11-14
Figure 11-13 Common Receptors and Subsills
PAGE 11-15
Figure 11-14 Example of Window Sizing Based on the Use of Receptor and Subsills
11.3
Installation Tolerances
The following chart provides guidelines for installers regarding installation tolerances for finished work. This chart
indicates acceptable deviations (plus or minus) from plumb, level and square as suggested by window
manufacturers. The manufacturer may dictate stricter tolerances; therefore consult with the manufacturer
regarding the specific requirements.
PAGE 11-16
Unit Shimming Tolerance
Inche
s/
Foot
Level
(Horizontal
1/32"
Measurement)
Plumb
(Vertical
1/32"
Measurement)
True
(In Plane
Measurement)
1/32"
Straight/True
(Measure of
Straightness)
1/64"
Square
(Diagonal
(+/-) Nominal
Inches
Method of
Maximu Measureme
m
nt
Level and
1/8"
steel rule or
tape
Level or
plumb-line
1/8"
and steel
rule or tape
Using
strings
1/8"
across
corners
Level or
plumb-line
1/16"
and steel
rule or tape
NA
1/8" *
1/4" **
Steel rule or
tape
Measurement)
* Openings up to 20 square feet
** Openings over 20 square feet
It would be impractical to assume every window/door unit would be installed perfectly plumb, level and square.
However, following these unit shimming tolerances is critical to the water performance integrity of the installed
unit. For this reason, AAMA recognizes that the expected results for field water performance tests are typically
less than that of a laboratory test.
Consult AAMA 502-02 for installed unit water performance test requirements and expectations.
11.4
Shipping Instructions
In addition to providing measurements and templates, critical information pertaining to shipping requirements is
also important. The person placing the order needs to communicate the desired load sequence and shipping
instructions to the manufacturer.
Shipping sequence/distribution is usually critical on larger projects with numerous phases, but may be important
to the installer on any job. Installation companies often are aware of specific project information of which the
manufacturer has no knowledge. As an example, there may be times when only the windows on the east side, or
just windows on floors 12-18, can be installed. Without this information, the manufacturer may ship the products
without regard for sequence, requiring storage on the job site.
This information will also help the manufacturer mark and load the windows and accessories on the truck so that
upon arrival at the job site, they can be unloaded and distributed to the proper place with much greater ease. At
the job site, coordination is necessary, but the task will be much easier if the correct information is provided upon
placement of the order.
PAGE 11-17
Information such as building number, floor number, elevation number, opening number and unit number can all be
of assistance. Provide all job related requirements pertaining to labeling, shipping sequence and marking to the
manufacturer prior to the award of the contract.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
______________
PAGE 11-18
Table of Contents
12.1
New Window and Door Inspection .............................................................................................................1
12.1.1
Verifying Proper Location ...................................................................................................................1
12.1.2
Inspection of New Products ................................................................................................................1
12.1.3
Verification of Size and Clearances ....................................................................................................1
12.2
Handling and Storage .................................................................................................................................2
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 12-I
12.0 Inspection and Storage of Windows and Doors
Conduct a thorough inspection of the product immediately after receipt. Be careful to store windows and doors
properly and in accordance with the guidelines of this manual or the manufacturer’s instructions when installation
will not take place immediately.
12.1 New Window and Door Inspection
When new windows and doors arrive on site, it is important to verify that they are the correct size and type.
Always inspect them for damage.
12.1.1
Verifying Proper Location
Prior to installation, the installer shall verify the proposed location of the new product by:
1. Checking the plans
2. Verifying the physical location of the installation such as floor, elevation and opening number
3. Checking the packaging for mark and location numbers, which are to be coordinated with the shop drawings
12.1.2
Inspection of New Products
Carefully inspect the new product for size, type, operability and damage. Observe the following steps when
inspecting new products:
1. Unwrap and thoroughly inspect the products. In replacement applications, do this prior to removing the
existing window. Be aware that some manufacturers include banding, spacers, shims or other packaging
items that are not to be removed until after the window or door is properly installed. Be sure to follow the
manufacturer's instructions for how and when to remove these items.
2. Check for shipping or material damages, seal fractures and racked corners. If found, file a freight claim.
•
Inventory the miscellaneous parts, panning, trim, receptors, etc.
•
Always count the material as it is unloaded, and document any missing or damaged materials.
3. If any component of the main frame is damaged, repair or replace it prior to demolition of the old product.
4. Some moving parts can be repaired after the product is installed:
•
Locks
•
Balances
•
Glass
•
Rails
5. If the window was opened during inspection, make sure it is closed and locked again prior to installation.
6. If the operable sash is to be removed prior to installation, make sure to mark the sash with the corresponding
frame so that it can be reinstalled in the original window frame.
7. Be aware of protective coverings that are applied to the frames. If present, make a determination as to when
they will be removed, but be sure to remove them before the final perimeter seal is done.
12.1.3
Verification of Size and Clearances
It is important to check the measurements of the new unit and compare them to the opening prior to installation.
Practice the following steps to verify size and clearance:
1. Determine the amount of clearance required for each product according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and/or shop drawings.
2. Place product in opening.
PAGE 12-1
3. Check for adequate clearance.
12.2
Handling and Storage
When windows and doors are not installed immediately upon delivery, they must be properly stored and protected
until used.
The following recommendations will be useful when handling and storing windows and doors:
•
Check manufacturer's instructions for:
- Recommendation for transporting, storing and handling products.
- Suggestions for extreme cold or hot weather use and handling.
•
Unload products safely. Make sure the truck is not positioned such that the windows/doors are leaning and
could fall toward the installer (see Figure 12-1). If necessary, reposition the truck.
•
Windows and doors shall be transported in an upright position with temporary bracing in place. Never stack
windows/doors on top of one another (flat) on the floor.
•
Use special care when transporting heavy frames, being careful not to pull the sash or glass away from the
frame.
•
Don’t use the banding to carry the window frames. Bands are not designed to support the weight of the frame
and may break due to the excessive load.
•
Temporary cross-bracing shall be applied to maintain squareness. Diagonal braces or spacer strips, where
possible, shall not be removed until after the installation is complete.
•
Wear clean gloves when handling new windows and doors. Always use caution when handling the
frames/glass in order to avoid material or finish damage
Figure 12-1 Safely Unloading Trucks
To properly store windows and doors, remember these tips:
PAGE 12-2
1.
Do not remove packaging except to verify dimensions and conditions of contents, until just prior to
installation.
2.
Windows and doors shall be stored upright on a flat surface. Whenever possible, allow them to sit on their sill
(see Figure 12-2).
3.
When storing materials at the job site, make sure they are in a secure location. Also, make sure they cannot
be blown over by the winds.
4.
Store windows/doors so that the first in is the last out. Plan to store the products in the sequence they will be
installed.
5.
Windows, doors and accessories shall be stored out of the weather in a clean, dry, low traffic area, off the
ground, not in direct sunlight, and not subject to damage. Don't stack products in a row against each other in
the sun as the glass units may experience excessive heat absorption.
6.
If not fully packaged, use some type of cover to prevent damage from dust, dirt and moisture. Windows shall
be protected until the finish trim is installed to help protect from dust, and other materials and processes
employed on the site.
7.
Block and secure the corners of windows and doors with relatively thin flanges to prevent damage to the
flanges prior to installation.
8.
Sills shall be protected to prevent damage during construction.
Figure 12-2 Properly Storing Windows
To prepare for installation of accessories, make sure to distribute the correct pieces to the corresponding opening.
Use the following tips as a guide:
1. Check the shop drawings to determine the opening type and location.
PAGE 12-3
2. Look for mark numbers on the drawings (per floor/elevation) which correspond to the mark numbers on the
packaging.
3. Check the shipping sheets and verify all materials were shipped and accounted for when they arrived on the
job site.
4. Make sure the job site is secure so the accessories don’t end up missing.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________
PAGE 12-4
Table of Contents
13.1
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................1
13.2
Shims ..........................................................................................................................................................1
13.2.1
Purpose...............................................................................................................................................1
13.2.2
Types of Shims ...................................................................................................................................1
13.2.3
Shim Application .................................................................................................................................2
13.3
Flashing ......................................................................................................................................................3
13.3.1
Purpose...............................................................................................................................................3
13.3.2
Types of Flashing Materials ................................................................................................................4
13.3.3
Flashing Application ............................................................................................................................8
13.4
Fasteners ....................................................................................................................................................9
13.4.1
Purpose...............................................................................................................................................9
13.4.2
Fastener Materials ..............................................................................................................................9
13.4.3
Fastener Application ........................................................................................................................ 10
13.5
Sealants ................................................................................................................................................... 12
13.5.1
Purpose............................................................................................................................................ 12
13.5.2
Sealant Materials ............................................................................................................................. 13
13.5.3
Choosing the Proper Sealant .......................................................................................................... 13
13.5.4
Joint Movement and Sealant Movement Capability ........................................................................ 17
13.5.5
Sealant Adhesion ............................................................................................................................. 17
13.5.6
Sealant Compatibility ....................................................................................................................... 17
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 13-I
13.5.7
Joint and Sealant Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 18
13.5.8
Surface Preparation ......................................................................................................................... 18
13.5.9
Use of Back-Up Materials ................................................................................................................ 19
13.5.10
Sealant Application and Tooling .................................................................................................. 21
13.5.11
Final Sealing (Interior) ................................................................................................................. 22
13.6
Cavity Insulation ...................................................................................................................................... 22
13.6.1
Purpose............................................................................................................................................ 22
13.6.2
Materials .......................................................................................................................................... 22
13.6.3
Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 23
13.6.4
Expanding Foam Product Precautions ............................................................................................ 23
13.7
Priming and Painting................................................................................................................................ 24
13.7.1
Purpose............................................................................................................................................ 24
13.7.2
Materials .......................................................................................................................................... 24
13.7.3
Application ....................................................................................................................................... 25
13.7.4
Separation from Incompatible Materials .......................................................................................... 25
PAGE 13-II
13.0 Material Selection and Use
13.1
Introduction
Various materials are required for installing windows and doors. Selecting shims, flashings, sealants and other
window or door installation materials can sometimes be complicated. Therefore, read this chapter carefully, and
remember that the manufacturer's instructions take priority and shall be followed when selecting and installing
materials.
13.2 Shims
13.2.1
Purpose
In commercial applications, shims are commonly thin, flat pieces of high-impact plastic or metal, used to level or
plumb a window or door frame during installation. They also help to prevent sagging, deflection, distortion and
rotation of the frame. Lateral shims are placed at the jambs, and setting shims are placed at the sill. Some
jurisdictions may require metal shims for fire resistance.
13.2.2
Types of Shims
Shims are often classified by material and/or style (see Figure 13-1). There are numerous variations of shims,
including:
•
Flat
•
Rectangular
•
Horseshoe
•
Single or stackable shims that come in packs
Figure 13-1 Types of Shims
Flat shims can be used singularly or stacked on top of one another. Rectangular shims, horseshoe shims and
shim packs are typically made of high-impact plastic. These shims can be used in all applications and often come
in a range of colors that indicate the thickness.
PAGE 13-1
Plastic shims are sometimes manufactured in packs, which can measure up to an inch or more in thickness. To
use a shim pack, determine the thickness needed and then snap off what isn't necessary. After obtaining the right
thickness for the application, slide the shim pack under the frame.
Follow these guidelines when selecting shims for a specific use:
•
Shim material must be adequate for each application.
•
Shims for sill support require greater compressive strength. The high-impact plastic or metal shims shall be
capable of supporting a compressive load of 1100 psi. This capacity is particularly important for windows that
support their entire weight on a narrow ridge or flange.
13.2.3
Shim Application
The proper number and positioning of shims are important. Position them where support is needed (see Figure
13-2).
•
Do not over or under shim; either can cause distortion of the frame.
•
Position shims so that the edge of the window frame does not vary more than ±1/16" from being straight.
•
Whenever possible, locate shims directly under the fastener. At the jambs, a horseshoe shim can easily be
placed over the shaft of the fastener so the shim will stay in place.
•
Shims shall be installed to allow clearance for continuous bond breaker or backer rod and sealant, and permit
proper sealant joint depth and width.
•
The outside surface of shims must be parallel and provide continuous contact and uniform support across the
entire depth of the window frame. When necessary, blocking can be added within the cavity of the frame to
help create a suitable support surface.
PAGE 13-2
Figure 13-2 Typical Shim Application Prior to Trimming
Sides and Top
•
"Lateral" shims are often placed between the side jambs and frame to square the window.
•
Shims used to establish spacing at anchor points must be penetrated by the anchor. They are trimmed as
needed, but not removed.
•
Temporary shims used in the leveling or squaring process are not required for permanent support, and may
be removed after the frame is securely anchored.
Bottom
•
"Setting" shims and support blocks are installed between the window sill and the rough sill. When installing
replacement windows, shims may be placed between the new sill and old window sill.
•
The sill must be supported in a straight and level position at a minimum of three points. In the absence of
manufacturer's instructions, place these shims shall be placed 3" from the ends and at the middle of the sill.
Support windows that are wider than 38" with shims located approximately 16" on center.
13.3 Flashing
13.3.1
Purpose
Flashing in commercial applications consists of a piece of waterproof material that bridges the joint between the
interior construction and the exterior building components. Flashing is used for the purpose of diverting any
moisture from above or below the opening back to the exterior.
PAGE 13-3
Most wall leaks can be attributed to lack of flashing, poor flashing techniques, or deteriorated flashing. Flashing
actually helps drain water away from the window/door to the exterior.
There are two basic types of flashing products used in conjunction with the installation with windows and doors in
commercial applications:
•
Flexible Flashing; and
•
Rigid Flashing
13.3.2
Types of Flashing Materials
Flexible Flashing
Flexible flashing typically consists of a flexible, formable, water-proof sheet material. Flexible flashing materials
are typically applied to the condition prior to the window or door installation. As an example, flexible flashing is
often used above the head of the window on top of the steel lintel in brick or stone applications. Flexible flashing
must include an upturned leg on the interior to keep any residual water that is collected from running toward the
interior. Flashing must also be properly terminated with end dams and spliced to be waterproof and direct water
out and away from the opening.
Whenever attaching window or door components to the opening condition, consider whether the fasteners will
penetrate any flashing components. Always review the architectural drawings to determine where flashing may
occur and avoid penetrating the flashing with attachment fasteners.
When determining where to set the window within an opening, make sure to look for flashing at the head, and
avoid positioning and sealing the window in front of the flashing (see Figure 13-3). If the sealant line is positioned
in front of the flashing, water can be trapped behind the installation, causing water to drain on top of the window
or door.
PAGE 13-4
Figure 13-3 Proper Placement of Window when used in Conjunction with Flashing
Rigid Flashing
Rigid flashing is typically galvanized metal, stainless steel, aluminum or copper sheet metal (see Table 13-1). It is
often custom made to fit a particular condition. Rigid flashing is typically used at the head and sill condition to
carry incidental water from the interior to the exterior of the opening.
While these materials are often not supplied or applied by the installer, the installer must use caution when
working in conjunction with these materials in order to keep from destroying their performance characteristics.
The installer should never penetrate the flashing components with fasteners unless they can be properly sealed to
keep them watertight.
PAGE 13-5
RIGID FLASHING
Material
Traits and Uses
Galvanized
Metal and
Stainless Steel
Aluminum/
Copper sheet
or step
flashing
•
Shall be no less than 26
gauge in thickness
•
Sheet metal other than 300
series stainless steel shall be
zinc coated on both sides, and
the coatings can be hot
dipped galvanized or
electroplate.
•
Can be surface-treated for
painting by phosphatizing.
•
Rigid flashing shall be no less
that 0.40" thick except for rigid
head flashing made with
0.019" (min.) coil stock.
•
Can be mill finish if totally
concealed.
•
If exposed, must be anodized
or coated with appropriate
paint.
•
In all cases, aluminum sheet
must be separated from
dissimilar metals and/or
masonry with:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tape
Gaskets
Elastomeric sheets
A heavy coat of
bituminous paint
5. Other approved
separation materials
•
Must consist of copper bearing
steel
•
Coated both sides with lead-tin
alloy
•
Coating weights are typically
0.047 lb/sf
Terne Metal
Table 13-1 Types of Rigid Flashing
Sill Pan Flashing
A sill pan is a piece of flashing where the interior leg and ends are bent up vertically (or panned) to prevent water
from flowing into the wall or interior finishes. When part of the contract, sill pans may be provided for the job and
installed by the installer.
When sill pans are provided:
PAGE 13-6
•
Sill flashing shall be sloped toward the exterior.
•
Height of the pan must be appropriate for the windows and glass doors being installed.
•
Always follow the manufacturer's instructions, or the advice of a professional architect or engineer.
•
When flashing needs to be spliced due to length, follow the guidelines provided in the sealant section of this
chapter regarding joint types.
•
Seal between the upturned leg of the sill pan and the interior face of the product in order to maintain the
air/water seal.
•
Pan flashing materials by design extend through most of a wall's thickness. When fabricated from sheet
metal, pan flashing can act as a thermal bridge, transferring cold from exterior to interior. Where this poses a
problem, such as in cold-climate areas along with high indoor humidity, choose materials with a lower thermal
conductivity. The selection of the pan flashing material is the responsibility of the approving authority and/or
building designer, not the installer. The installer is encouraged to consult with these authorities when the sill
pan material is not specified.
Note: The interior leg (H1) of the sill pan flashing is based on the expected performance level of the window or
door being installed (see Figure 13-4). Table 13-2 can be used to determine the interior leg height if the water test
pressure (in psf) or the corresponding design pressure (in psf) is known.
Figure 13-4 Sill Pan Diagram
Determining Interior Leg Heights
PAGE 13-7
WTP
DP
H1
Water Test
Pressure
(PSF)
Design
Pressure
(PSF)
Water Height
and Minimum
Leg Height
4.50
30
1"
5.25
35
1-1/8"
6.00
40
1-5/16"
6.75
45
1-7/16"
7.50
50
1-5/8"
8.25
55
1-3/4"
9.00
60
1-7/8"
9.75
65
2"
10.50
70
2-3/16”
11.25
75
2-5/16”
12.00
80
2-7/16”
Table: 13-2 Pan Height
Example: The product being installed is rated to meet a 6.0 psf water test pressure. To make the sill pan flashing
meet the same level of performance, the height of the interior leg is required to be at least 1-5/16" tall from the
inside of the bend.
Note: Water height and minimum leg height calculations are approximate. To allow for field-installed tolerances,
1/8” was added to the figures before rounding up to the nearest 1/16”.
13.3.3
Flashing Application
The installation of flashing is critical to maintaining the water performance integrity of the completed installation.
Be cautious when applying flashing. Proper installation of flashing means four things:
1. Flashing is installed in "Weather-Board Fashion;" this means that each piece of flashing is logically applied
and integrated with other components. Always starting with the lowest section (if more than one piece is
used), overlapping the lower section with the next higher section.
2. Flashing must be protected from damage. Always take the steps necessary to secure the flashing into
position so that when the windows are installed, the flashing is still functional. When flashing has been
damaged, the material shall be replaced or repaired properly.
3. Flashing is subject to various types of damage throughout the construction process. Holes caused by screws,
nails and other fasteners penetrating the flashing can reduce the weather-shielding ability of the installation.
4. Be sure to use proper sealing and splicing techniques. Use appropriate sealant joint designs as outlined in
Section 13.5. The flashing must be properly integrated with any water resistant barrier being used on the job.
PAGE 13-8
13.4
Fasteners
13.4.1
Purpose
For products to perform as indicated through testing, they must be installed as instructed by the manufacturer.
Fasteners must be selected and installed to secure the weight, wind load and temperature variations of the
product to meet the correct requirements.
Consult with the window/door manufacturer and/or a qualified structural engineer regarding fastening
requirements to ensure the units are installed to meet and/or exceed the expected performance criteria.
Manufacturers frequently are required to provide a complete set of calculations to pinpoint the fastener
requirements for projects. When provided, calculations will supply clear instructions as to what fasteners are to be
used in specific applications and conditions.
When calculations are not provided, the selection of the appropriate fastening method is the responsibility of the
approving authority in cooperation with the installer.
Always refer to the local codes, building official, window manufacturer and/or a qualified structural engineer for
fastener requirements in regions with special wind-loading considerations (e.g., special wind-load regions,
seismic-loading zones, hurricane prone areas, etc.).
The anchoring of mulled and/or multiple units will most certainly require different fastener spacing requirements.
Always consult with the manufacturer regarding the fastening requirements for mulled units.
See Chapter 17, Section 17.1.3 for more information on expansion, contraction and other movement when
attaching windows and doors.
13.4.2
Fastener Materials
Fasteners must be corrosion resistant and compatible with the materials contacted and/or penetrated. Table 13-3
is provided to show some of the recommended performance requirements based on anticipated fastener
exposure.
PAGE 13-9
Fastener Selection Chart
Fastener
Material
Steel –
Cadmium
Plated
Steel – Zinc
Plated
Steel –
Nickel/Chrome
Plated
Magnetic
Stainless Steel
400 Series
Min. 16%
Chrome
Nonmagnetic
Stainless
Steel. 300
Series
Fastener
Exposure
Performance
Requirement
Not Visible after
Installation
ASTM B766 (8
Microns Thick)
Visible after
installation
Not
Recommended
Not Visible after
Installation
ASTM B633 (8
Microns Thick)
Visible after
installation
Not
Recommended
Not Visible after
Installation
ASTM B 456
Type SC 2
Visible after
installation
Not
Recommended
Not Visible after
Installation
Recommended
Visible after
Installation
Not
Recommended
Not Visible after
Installation
Recommended
Visible after
Installation
Recommended
Table 13-3 Fastener Selection Chart
13.4.3
Fastener Application
The type of fastener used will vary from job to job and may change numerous times according to your job specific
application and/or building conditions. As an example, the fastener used in a solid concrete wall condition will
typically not work in a hollow masonry wall.
Fastener manufacturers are very knowledgeable about fastener types and uses, and should be consulted
whenever there is a question about the type of fastener to be used and how it is applied. Many fasteners require
special application techniques and tools. The supplier of these fasteners will be able to assist the installer in
selecting and using the right tools for the job. Determine the type of substrate that you will be anchoring into first
(see Table 13-4), then make a selection as to the appropriate type of fastener to use.
PAGE 13-10
Window/Door Anchor Types
Substrate
Fastener Type
Expansion Anchors
Epoxy or Acrylic Adhesive
Set Threaded Rods
Concrete
Tap-in Anchors
Tap-in Anchors
Stone
Set Threaded Rods
Expansion Anchors
Solid Masonry
Set Threaded Rods
Tap-in Anchors
Toggle Anchors
Hollow Masonry
Set Threaded Rods
Powder Actuated Fasteners
Structural Steel
Welding
Self Drilling Screws
Cold Formed Steel
Wood
Self Drilling Screws
Wood Screws
Table 13-4 Anchor Types
Consider the following cautions and general rules of thumb when installing fasteners:
•
Always follow the fastener/anchor manufacturer’s guidelines for proper edge distance, load capacity and
installation techniques.
•
Never place fasteners too close to the edge of a concrete or block wall , or too close together when applying
fasteners in pairs, as damage may occur to the concrete or block. (A general rule of thumb is to keep bolts at
least six times the diameter away from the edge, and 10 times the diameter away from an adjacent fastener.
Thus, the edge distance for a 1/4” diameter fastener would be 1-1/2”, while the center-to-center distance
would be 2-1/2”.)
•
The embedment depth of an expansion bolt can also have an impact on edge distance. (A rule of thumb is
that the edge distance for an expansion bolt shall be no less than the embedded length. Thus, a 3” bolt with a
2-1/4” embedment would dictate that the edge distance be a minimum of 2-1/4”.)
•
Many fastener manufacturers have specific guidelines available for each particular product type, and often
have service technicians available for field consultation.
•
The fastener head must be wide enough to cover the pre-punched hole or slot in the frame or accessory.
When slotted connections are used, the fastener head may need to be backed up by washers to allow for
adjustment and expansion.
PAGE 13-11
•
Manufacturers may supply slots in their framing which are designed to be structurally adequate for the
fastener and anchor loads expected. Do not slot the framing or enlarge holes or slots provided by the
manufacturer without consulting the manufacturer or a licensed professional engineer.
•
Fasteners must not cause warping or distortion of the frame/sash, and must not hinder proper operation of the
unit.
•
Fastener length must allow for sufficient penetration into the substrate to comply with fastener installation
instructions and local code requirements.
•
Avoid penetrating the sill tracks unless recommended by the manufacturer.
•
If screws must be installed in the sill, inject sealant into the hole before installing the screw, and seal over the
head after seating the screw.
•
Be careful not to over shim at fastener locations, as undue stress and bending of the fastener may result.
Always provide suitable support at fastener locations. (A good rule of thumb is to limit the shim pack height to
twice the diameter of the fastener. Thus, use a maximum of a 1/2” shim pack when using a 1/4” diameter
fastener.)
•
When screws pass through the first layer of a hollow extrusion which is visible after installation, fill the holes
with compatible plugs or cover with trim.
•
Make sure that fasteners are secure after installation. In block, brick or concrete applications, check each
fastener to ensure that it is properly grabbing the substrate.
•
Follow the manufacturer's instructions when attaching window and door frames to the building condition,
especially at hinge points where loads may increase significantly.
•
Always consult with the contractor when attaching into concrete masonry units (CMU). Determine if the cells
are filled with grout as this will have a bearing on what type of fastener is used.
•
Another rule of thumb is that “bigger is not always better.” Due to edge distance requirements, bigger bolts
may actually create problems when substituted for a smaller fastener that was specified. Always consult with
a structural engineer when planning to make substitutions.
•
When using self-tapping fasteners, make sure you follow the fastener manufacturer’s instructions. The type
and thickness of the material you are penetrating will have an impact on the type of fastener and the point
required. (Example: When the fastener specifications say, “appropriate for a maximum of 0.120” aluminum,”
don’t use it in 0.125” steel.)
•
When using self-drilling fasteners, be sure to select fasteners that will not allow hydrogen embrittlement (see
AAMA TIR A9 for further information).
13.5
Sealants
13.5.1
Purpose
Sealants are used to prevent infiltration of air and water through joints between the opening and the window or
glass door, or accessories. When visible, sealants also contribute to the finished appearance of the installed
product.
The long-term continuity between the components of the building envelope relies on the proper sealant selection,
joint dimensions and sealant application.
PAGE 13-12
Many windows and doors are installed adjacent to building materials such as brick, stone, concrete and numerous
others. When windows and doors are installed after these building materials are set in place a properly sized
perimeter joint must always be used.
Some substrate materials like stucco, EIFS and metal panels require a receiver (often J-shaped molding) that is
designed to be applied after window installation. Always seal the joint between the receiver and the window or
door, rather than sealing the product directly to the substrate material. Always follow the EIFS/Stucco
manufacturer's instructions for the proper method of sealing, and use receivers as required.
Proper joint size and sealing techniques outlined in the following sections must be followed. The building
contractor (or the installer if he is also the building contractor) is responsible for the proper integration and
coordination of this work in order to ensure the completion and quality of this seal; however, proper installation is
the responsibility of all parties.
13.5.2
Sealant Materials
Sealing requirements will vary from job to job. It is important that the installer select and use the proper sealant
based on the materials and design considerations (anticipated movement, locations where sealant will be used,
etc.) on each job.
Frequently, the architect, builder or window manufacturer will specify sealants to be used for installation. If not,
seek input from the approving authority and/or sealant manufacturer. If no other information is available, use
Tables 13-5 and 13-6 as a starting point in the selection process. All sealants have a shelf-life. Care should be
taken that sealant is used before the end of the shelf-life.
Sealant labels and technical data sheets from the sealant manufacturer provide some documentation of the basic
selection principles listed in the following section.
13.5.3
Choosing the Proper Sealant
It is important to properly select and apply sealants. ASTM standards C 1193 and C 1299 provide information on
sealant selection and use.
There are basic principles one must consider when selecting and/or installing sealants:
•
Movement
•
Adhesion
•
Compatibility
•
Surface preparation
•
Joint and sealant dimensions
•
Use of back-up materials
•
Sealant application/tooling
PAGE 13-13
Silicone
Polyurethane
Latex (meeting
ASTM C920)
Solvent
Released
Sealant Adhesion Guide
Aluminum
Mill Finish
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Aluminum
Anodized
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Asphalt Bldg.
Paper
Yes
Yes
Yes
NR
Brick
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Concrete
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Copper
Yes
Yes
Some
Yes
EIFS
Yes
Yes
Some
NR
Fiberglass
Yes
Yes
Some
Some
Galvanized
Steel
Yes
Glass
Some Some
Yes
Yes
Some
Yes
Yes
Painted
Surfaces 
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Polyethylene
Some
Yes
No
Yes
Polystyrene
Foam Board
Yes
Yes
Yes
NR
Stucco
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Bld’g. Wrap
Some
Vinyl
Wood
Some Some
Some
Yes
Yes
Some
Som Som Some
Yes 
e
e
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
 = Neutral Cure Silicone Only
 = Check Paint Individually
 = Check for Compatibility
NR = Not Recommended
Some = Many Are Not Adequate
Yes = Majority Are Adequate
Table 13-5 Sealant Adhesion
PAGE 13-14
All sealant make-ups (e.g. Silicone) are not equal – thus, one product may work while another product may not.
Make sure to verify the use of the sealant for the particular application with the sealant manufacturer.
Note: All sealant make-ups (e.g. Silicone) are not equal – thus, one product may work while another product
may not. Make sure to verify the use of the sealant for the particular application with the sealant manufacturer.
PAGE 13-15
Silicone
Polyurethan
e
Latex
(meeting
ASTM
C920)
Solvent
Released
Sealant Application Guide
Header
Expander
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Sill Expander
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Sill Angle
Yes
Some
Yes
Some
Blind Stop
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Capping
Yes
Some
Yes
Some
Interior Trim
and Stool
NR
Yes
Yes
NR
Mull Seal
Yes
Yes
Some
NR
Subsill End
Cap and
Splice Joints
Yes
Yes
Some
Some
Receptor
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Exterior
Perimeter 
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Stack Mullion
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Panning
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Box Frame to
Opening
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Under
Flashing 
Yes
Yes
Some
Some
Threshold
Yes
Yes
Some
Some
Sill Pan
Yes
Yes
Some
Some

= Match Sealant Movement
Capability to Anticipated Joint
Movement (See Table 13-6)

= Check Adhesion and
Compatibility to Mating Surfaces
NR = Not Recommended
Some = Many Are Not Adequate
Yes = Majority Are Adequate
Table 13-6 Sealant Application
PAGE 13-16
13.5.4
Joint Movement and Sealant Movement Capability
Sealant joints are designed to move with the expansion and contraction of different building materials. Joints in
commercial installations require an elastomeric sealant. The following specifications (see Table 13-7) apply to
joint movement:
Amount of Joint
Movement
Sealant Specification
15% – 25%
ASTM C920 Class 12.5
25% – 50%
ASTM C920 Class 25
Table 13-7 Joint Movement
If joint movement is unknown and cannot be determined, use a sealant meeting ASTM C 920, Class 25 or better.
Note: Whenever there is a question about what sealant to use in a given application, do not hesitate to contact the
sealant supplier. They typically have a staff of technical representatives on hand to answer questions and perform
tests on job site materials to verify and approve sealant types and application methods.
13.5.5
Sealant Adhesion
Many kinds of materials are encountered in window and door installation. The variety of substrates, flashings,
framing materials and window materials is almost infinite. In addition, sealant products within any one sealant type
(polyurethane, silicone or acrylic) can vary considerably in adhesion to a given material. Therefore:
•
Verify with the material or sealant manufacturer(s) that the sealant has acceptable adhesion to the specified
materials.
•
Submit required sample materials to the sealant supplier for testing purposes.
•
Obtain documentation of adhesion to specific materials.
Adhesion recommendations are based on:
•
ASTM C 794 testing.
•
Exposure to outdoor conditions for exterior applications.
See Section 23.1 for information about quality control and spot-checking for adhesion on the job site.
13.5.6
Sealant Compatibility
Compatibility with all surfaces in direct contact with the sealant is essential. The sealant(s) and other materials
must retain their properties without being affected by one another. Common indications of sealant incompatibility
are evident when the sealant shows signs of:
•
Hardening
•
Softening
•
Tackiness
•
Loss of adhesion
•
Discoloration and bleeding
Always obtain documentation of compatibility between the various materials and the sealant from the sealant
manufacturer(s).
PAGE 13-17
13.5.7
Joint and Sealant Dimensions
No matter how good the sealant's movement capability and adhesion, the sealed joint can still fail if proper joint
and sealant dimensions (joint geometry) are not incorporated into the installation. This is particularly critical in
joints where large amounts of movement occur, such as in perimeter joints. Refer to Chapter 17, Section 17.1.3,
for more information regarding the expansion and contraction of various materials when considering joint sizes.
Shop drawings and architectural blueprints shall be reviewed and followed for sealant joint details. If there are no
drawings or specified joint dimensions, the sealant manufacturer shall be contacted for recommendations on
minimum and maximum dimensions. Some guidelines can also be found in ASTM C 1193.
Unless otherwise specified by the sealant manufacturer, observe the following practices:
1. A minimum of 1/4" wide sealant bond to each contacting surface is necessary to ensure adequate adhesion.
•
Only mechanically fixed joints with little or no movement can be sealed with less bond area.
•
Never try to bond to a surface which is less than 1/4".
2. In butt joints, the width must be large enough so that there is sufficient sealant to accommodate joint
movement. The principle is that wider joints accommodate more movement than do narrow joints. Again, a
general rule of thumb is 3/8” nominal width. In butt joint applications, the sealant joint should be at least twice
the expected expansion.
•
In butt joints 3/8" to 1/2" wide, the depth of the sealant shall be no less than 1/4", and in no case shall the
depth be greater than the width. For joints 1/2" to 1" wide, the depth shall be one-half the width.
13.5.8
Surface Preparation
Each joint surface (including the window/door) must be inspected and properly prepared to ensure that the
sealant will adhere properly. Surfaces must be:
1. Sound (Free of rotted wood, loose paint, mortar or concrete, corrosion, etc.)
2. Clean (Free of dirt, dust, oily substances, and/or old sealant.)
3. Dry and free of frost.
Follow sealant manufacturer's instruction for specific material and conditions. Some general guidelines are as
follows:
1. Removal by abrasive cleaning may be needed to obtain acceptable adhesion. Abrasive cleaning may involve:
− Sanding
− Wire brushing
− Grinding
− Saw cutting
− Sand or water blasting
− Mechanical abrading
− Combination of these methods
Note: Avoid breathing dust caused by any of these methods. Sealants and adjacent materials can contain
hazardous chemicals. Wear a NIOSH approved dust mask when performing this type of work. See Section 8.2.1
for more information.
PAGE 13-18
2. Remove dust, dirt and other loose particles by brushing or wiping.
3. Remove oily substances with solvent dampened cloth. Change cloths frequently to prevent redepositing oily
residue. The solvent-cleaned surface must be immediately wiped dry with a clean cloth (solvent should not be
allowed to evaporate on the surface).
4. When working with irregular surfaces like stone aggregate, consider using a diamond cup grinding wheel to
grind a smooth surface for the sealant. Rough surfaces will often not allow the sealant to get into the crevices.
5. When resealing joints previously sealed with silicone sealants, use silicone sealant or remove all old sealant
residue to ensure adhesion of the new sealant.
•
Completely remove all visible sealant by scraping the surface.
•
Next, remove the thin layer of porous joint surface by sanding.
•
If the surface is a nonporous material, wipe with solvent.
6. Consult with the sealant manufacturer to determine if primer is recommended. Follow instructions for primer
application very carefully.
13.5.9
Use of Back-Up Materials
Backer Rod
Backer rod (usually cylindrical in shape and compressible in structure) is used to limit joint depth and provide a
nonadherent (bond breaker) surface. A variety of backer rod materials are available. Compatibility with sealant
and primer should be confirmed by contacting the sealant manufacturer. Sealant shall not adhere to the backer
rod, thus allowing the sealant the freedom to move (expand/contract) within the joint.
•
Backer rods are typically made of closed-cell polyethylene, urethane, neoprene, vinyl, butyl rubber or
polyvinyl chloride, and shall be compatible with the primers and sealants being used. ASTM C 1193 covers
the use of all types of backer rods in more detail. For specific recommendations, check with the sealant
manufacturer.
•
In perimeter butt joints, use backer rods to control joint depth so the sealant thickness is in accordance with
guidelines in Section 13.5.7.
A closed-cell polyethylene backer rod is an ideal joint filler for several reasons:
•
Most sealants do not adhere to it.
•
It is resilient so it conforms to joint irregularities and responds to joint movement.
•
It resists moisture absorption.
•
It is typically a requirement in exterior insulation and finish systems.
For proper installation of this type of rod:
•
The diameter of the rod shall be approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of thumb:
rod diameter is at least 1/8" greater than joint width.) (See Figure 13-5).
•
Backer rod should be inserted into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. Do not puncture, fold or crease the
backer rod as that could cause emission of gas and bubbling of the sealant.
•
Do not apply joint primer to the backer rod.
Additional types of backer rods are available. See ASTM C 1193 for more information.
PAGE 13-19
Figure 13-5 Perimeter Butt Joint
Bond Breaker
A bond breaker is usually a flat tape (e.g., polyethylene tape). It is used in butt and fillet joints to prevent sealant
adhesion to certain areas of the joint surfaces, thus preventing what is commonly referred to as "three-sided
adhesion" (see Figure 13-6). Three-sided adhesion restricts the sealant's ability to move with expansion and
contraction. It can cause premature cohesive failure of the seal.
•
In butt joints that are too shallow for a backer rod, a bond breaker is installed over the bottom of the joint.
•
In a butt joint, the sealant bead should adhere only to the ends of the two side surfaces. Failure to do so can
cause the bead to tear during joint expansion (see Figure 13-6). A bridge joint may also be applicable in this
condition. Bridge joints span over the joint and adhere to the exposed surfaces. Do not apply primer to a bond
breaker. Confirm compatibility of the bond breaker with the primer.
•
In fillet (corner) joints, a bond breaker can be installed on one surface starting in the corner and extending out
only as far as needed to allow adequate bond area for the remaining surface contacted by sealant (see Figure
13-7).
PAGE 13-20
Figure 13-6 Butt/Bridge Joint with Bond Breaker
Figure 13-7 Fillet Joint
13.5.10
Sealant Application and Tooling
All sealants have minimum and maximum application temperatures. If sealant is applied outside the
recommended temperature range, it may not develop adequate adhesion or physical properties. Contact the
sealant manufacturer for the recommended temperature range and any limitations due to inclement weather.
Several installation tips are listed below:
1. Cut the nozzle to the desired opening with a sharp knife. The angle of the cut should be approximately 45°.
2. For a smooth sealant bead, hold at a 45° angle and push the sealant in front of the nozzle.
3. Apply the sealant in a continuous bead.
PAGE 13-21
4. Force sealants into the joint to ensure 100 percent contact with joint surfaces and in such a manner that will
not leave hidden voids below the sealant surface. The joint must be completely filled. Joints should be filled
from the bottom up to avoid entrapment of air pockets.
5. Tool the sealant surface to complete the filling of the joint and to provide a smooth surface.
6. Tool the sealant with light pressure before a skin forms (refer to the sealant manufacturer's product literature).
Tooling forces the sealant to fill the joint completely. Do not use liquid tooling aids, such as water, soap or
alcohol, because these materials may interfere with the curing process.
Sealant cure will be slowed in applications that significantly isolate the sealant from air. Examples of such
situations are bedding of flanges and flashing, and sealing under thresholds or panning (see Figure 13-8). Use
sealants recommended for these applications and confirm compatibility in these isolated situations.
Figure 13-8 Bedding Joint
13.5.11
Final Sealing (Interior)
Interior sealant is applied to the interior side of the rough opening. Observe the following steps when applying
interior sealant.
•
Before sealing, check operation of the window/door.
•
Use adequate ventilation and follow safety information supplied by the sealant manufacturer.
13.6
Cavity Insulation
13.6.1
Purpose
Cavity insulation is placed in the cavity between the new window unit and the sill, jambs and headers to reduce air
infiltration and heat transfer.
13.6.2
Materials
Recommended insulation materials include:
•
Fiber insulation (e.g., fiberglass batting or other fiber insulation.)
•
Other code and manufacturer approved materials, which may include gun injected low-pressure foam.
PAGE 13-22
13.6.3
•
Installation
After the window/door is shimmed, secured, and checked for proper operation (plumb, level and square), fill
gaps larger than 1/8" with insulation (see Figure 13-9).
Figure 13-9 Cavity Insulation
•
Insulation is not required in small openings if they can be completely filled with sealant.
•
Do not overly compress fiber insulation; press it loosely into small cavities with a putty knife or other tool.
•
When using products with thermal barriers between the inboard and outboard portions of the metal frames
(i.e., thermally broken aluminum frames), be sure to insulate the space between the thermal barrier and the
inner-most portion of the frame. This will aid in protecting the interior side from the presence of exterior
ambient temperatures.
•
When replacing wooden hung window frames, insulate cavities before enclosing them.
13.6.4
•
Expanding Foam Product Precautions
Always follow foam and window manufacturers' instructions to avoid excessive expansion of the foam and
distortion of the window frame.
•
Apply a single bead of foam, sufficient to provide an air seal, but yet allowing for movement of the header and
expansion/contraction of the frame.
•
Install foam, allowing it to fully expand and become tack-free (approximately 20 minutes) before injecting
more material as needed (see Figure 13-10).
•
After the foam is fully cured, trim away any excess to allow for proper installation of the trim.
PAGE 13-23
Figure 13-10 Application of Foam
13.7
13.7.1
Priming and Painting
Purpose
Exposed steel can be damaged by exposure to the elements. All exposed steel on the exterior must be primed
and painted to avoid corrosion. This is not always the responsibility of the installer, but when necessary, the
installer can use the following tips.
13.7.2
Materials
For a durable finish and professional appearance, use only a high-grade coating that is compatible with the
surface to which it is applied.
•
On the exterior, all primers and paints must be rated for exterior use. Begin with a primer coat and finish with
at least one coat of rust-resistant paint.
•
On the interior, a primer is recommended. The finish coat should be rust-resistant.
Surfaces to be painted must be dry and free from dust, dirt, oil, grease, wax, chalk, mildew and other
contaminants.
•
Remove dust and dirt with a brush, compressed air, or by washing, then drying.
•
Remove oil, wax and grease with paint thinner or other recommended solvent.
PAGE 13-24
•
Remove mildew with a solution of bleach or commercial products intended for that purpose.
13.7.3
Application
Application practices and conditions, including temperature and relative humidity, are as important as the quality
of paint.
•
Ideal temperature range of the product, surface, and air is 50°F to 90°F or as specified by the manufacturer.
•
Relative humidity should be below 85 percent.
•
Apply smooth, even coats.
•
Allow adequate drying time between coats.
•
Do not apply coating to weather-stripping, vinyl, plastic, cladding or other non-steel parts unless specifically
allowed by the manufacturer.
•
Immediately remove any undesired coating from weather-stripping, etc.
13.7.4
Separation from Incompatible Materials
Appropriate paints may be used to provide separation from incompatible materials in lieu of plastic or elastomeric
tapes, vinyl liner, etc.
•
An alkali-resistant coating may be used to separate aluminum surfaces from masonry materials and pressuretreated wood. Paint may be applied to prevent direct contact of wood surfaces with incompatible materials.
•
In all cases, aluminum must be protected from direct contact with steel, concrete or mortar with paint, nonabsorptive plastic, elastomeric tapes, gaskets or bituminous paint.
•
Steel shall receive a sufficiently thick layer of protective coating (two coats).
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
PAGE 13-25
Table of Contents
14.1
Protect the Client's Property .......................................................................................................................1
14.2
Removal of Sash from Wooden Windows ..................................................................................................1
14.2.1
Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Inside Removal Method) ..............................4
14.2.2
Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Outside-Removal Method) ...........................6
14.3
Removal of Sash Only from Steel Windows ...............................................................................................6
14.4
Removal of Entire Frame: Aluminum or Steel Windows ...........................................................................7
14.4.1
Removal of Steel Window Frame by Unscrewing...............................................................................7
14.4.2
Removal of Steel Window Frame by Cutting ......................................................................................8
14.5
Assessing the Opening .............................................................................................................................10
14.5.1
Determining Squareness of the Opening ..........................................................................................10
14.5.2
Check the Fit of the Replacement Window ......................................................................................10
14.5.3
Make Modifications for Out-of-Square .............................................................................................11
14.5.4
Verify the Structural Integrity of the Opening ....................................................................................11
14.5.5
Egress Requirements .......................................................................................................................11
14.6
Prepare the Opening.................................................................................................................................11
14.6.1
Protect Incompatible Materials..........................................................................................................11
14.6.2
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................12
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 14-I
14.0 Preparing the Opening for Replacement
14.1
Protect the Client's Property
When removing and installing doors and windows, caution must be exercised to prevent workers and the elements
from damaging furnishings and interior finishes. Proper work-site preparation will not only protect furnishings and
finishes, but will also aid in the work process and facilitate cleanup when the job is finished. Items to be reviewed
and coordinated with the approving authority may include the following:
1.
Make sure that the owners/occupants have removed and stored away all draperies and window treatments.
2.
Check to see that furnishings have been moved far enough away from the work area to provide adequate
room to work safely and effectively. If possible, have the occupants do this before the workers arrive.
3.
Suggest that any pictures/decorations attached to the walls around the work area be removed.
4.
Using clean fabric drop cloths or new disposable plastic sheeting, cover all furnishings within the immediate
work area to prevent them from becoming soiled.
5.
If a great deal of dust may be generated, completely cover all furnishings in the room.
6.
Cover the floor around the window/door to be worked on with fabric drop cloth or plastic sheeting, and use
appropriate foot coverings. Tape the sheeting to the floor with appropriate tape to keep it from moving when
workers walk on it. Do not use tape to attach plastic sheeting to painted surfaces because it may pull off the
paint when it is removed.
7.
14.2
Extend floor protection at least 6 feet from the wall.
Removal of Sash from
Wooden Windows
This section covers removal of the sash from existing wood window frames, and the preparation of the existing
window frame for the installation of the new window. The procedure followed will be determined based on the
method of installation and the accessories used.
For applications where the new window frame will be applied against the existing exterior stops, the interior set of
stops, sash, the parting bead and all existing hardware, are removed. Once these items are removed, exterior
capping and new interior trim will typically be used.
If the frame components are in good condition, the existing jambs, header and sill can remain in place. This will
allow the replacement unit to be inserted into the existing wooden frame and sealed against the exterior stop, as
described in Chapter 15 (see Figure 14-1). If the frame components are damaged or deteriorated, it may be
necessary to repair or replace them.
For window replacements using new panning and interior trim, the interior set of stops, sash, the parting bead, and
all related hardware must be removed prior to the new window installation. In this case, it may be desirable to
replace the interior stops/trim to provide a backup and support condition for the new interior trim (see Figure 14-2).
Job conditions vary, so these decisions need to be made prior to ordering the product.
Prior to removal of stops and sash, determine the most practical location from which to remove and replace the
window/door. There may be cases where a wall or other obstacle may force the installer to remove the sash from
the exterior and do the installation from the outside.
If it is easier to remove or replace the unit from inside the building, then the "inside-removal” procedure should be
followed (see Figure 14-3). The parting beads and interior stops are removed, but the blindstops and exterior
PAGE 14-1
casing, if separate, remain intact. If it is more practical to remove or replace the window from the outside, use the
"outside-removal” method (see Figure 14-4). The blindstops and exterior casing, if separate, and the parting beads
are removed, but the interior stops and the stool remain intact.
Figure 14-1 Window Installation Using Exterior Stops and New Interior Trim
PAGE 14-2
Figure 14-2 Window Installation Using New Panning and Trim
Figure 14-3 Inside Inside-Removal Method
PAGE 14-3
Figure 14-4 Outside Outside-Removal Method
14.2.1
Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Inside Removal Method)
For the “Inside Inside-Removal Method,” use the following steps as a guide for removing the old sash and window
components:
1.
Remove the interior trim casing/stops.
• If the wood is painted, carefully score the joints with a utility knife to break the bond before prying out the
stop.
• Pry the stop (trim) out by using a wide chisel. Be careful to avoid damaging, gouging or marking the stop
as it may be reused later (see Figure 14-5).
PAGE 14-4
Figure 14-5 Pry Out Blindstops
2.
Cut the sash cord or remove the sash balance, and pull the bottom sash out of the frame (see Figure 14-6).
Figure 14-6 Remove Old Sash
Caution: Some sash balance mechanisms may react when the weight of the sash is removed, so always
proceed with caution to avoid injury.
3.
Pry out the parting stops, which typically will not be saved. Use pliers if necessary. If the stops are too heavily
PAGE 14-5
painted and will not come out easily, chisel them flush with the surface of the head and side jambs.
4.
After the parting stops have been removed, take out the upper sash.
5.
Remove pulleys and sash weights if required. If mounting screws are corroded, it may be necessary to pry
out the pulleys.
6.
If the existing window was installed with pre-formed aluminum tracks, it will usually contain a wooden parting
stop at the top, and aluminum tracks on the sides. For removal of this type of unit follow these steps:
• Remove the wooden parting stop and pull out the fasteners (staples or nails) securing the side tracks.
• Remove the small aluminum blocks located at the top and bottom of each track, then remove the two side
tracks and sash as one unit.
14.2.2
Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Outside Outside-Removal Method)
Although uncommon, with this method the interior stops and trim remain intact while the exterior casing is
removed. This procedure minimizes interior finish work and is often used when access to the interior is prohibited
because of an intervening wall. In order to use this method however, wraparound panning is typically used. Follow
these steps:
1.
Remove the exterior casings and blindstops (casing may be blindstop).
• If painted, carefully score the joints with a utility knife to break the bond before prying out the stop.
• Pry with a wide chisel. Be careful to avoid damaging the stop and frame (see Figure 14-5).
2.
Remove cords or sash balances if required, and pull the top sash out of the frame (see Figure 14-6).
3.
Pry out the parting stops, which typically will not be saved. Use pliers if necessary. If the stops are too heavily
painted and will not come out easily, chisel them flush with the surface of the head and side jambs.
4.
After the parting stops have been removed, take out the lower sash.
5.
Remove pulleys and sash weights if required. If mounting screws are corroded, it may be necessary to pry
out the pulleys.
6.
If the existing window was installed with preformed aluminum tracks, usually there is a wooden parting stop at
the top and aluminum tracks on the sides. To remove this type of unit follow the points outlined in Section
14.2.1.
14.3
Removal of Sash Only from Steel Windows
To remove steel window sash for replacement, do the following:
1.
Remove the operable sash.
2.
Remove the stationary sash.
3.
Remove mullions, fasteners.
4.
Remove any protruding metal, hinges and obstructions on the metal frames.
5.
If the replacement unit is an emergency escape window, make sure the net clear opening of the new window
meets code requirements. This should have been done when the window was ordered; however, if frame
modifications are needed, cut away the frame as required in order to allow for the installation of a window
meeting emergency escape requirements (see Figure 14-7).
PAGE 14-6
Figure 14-7 Cut Frame to Increase Size of Opening
6.
Replace or repair damaged or deteriorated components, and remove mildew to prevent further degradation.
14.4
Removal of Entire Frame:
Aluminum or Steel Windows
In solid barrier wall applications, steel windows were either installed by attaching the window frame to the rough
frame with screws or by embedding the flange into the masonry. The installer should determine the appropriate
method of removal prior to proceeding.
14.4.1
Removal of Steel Window Frame by Unscrewing
To remove a steel window frame intact:
1.
With operable sash open, remove accessible screws.
2.
For fixed sash, locate screws and chip away any putty covering them (see Figure 14-8).
PAGE 14-7
Figure 14-8 Remove Glazing Compound and Screws
Caution: Don’t forget that asbestos and lead may be found in and around old putty glazed windows. Be sure to
check for these materials and take all precautions necessary to eliminate health risks for you and the building
occupants.
3.
Remove screws or drill them out.
4.
After all screws are removed, pull out the entire window unit if possible.
14.4.2
Removal of Steel Window Frame by Cutting
When the frames of old steel windows are obstructed, or have embedded flanges or anchorages, the unit can be
removed as described below:
1.
Remove operable window assemblies. Disassemble the hinges or cut through them with a reciprocating saw
or metal cutting tool.
2.
Remove the glass from the fixed nonoperable windows.
3.
Cut out the mullions and cut through the metal frame at the sill. Leave the sides and top of the frame
temporarily intact (see Figures 14-9 and 14-10).
4.
Pull up on the severed halves of the frame bottom, thereby pulling the jambs away from the opening and
pulling the head down (see Figure 14-11). Because the flanges are usually narrow, it should be possible to
force the partially collapsed frame out of the opening (see Figure 14-12).
5.
If the replacement unit is an egress window, make sure that the opening is properly sized.
PAGE 14-8
Figure 14-9 Cut Out Center Bar – 1
Figure 14-10 Cut Through Bottom Rail – 2
PAGE 14-9
Figure 14-11 Start Pulling Out Frame – 3 and 4
Figure 14-12 Pry Out Top of Frame – 5
14.5
Assessing the Opening
Before installing a new window, the rough opening must be assessed (see Chapter 8, Section 8.3, "Preinstallation
Inspection").
14.5.1
Determining Squareness of the Opening
Window openings are seldom perfectly square (see Chapter 11, "Measuring and Ordering.").
One way to determine the squareness of the opening is to measure the diagonal distances of the opening. (See
Chapter 11 for guidelines on measuring the opening.)
1.
Measure from a bottom corner to the opposite top corner.
2.
Measure the opposite diagonal the same way.
3.
Compare the two measurements. If the diagonals are equal, the opening is square. If the measurements
differ by more than 1/4", modifications may be necessary (see Chapter 11, Section 11.2.2 for detailed
information).
14.5.2
Check the Fit of the Replacement Window
PAGE 14-10
Verify that the new unit will fit properly into the existing opening by setting it in the opening and checking the
clearance around the window. If panning and trim are to be applied around the window prior to replacement, install
them prior to checking the fit (see Chapter 15 for instructions).
14.5.3
Make Modifications for
Out-of-Square
If the opening is out-of-square, unlevel or untrue, then the window may not fit properly. Make necessary
modifications to install the replacement unit properly.
•
Because bottom supports must be flat, level the sill with blocking and bring it as close to level as possible.
•
The sides of the opening should be parallel to each other and perpendicular to the sill. Each should also be in
the same plane (true).
•
If modifications or corrections severely affect the size of the opening, it may be necessary to order a smaller
window than originally planned. If this is the case, be sure to check the egress requirements.
14.5.4
Verify the Structural Integrity of the Opening
Check the existing window frame and/or rough frame to see if it is structurally adequate to allow the new window to
be properly anchored.
Check for the presence of decayed wood and rust on steel by poking or prodding with a punch or similar tool. If the
punch goes into the wood with little or no resistance, the wood is decayed.
Check masonry conditions to ensure that brick/block conditions are not cracked or deteriorated to the point that
they are no longer suitable for anchorage.
When deteriorated or damaged components are present, notify the appropriate party and repair as directed:
•
Replace decayed wood or rusted steel with new materials as needed.
•
Reinforce cracked and split wood and masonry conditions when possible.
•
Patch and seal any cracks or holes.
Anchor the existing window or door frame to the wall system to adequately transfer loads. Use the anchor clips or
trim clips provided for this purpose and make sure they are properly secured to the existing conditions.
14.5.5
Egress Requirements
Before replacing a window, determine whether the window must meet building code requirements for egress and
safety glass (see Chapter 9).
14.6
Prepare the Opening
When preparing the opening for the replacement window, determine what accessories are needed. Complete the
application of accessories before installation of the window. Refer to Chapter 6 for more information about
accessories.
14.6.1
Protect Incompatible Materials
Direct contact of incompatible materials must be avoided. Over time, materials can degrade due to contact with
dissimilar materials. Examples of this include instances where unprotected aluminum comes into direct contact
with unprotected carbon steel, poured concrete or mortar. Galvanic corrosion will occur due to an electrochemical
reaction that takes place between the two materials (metals) while in the presence of moisture. In metal-to-metal
applications, both the aluminum and steel are to be protected.
Protect incompatible materials by following these recommendations:
PAGE 14-11
Protect Aluminum with:
•
Paint (Back painting as required)
•
Caulks/sealants
•
Non-absorptive plastic material
•
Elastomeric tapes or gaskets
Protect Steel with:
•
Cold galvanized coating (two coats)
•
Rust-proof coatings (do not use a coating that contains lead)
•
Corrosion resistant coatings and/or inhibitors
14.6.2
Cleaning
The rough opening must be clean, dry, dust free and frost free before installing the window or door, and/or
applying sealant.
Mold/Mildew Precautions
If mold or mildew is detected in, or around the window stop work on the installation and notify the responsible
party. Proper Material Disposal
Once materials are removed from the existing opening, it is the responsibility of the installer to dispose of them
properly and safely.
14.6.3 Proper Material Disposal
If hazardous waste will be generated, it must be disposed of properly. Typically, hazardous waste must be
transported in sealed, nonreturnable containers from which materials cannot escape. Containers used to transport
hazardous waste include:
•
6 mil plastic bags
•
Cartons
•
Drums
•
Cans
Note: Before transporting hazardous waste, check the local Department of Transportation's hazardous waste
hauling requirements or with a waste management agency.
Most states limit hazardous waste disposal by individuals to 50 pounds of material, and require that the waste be
hauled to an approved treatment, storage or disposal facility.
Notes:______________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 14-12
Table of Contents
15 Replacement Window Installation..........................................................................................................................2
15. 1
Installing Windows With Panning and Trim ............................................................................................2
15.1.1
Preset Panning Installation .............................................................................................................2
15.1.2
Wrap-Around Panning Installation ..................................................................................................7
15.1.3
Application of Trim and Clips ........................................................................................................10
15.1.4
Final Checking and Adjusting of Operable Sash ..........................................................................11
15.1.5
Seal and Finish the Interior ...........................................................................................................12
15.2
Extended Flange Replacement Installation ..........................................................................................12
15.2.1
Prior to Installing Extended Flange Replacement Windows .........................................................12
15.2.2
Install Window and Seal the Exterior ............................................................................................12
15.2.3
Finishing and Sealing the Interior .................................................................................................14
15.3
Installing Replacement Windows In Wood Hung Windows with Trim Only ..........................................15
15.3.1
Window Installation .......................................................................................................................15
15.3.2
Completion of the Installation........................................................................................................16
15.1.3 Application of Trim and Clips ................................................................................................................17
15.3.3
15.4
Seal and Finish the Exterior ..........................................................................................................17
Installing Replacement Windows In Flat Conditions. ............................................................................17
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 15-I
15 Replacement Window Installation
There are too many possible replacement window scenarios to cover in one chapter; however, basic instructions
for installing the more common types are presented here.
Primary emphasis is placed on replacement of wooden double hung windows and steel casement windows using
preset or wraparound panning and trim. These techniques will serve as a foundation for approaching other types
of window and wall combinations.
Also covered are applications where a new window is installed into an existing opening (without the use of
panning) and sealed against the existing exterior blind stops, and applications where extended flange replacement
windows are used.
Remember, this manual provides general guidelines. Read and follow manufacturer's instructions, and always
install in conformance with federal, state, and local codes. Before replacing windows in bedrooms and near doors,
check the prevailing requirements pertaining to emergency escape windows and safety glass (see Chapter 9,
Sections 9.4 and 9.5).
The installer must decide which existing window components will be left intact, which will be removed and
reinstalled, and which will be removed and discarded. Window removal is discussed in Chapter 14.
Remove the old window sash in accordance with local code requirements, the manufacturer's recommendations,
and the guidelines presented in Chapter 14.
15. 1
Installing Windows With Panning and Trim
Generally, commercial window installations require accessories such as panning and trim. The assembly of these
components should be completed prior to installing the window.
Some of the more common accessories are defined in the following sections. The most common types are:
•
Preset panning
•
Wrap-around panning/Snap-on flanges
•
Trim and clips
15.1.1
Preset Panning Installation
Preset panning is typically assembled, trimmed and installed before the window is installed. Complete the
assembly of these components prior to installing the window.
Since preset panning is first assembled together, then applied to the condition, the installer should gather all of the
appropriate materials before beginning.
PAGE 15-2
•
Head, jamb and sill panning pieces
•
Pressure plates and mullion covers
•
Assembly fasteners
•
Anchor clips
•
Corner clips
•
Installation fasteners
•
Gaskets
•
Sealant
•
Assembly tools
Whenever possible, work from a work bench/table. Lay all of the pieces on top of the table and prep them for
assembly.
1. First apply gaskets into the grooves on the panning.
Make sure to apply excess gasket material into the groove so that once normal shrinkage takes place, the gaskets
won't be too short. (Example: Cut the gasket 1/4” longer per foot than the extrusion length. Consult the gasket
supplier and/or window manufacturer for the recommended amount of excess.)
2. Attach the head, jamb and sill pieces together as directed by the manufacturer (see Figure 15-1).
Figure 15-1 Assembly of Preset Panning
PAGE 15-3
3. After assembly of the main pieces, apply any anchor brackets or assembly clips in place that will be used to
facilitate installation later. Steel spring clips are often attached to the panning and will help hold the window
frame in position on a temporary basis until the trim and clips can be applied. The temporary clips are not
intended to be left in place overnight.
4. Once the preset panning is assembled, place the panning assembly into the opening to check the fit.
Trimming will typically be required, so dry fitting will help establish the amount of trimming necessary.
•
Check the fit and mark the panning for trimming.
•
Remove the panning and trim the flanges as required to create a good fit. Use caution when trimming,
being careful not to distort the frame or bend the corners.
•
Cut/trim panning to allow for installation clearance and allow for the application of the specified sealant
joint.
5. After all the pieces are trimmed, back seal the assembly by applying sealant over the mechanical joints and
apply the corner reinforcing clips as needed.
•
Make sure to clean all surfaces prior to sealing. Remove any residual oil, dust and moisture prior to
sealing.
•
Always try to back seal neatly so that the sealant won't be seen later.
•
If the sealant will be visible, use a clear sealant or a sealant color that closely matches the finish of the
panning.
•
Only use sealant that is recommended for this type of application.
•
Apply prescribed corner clips last, but be careful not to scrape off all of the sealant at the joints.
6. Reinstall the panning into the opening. Shim panning plumb, level and square, and attach according to the
manufacturer’s installation instructions or project shop drawings (see Figure 15-2).
•
Make sure that the attachment fasteners penetrate a suitable condition providing the structural
support necessary to hold the assembly in position.
•
Panning must be in line (parallel) from opening to opening and unit to unit.
PAGE 15-4
Figure 15-2 Assembly of Panning Into the Opening
7. In openings where mullions must remain, apply the exterior pressure plate over the two opposing panning
pieces (see Figure 15-3).
Figure 15-3 Application of Pressure Plate and Cover over Existing Mullions and Panning
PAGE 15-5
•
Measure the finished height from the bottom of the panning to the top of the panning where it fits against
the building condition. Cut the pressure plate to the height dimension (less 1/4”) to allow for clearance.
Note: More clearance may be desirable if planning to use a backer rod under the panning where the panning has a
return leg for this purpose.
•
Install gaskets into the grooves in the pressure plate when applicable.
•
Apply the pressure plate into position using the screws recommended by the manufacturer. Seal between
the pressure plate and the panning as directed by the manufacturer.
8. Preset panning can be advantageous because the installer can apply the perimeter seal prior to installing the
new window.
•
Apply backer rod or bond breaker tape around the perimeter, between the panning flange (and pressure
plate) and the building condition.
•
Apply and tool the sealant into the joints. Be sure to push the sealant firmly in place to facilitate adhesion.
9. If pressure plates were previously applied, the snap on cover can be installed just prior to installation of the
window frame.
•
Cut the cover to size as required and snap it in place, centering it on the pressure plate.
•
Apply sealant over the joint between the cover and the panning if directed by the manufacturer.
10. Once the panning and mullion covers are secured and sealed in place, the window can be set into position.
This may require additional sealant at the panning/window interface.
• Apply sealant around the perimeter of the panning at the head, jamb and sill as directed by the
manufacturer.
• Sealant is usually placed in line with where the window frame will make contact with the panning and/or
gasket.
• Set the window into position at the sill, centering the window into the opening. Next, rotate the top towards
the exterior.
• Some panning designs include steel spring clips that will allow the window to be snapped into position.
• Press the window into position and secure it with temporary anchors (clips) as required.
11.
Use full blocking and/or extra shims under the window frame at the sill condition in order to ensure that the
frame will not be racked or rotated out of position.
12. After the frame is secured in place, replace the corresponding sash (if they were removed) back in the frame.
• In hung windows, make sure sash stops are in the jambs. Always check the sash for proper operation
before moving on to the next opening.
PAGE 15-6
15.1.2
Wrap-Around Panning Installation
The assembly method for wrap around panning is similar to the preset panning, except these materials are
wrapped around the window frame and assembled together prior to installation of the entire unit.
First check the shop drawings to determine the proper mark number and location of the panning for each opening
and window.
Gather all of the appropriate materials prior to assembly.
•
Window (typically with sash removed)
•
Pressure plates and mullion covers
•
Head, jamb and sill panning pieces
•
Assembly fasteners
•
Installation fasteners
•
Gaskets
•
Sealant
•
Assembly tools
Whenever possible, work from a work bench/table. Lay all of the pieces on top of the table and prep them for
assembly.
1. First consider removing the operable sash from the frame. This may make it a bit easier to assemble and
install the unit due to the reduced weight.
•
Be sure to mark the sash and the frame with a corresponding number so they can be put back together in
the same opening later.
2. Apply the gasket into the grooves on the panning. In cases where gaskets are not required, sealant will
typically be required.
•
Make sure to apply excess gasket material into the groove so that once normal shrinkage takes place, the
gaskets won't be too short. (Example: Cut the gasket 1/4” longer per foot than the extrusion length.
Consult the gasket supplier and/or window manufacturer for the recommended amount of excess.)
3. Place the head panning over the head of the window first, then apply the jamb pieces and finish with the sill
(see Figure 15-4).
•
When directed by the manufacturer, apply sealant in the assembly grooves prior to installation.
PAGE 15-7
Figure 15-4 Assembly of Wrap-around Panning
4. Attach the panning together at the corners as directed by the manufacturer.
5. Attach the panning to the window frame around the entire perimeter as directed by the manufacturer. For all
panning assembly and attachment, use only the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer.
6. After assembly of the main pieces, apply any anchor brackets or assembly clips in place that will be used to
facilitate installation later.
7. Once the wrap-around panning is assembled over the window and ready for installation, place the window
assembly into the opening to check the fit. Trimming will typically be required, so dry fitting will help establish
the amount of trimming necessary.
•
Check the fit and mark the panning for trimming.
•
Remove the assembly from the opening and trim the panning flanges as required to create a good fit.
Cut/trim panning to allow for installation clearance and allow for the application of the specified sealant
joint.
•
Use caution when trimming, being careful not to distort the frame or bend the corners.
8. After the assembly is trimmed, back seal the assembly by applying sealant over the mechanical joints. Make
sure to clean all surfaces prior to sealing.
•
Always try to back seal so that the sealant won't be seen later.
PAGE 15-8
•
If the sealant will be visible, use a clear sealant or a sealant color that closely matches the finish of
the panning and clean off excess.
•
Only use sealant that is recommended for this type of application.
•
Apply corner clips last, but make sure not to scrape off all of the sealant at the joints.
•
Some manufacturers will also require that the perimeter of the window be sealed where it slips inside
the panning, if this step wasn't done prior to slipping the panning over the window frame.
9. Reinstall the assembly into the opening.
•
It is often desirable to wrap the assembly with batt insulation at the head and jambs prior to final
installation.
•
Set the assembly into position and shim plumb, level and square. Attach as directed by the project shop
drawings or manufacturer’s instructions (see Figure 15-5).
Figure 15-5 Assembly of Window into the Opening
•
Use full blocking and/or multiple shims at the sill condition to restrict rotation or racking of the frame.
•
Make sure that all frames are in line (parallel) with each other (in the same plane) from opening to
opening, and unit to unit.
•
Make sure that the attachment fasteners penetrate a suitable condition that will provide the structural
support to hold the assembly in position.
10. In openings where existing mullions are to remain, the installer can now apply the exterior pressure plate over
the two opposing panning pieces (see Figure 15-3).
•
Measure the finished height from the bottom of the panning to the top of the panning where it fits against
the building condition. Cut the pressure plate to the height dimension (less 1/4”) to allow for clearance.
•
Install gaskets into the grooves in the pressure plate when applicable.
PAGE 15-9
•
Apply the pressure plate into position using the screws recommended by the manufacturer. Seal between
the pressure plate and the panning as directed by the manufacturer.
Note: More clearance may be desirable if planning to use a backer rod under the panning where the panning has a
return leg for this purpose.
11. If pressure plates were previously applied, the snap-on cover can be installed just prior to installation of the
perimeter seal.
•
Cut the cover to size as required and snap it in place, centering it on the pressure plate.
•
Apply sealant over the joint between the cover and the panning if directed by the manufacturer.
12. After installation of the panning/window assembly and the application of any pressure plates and mullion
covers, the perimeter joint can be sealed.
•
Often (if not already removed) the removal of the sash is necessary to allow for access to the perimeter
joint. Be sure to mark the sash and frame so you can reinstall the sash back into the original window
frame.
•
Apply backer rod or bond breaker tape around the perimeter, between the panning flange and the building
condition.
•
Apply and tool the sealant into the joint. Be sure to push the sealant firmly in place to facilitate adhesion.
13. After the frame is secured in place, replace the corresponding sash back in the frame.
•
In hung windows, make sure sash stops are in the jambs. Always check the sash for proper operation
before moving on to the next opening
15.1.3
Application of Trim and Clips
After the window is temporarily secured in place (and if not previously done) insulation can be applied at the head
and jambs. The type and amount of insulation will be dependent on the space available.
•
Loosely apply 1” x 3” batt insulation at the head and jamb cavities with a putty knife or similar tool.
•
For smaller joints, low or zero-pressure foam can be applied.
After the application of the required insulation, the remaining anchor clips and trim can be applied (see Figure 156).
Some projects will involve continuous trim clips, while others will involve clips that are 3" to 4" in length. Make sure
to follow the manufacturer's installation instructions pertaining to the number, length and location of the trim clips.
PVC frames may have an integral accessory groove that allows for a specially designed trim to snap into place.
Trim clips typically are the only structural attachment between the window and the existing opening; therefore, it is
critical that they be installed properly.
PAGE 15-10
1. Place trim clips tight against both the existing condition and the interior face of the new window.
2. Check the depth of the trim prior to installation to ensure that the proper coverage will be maintained over the
existing condition.
3. When attaching the trim clips to the existing condition, make sure to only use fasteners that are recommended
for the specific job application.
4. When attaching the trim clips to the new window, only use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer.
Note: Use caution when attaching the clips to the frame – be sure not to interrupt the travel of the sash by
penetrating the track.
5. Some projects will involve deeper trim at the jambs as compared to the head and sill. Others will have
contoured trim at the head and sill and straight trim at the jambs. Check the requirements and apply the
deeper trim first, then butt the shallow or contoured trim to it.
Figure 15-6 Application of Trim and Clips
15.1.4
Final Checking and Adjusting of Operable Sash
1. Make a final check of the installation. Check the sash to ensure they are set square and aligned within the
frame and that the latches are properly aligned and functioning.
Hung Windows
•
Lift the bottom sash until it just clears the sill and check the gap. It will be even across the bottom of the sash if
the unit is square. If it is not, adjust the window frame in the opening until it is.
•
Shim and attach the frame at the meeting rail, or use jamb adjustment clips to secure frames at the center.
•
When installing double hung side load sash, be sure to fully engage the sash clips and guides on top of the
sash to ensure proper operation and sash alignment.
•
When re-installing sash in tilt windows, be sure that the tilt triggers are fully engaged into the jambs, and that
the pivot bars are completely engaged into the balance shoes.
PAGE 15-11
•
Never allow installation screws to deter the proper operation of the product. Check each sash for proper
operation.
•
Double check that the bottom and top sash stops have not fallen off during transportation, or were removed
from the jambs. If they have been removed for any reason, make sure that they are replaced.
Sliders
•
Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb and check the gap. It should be even along the vertical
edge of the sash if the unit is square.
•
If the sash is not square, remove the sash to reduce the weight and adjust the rollers prior to placing the sash
back into the window frame. Continue to check and adjust until the sash is square in the frame.
•
Make sure operable sliders are supported at the locking points so that if the sash is slammed shut, the frame
will resist damage.
Casements
•
If the frame installation is square, the gap will be equal all the way around the sash.
•
Adjust the hinge and install set screws to restrict movement later. Always fasten through the hinge into the
building condition on butt hinge applications. This is especially critical in panning applications where
anchorage may be limited.
2. When the window is plumb, level and square, tighten all screws without distorting the frame. The frame must
be secure; however, it must not be twisted or warped by under- or over-shimming, or by improperly positioning
and over tightening fasteners.
15.1.5
Seal and Finish the Interior
To finish the interior on panning and trim installations, apply sealant to the joint between trim and the building
conditions (and any other areas) as required per job.
15.2
Extended Flange Replacement Installation
An extended flange replacement window can be installed without removing the existing window frame. The
primary seal in an extended flange installation is located between the exterior side of the extended flange and the
existing building condition. PVC frames may have an integral flange or accessory groove that allows for a specially
designed flange to snap into place.
15.2.1
Prior to Installing Extended Flange Replacement Windows
Removal practices vary with the type of window being replaced. For details on removing the existing sash, see
Chapter 14, Section 14.3.
15.2.2
Install Window and Seal the Exterior
PAGE 15-12
After removal of existing sash and mullion, check the opening size and fit, and install the new window following
these steps:
1. Prior to installation, dry fit the extended flange window into the opening. Check the flange alignment with the
rough opening and mark any necessary trimming in order to allow a proper fit during installation.
2. After trimming the flange, recheck the fit and make sure to allow for a good fit between the edge of the flange
and the existing building condition (see Figure 15-7).
•
Cut/trim the flange to allow for installation clearance and allow for the application of the specified sealant
joint.
•
Don’t force the window in place. If necessary, trim again and re-insert into the opening.
Figure 15-7 Sill Detail – Extended Flange Window
3. Install shims and bottom support as needed or directed by the manufacturer, to ensure that the frame will be
well supported along its base.
4. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when securing the window into position. In some cases predrilled holes
are present in the frame. Use them as directed, or drill them as instructed.
•
When fastening through the frame at the sill, seal the fastener hole, set the fastener, and then seal over
the head.
Note: Fasteners are sometimes installed through the head, jamb and sill frame, but never through the extended
flange.
5. In most many cases, trim clips and trim are used to secure the window into position. When trim is provided,
use the instructions outlined in Section 15.1.3 to secure the window.
PAGE 15-13
6. After the replacement window is properly positioned and secured, install the primary seal around the perimeter
of the window between the extended flange and the building condition (see Figure 15-8). Also refer to Section
15.1.4 for final checking and adjustment.
Figure 15-8 Apply Primary Seal
15.2.3
Finishing and Sealing the Interior
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions regarding finishing and sealing. The following are general guidelines.
Option #1: Existing Frame Cut Back
If the existing frame was cut back, make the gap between the replacement frame and the opening as small as
possible.
•
With shims and bottom support in place, apply sealant to fill the joint between the replacement frame and the
opening.
•
Install a backer rod and a continuous bead of sealant to fill any voids. Tool the sealant to ensure good
adhesion.
•
Install low or zero-expansion pressure foam if allowed by manufacturer. Use precautions outlined in Chapter
13.
Option #2: Existing Frame Left in Place without Modification
If the existing frame is left in place and not trimmed back, fill the joint between the replacement frame and the
opening. To finish and seal the frame:
•
Install cavity insulation, paying particular attention to the manufacturer's instructions when using injected foam
(use minimally expanding type only).
•
Install finishing trim that spans the joint and mates neatly with the replacement frame (see Figure 15-9).
•
When the interior edge of the replacement frame is recessed in the opening, jamb extensions may be
required.
•
If required, apply a small bead of sealant along both edges of the trim and tool for a finished appearance.
PAGE 15-14
Figure 15-9 Trim Installation - Extended Flange Window
15.3
Installing Replacement Windows In Wood Hung Windows with Trim Only
There are applications where the existing wood windows will remain in place and a new window frame will be
installed without the use of panning on the exterior. Although this is not as frequent an occurrence as projects
involving panning and trim, this application does occur. This application is often called an “inside-out installation
technique.”
When this occurs, use the procedures for removing the existing sash from the interior as outlined in Section
14.2.1. Once the removal procedures are completed, the installer can use the following practice for installation of
the new window.
15.3.1
Window Installation
1. Assess and prepare the opening, making sure it is ready for installation of the new window.
2. Generally, the replacement window will either include an extended flange on the sill or an applied sill
expander. This piece is designed to cover the gap between the existing window sill and the new window frame
(see Figure 15-10). Check the requirements of the particular job and apply as needed.
PAGE 15-15
Figure 15-10 Sill Expander at Sill Condition
3. Dry-fit the window into the opening to ensure it will fit properly. This may require trimming of the sill expander.
4. Before installing the window on a permanent basis, apply a nominal 3/8” diameter bead of sealant to the
interior face of the exterior stops at the jambs and head, and to the exterior face of the stool (see Figure 1511).
Figure 15-11 Sealant Application
5. Place the window in the opening and push it against the exterior stops. Apply temporary blocking, shims
and/or clips as required to keep the window in place.
15.3.2
Completion of the Installation
PAGE 15-16
After the window is temporarily secured in place, use techniques outlined in previous sections of this chapter for
completion of the installation. The sections that apply are as follows:
•
15.1.3
Application of Trim and Clips
•
15.1.4
Final Checking & Adjusting of Operable Sash
•
15.1.5
Seal and Finish the Interior
15.3.3
Seal and Finish the Exterior
Once the window is secured in place, the exterior finish work can be completed. The sash will typically either need
to be removed or fully opened to complete this process.
1. If an extended flange or sill expander is present at the bottom of the window, apply an appropriate backer rod
or bond breaker and a bead of sealant along the bottom edge where it butts to the existing window sill.
2. Determine whether the sealant applied to exterior stops is adequate. Remove excess where it squeezes out
and/or fill any voids. Tool the bead so that it is fillet shaped and ensures a weather-tight seal.
15.4
Installing Replacement Windows In Flat Conditions.
In barrier wall applications where the existing windows have been removed and relatively flat conditions are
remaining, the application may be more like a new construction installation (see Figure 15-12).
Figure 15-12 Replacement Opening w/ Flush Condition
PAGE 15-17
Examples of replacement window application include cases where:
•
Existing steel windows are completely removed, resulting in a flush condition.
•
Existing windows are completely removed (regardless of the material) to allow for the largest replacement
window possible.
•
Applications where a new wood buck is to be installed such as with unequal leg frames.
In these cases, the head, jamb and sill conditions remaining are relatively flat and do not require panning. These
types of installations typically will incorporate equal leg frame windows.
When this situation occurs, follow the installation practices outlined in the new construction installation methods
outlined in Chapter 16.
Notes:______________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________
PAGE 15-18
Table of Contents
16.1
Equal Leg Frame Window Installations ......................................................................................................1
16.1.1
Equal Leg Frame Window Installation without Receptor Systems .....................................................1
16.1.2
Checking the Opening ........................................................................................................................1
16.1.3
Preparation of the Window Prior to Installation ..................................................................................3
16.1.4
Installation of the Window ...................................................................................................................4
16.1.5
Application of the Perimeter Seal .......................................................................................................6
16.2
Equal Leg Frame Window Installations With A Receptor System ..............................................................7
16.2.1
Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation......................................................7
16.2.2
Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation .................................................... 11
16.2.3
Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems ................................................. 17
16.2.4
Preparation of the Window for Installation with a Receptor System................................................ 18
16.2.5
Installation of the Window in Openings with a Receptor System .................................................... 19
16.3
Horizontal Ribbon Window Installations With A Receptor System .......................................................... 23
16.3.1
Preparation of the Receptor System for Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications .......................... 23
16.3.2
Installation of the Receptor System in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications ............................. 25
16.3.3
Installation of Windows and Mullions in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications........................... 26
16.3.3.1
Male/Female Frames ................................................................................................................... 27
16.3.3.2
Independent Structural Mullions and Corner Mullions ................................................................. 29
Mullions Installed In Sequence ....................................................................................................................... 30
Mullions Installed Before the Window ............................................................................................................. 31
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 16-I
Corner Mullion Installation .............................................................................................................................. 32
Finish Mullion and Window Installation ........................................................................................................... 33
16.4
Vertical Stack Window Installations With A Receptor System ............................................................... 36
16.4.1
Preparation of the Receptor System for Vertical Stack Window Applications ................................. 36
16.4.2
Installation of the Receptor System in Vertical Stack Window Applications ................................... 36
16.4.3
Installation of Windows in Vertical Stack Window Applications ....................................................... 37
16.4.3.1
Horizontal Stack Mullions ............................................................................................................ 38
16.4.3.2
Independent Horizontally Floating Structural Mullions ................................................................ 40
16.5
Transoms / Transition Mullions and Knee Wall Applications ................................................................... 42
16.6
Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and square ................................................................................. 47
16.7
Final Checking and Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 48
16.8
Finishing the Exterior ............................................................................................................................... 49
16.8.1
16.9
Allowance for Moisture Escape ....................................................................................................... 50
Finishing the Interior ................................................................................................................................ 50
16.9.1
Cavity Insulation .............................................................................................................................. 50
16.9.2
Apply Backer Rod (Interior) ............................................................................................................. 50
16.9.3
Apply Sealant (Interior) .................................................................................................................... 50
16.9.4
Trim or Drywall Returns ................................................................................................................... 50
PAGE 16-II
16.0 New construction Window Installation
This chapter contains basic guidelines for installing windows in new construction.
16.1
Equal Leg Frame Window Installations
Generally, equal leg frame windows (see Figure 16-1) are the most common type of window frame used in
commercial new construction. This term simply refers to the frame style of the frame being used.
Windows used in these applications typically do not include panning and trim, and don't include extended flanges
to facilitate installation over existing window frames and/or conditions, as they would be non-existent.
The installation process for these window types will vary depending on the type of opening, and whether receptor
systems will be used to help facilitate installation.
Figure 16-1 Equal Leg Frame Window
16.1.1
Equal Leg Frame Window Installation without Receptor Systems
Equal leg frame windows can be used in buildings that involve a surface barrier system or a membrane drainage
system (see Chapter 8, Section 8.1.3). Regardless, the installation of this product type depends on a sealant joint
between the window (or receptor) and the exterior building surface for shedding water away from the building.
When installing equal leg frame windows in applications that require receptors and subsills, follow the installation
practices outlined in Section 16.2. For equal leg frame installations without the use of receptors and subsills, use
the installation procedures in this section.
16.1.2
Checking the Opening
Prior to installation, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and
the design intent. The installer shall:
1.
Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is
plumb, level and square.
PAGE 16-1
2.
Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the window
frame.
3.
Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition.
•
If flashing is present, make sure that head attachment will not penetrate the flashing (see Figure 16-2).
•
If flashing is present, determine where the window will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is
inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter joint.
Figure 16-2 Checking Flashing at Head Condition
4.
Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended and that the
conditions are suitable for attachment.
Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors and the condition is not
masonry but steel stud, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application.
5.
Determine where the window will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant
joint (see Figure 16-3).
•
Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls will incorporate an air space or cavity, which will dictate
where the frame will be placed to ensure proper joint back up.
•
Depending on the location of the frame relative to the interior conditions, the location of the frame may
require interior trim and/or jamb extensions to finish off the interior.
PAGE 16-2
Figure 16-3 Checking Sealant Condition
16.1.3
Preparation of the Window
Prior to Installation
Once the opening has been inspected and is ready for window installation, the window can be prepared. This
includes unpacking the window and making sure it is ready for installation.
Whenever possible, dry fit the window into the opening to verify the fit. Make sure to allow for a sealant joint
around the entire perimeter. This will require that the installer determine the amount of shimming necessary to
allow for a consistent perimeter joint of adequate width.
If mounting clips or brackets are to be used for window attachment, it may be appropriate to install them prior to
installation of the window (see Figure 16-4).
•
Check the project shop drawings for the clip type and location, as they will vary from job to job.
•
Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the anchor clips to the frame.
•
Apply any other accessories, like perimeter caulk returns or closure channels, around the perimeter of the
window as required for your specific job.
•
PAGE 16-3
Figure 16-4 Attachment of Anchor Clips to Frame
16.1.4
Installation of the Window
Install the window using the following steps:
1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can pre-apply the shims to the sill
condition prior to installation of the window frame.
2. Manufacturers often require full support blocking under the window sill to help carry the glass weight. For
applications where the window frame requires full support, use blocking as directed by the manufacturer (see
Figure 16-5).
3. Set the window in place on top of the shims at the sill (see Figure 16-6). Shims are to be located under any
anchor clips or at fastener locations if they occur within the window frame.
PAGE 16-4
Figure 16-5 Example of Full Sill Support Blocking
Figure 16-6 Installation of Window Assembly
4.
Center the window within the opening, allowing for a consistent joint width around the entire perimeter.
5.
Place a level on the window sill to verify that the sill is level. Adjust the shims as needed to ensure a level
condition.
PAGE 16-5
6.
Once the window is positioned in the opening, attach the frame to temporarily secure it in place. Apply shims
as needed at the head directly in line with the anchor clips. Attach the fasteners just tight enough to secure
the window in position, yet allow for adjustment in the next step.
7.
Check the head, sill and jambs with a level again to make sure the window is setting plumb, level and square
within the opening. Measure across the diagonals to determine if the window is square.
8.
Add shims and fasteners as required at the remaining anchor points. Be sure to attach the window frame
with clips/fasteners according to the product performance tests conducted by the manufacturer.
9.
For casement windows, add blocking and anchors at the hinge locations as directed by the manufacturer.
For sliding windows, add support blocking behind the jamb condition at the locking point. This support
blocking may also be needed at the head condition directly above the meeting rail of a horizontal slider. Be
sure to fully block behind the hinges/locking points, and run fasteners through the hinge into a structural
jamb condition (see Figure 16-7, and refer to Section 16.8).
10. Tighten up each fastener around the perimeter until a plumb, level and square installation is achieved. Be
careful not to over tighten the fasteners in such a way that the frame is distorted.
11. Check the installed product to ensure that it operates properly and that the reveal is equal between the sash
and frame.
Figure 16-7 Blocking Behind Butt Hinge Anchor Points
16.1.5
Application of the Perimeter Seal
Once the window is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the application of perimeter sealant.
1. If necessary, remove the sash or open the sash to gain access to the exterior.
•
When removing sash, make sure to mark the sash so it will be placed back in the original window frame.
•
In some instances, the perimeter joint is applied from the exterior side using scaffolding or work platforms.
2. Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application. Remove any loose debris and
wipe any dirt or dust off the condition and the window frame.
3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the window framing if recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
•
Use only the primer recommended for the application.
•
Do not apply primer to the backer rod, if present.
PAGE 16-6
•
Apply the proper amount of primer as prescribed by the sealant manufacturer. Do not apply an excessive
amount of primer.
4. Apply an appropriate size backer rod around the entire perimeter. Use a blunt probe or roller to install the
backer rod (see Figure 16-8).
•
Do not puncture the rod as this may release gases that can affect the perimeter seal.
•
Make sure to insert the rod at the correct depth so that the joint can be properly filled with sealant.
Figure 16-8 Application of Backer Rod and Sealant
5. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint.
•
Pushing, as opposed to pulling, the sealant ensures that the joint is filled with sealant and that the amount
of air left behind the joint is minimal.
•
Fill the joint completely around the entire perimeter, making sure to apply a continuous perimeter seal.
6. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets and create a smooth joint
of the proper depth and geometry.
7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the window frame. Double check the entire joint, making sure
there are no voids left in the seal.
8. Reinstall the sash if it was removed in Step #1.
9. After installation of the sealant joint, recheck the operation of the sash to ensure proper operation and contact
with the weather stripping.
10. Follow the guidelines for finishing the interior as prescribed in Section 16.10.
16.2
Equal Leg Frame Window Installations With A Receptor System
The installation of equal leg frames often incorporates the use of receptors, subsills and flashing. The methods
outlined in the following sections describe the installation of receptor systems prior to the window frames.
16.2.1
Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation
Prior to installation of the window frames, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings,
specifications and the design intent. This includes:
PAGE 16-7
1. Verifying the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is
2. Checking the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the
accessories.
3. Determining whether flashing materials are present at the head condition.
•
If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment of the receptor at the head will not penetrate the
flashing.
•
If flashing is present, determine where the window will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is
inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter joint at the head receptor
(see Figure 16-9).
4. Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended, and that the
conditions are suitable for attachment on all four sides.
Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors, and the condition is not
5. Distribute the receptor systems to the corresponding openings. Receptor systems are often shipped in
bundles and may be marked to correspond with the opening.
6. If flashing is required at the sill, be certain that any flashing used does not compromise the thermal barrier in
areas where cold temperatures can be expected.
7. Check the receptor system to determine if any field assembly or fabrication is required. Some receptor
systems will require field cutting, drilling and the application of end dams, gaskets, anchor clips, splice plates,
etc.
•
If cutting is required, check the project shop drawings for sizing to ensure a proper fit. As an example, if
subsills are used, the cut size may be dictated by the shop drawings so the window frames can be
installed without interference.
PAGE 16-8
•
When cutting to length, such as in subsill applications, the installer will be required to apply the end dams
after any gaskets have been applied as indicated in step #8, (see Figure 16-10). In cases where the
subsill has previously been cut to length, the end dams and gaskets may already be applied.
Figure 16-10 Application of End Dams
•
When applying end dams, make sure to properly clean off the ends of both the subsill and the end dam
with appropriate solvent to ensure a good seal. After applying solvent, immediately dry off the material.
Do not allow the solvent to air dry on the material.
Note: It is critical that this step not be overlooked as oil, grease and dirt deposited during the manufacturing
process can have a detrimental effect on the adhesion capability of the sealant.
•
Apply and seal the end dams as directed by the manufacturer. Be sure to seal the joint between the end
dam and the subsill, and then tool the sealant to remove air bubbles and promote good adhesion.
8. Check the receptors and subsill for grooves, which may require the installation of the gaskets (see Figure 1611). If required, use the following steps before applying the end dams.
•
Prior to installing the gaskets, remove the material from the roll and allow it to relax. Don't stretch the
gaskets.
•
Cut the gasket long enough to allow for crowd in, or compress it so that if it shrinks, it won't be too short.
Example: Some gaskets are cut 1/4” per foot longer than the extrusion length. Check with the gasket
and/or window manufacturer to determine cutting requirements.
PAGE 16-9
Figure 16-11 Application of Gaskets
9. Drill the accessories as indicated on the shop drawings. Make sure to drill the hole-sizes and locations
according to the drawings and/or any job calculations.
•
Receptors may require expansion slots and subsills may require slip anchors to allow for expansion and
contraction.
•
Check the installation instructions when locating fixed points and expansion points and make sure to
follow the recommended procedures for attachment of the receptor system to the substrate.
Note: When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be
positioned in the center of the slot (see Figure 16-12). Check the shop drawings for specific instructions.
Figure 16-12 Attachment of Fasteners through Slots
10. If anchor clips are to be applied prior to installation, attach them now according to the manufacturer's
instruction (see Figure 16-13). Use the fasteners specified by the manufacturer.
PAGE 16-10
Figure 16-13 Attach Anchor Clips
11. Determine where the receptor system will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable
sealant joint.
•
Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls, will incorporate an air space or cavity that will dictate where
the receptor system will be placed to ensure proper joint back up.
•
Depending on the location of the receptor system relative to the interior conditions, additional interior trim
and/or jamb extensions may be required and applied later to finish off the interior.
16.2.2
Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation
When the opening has been inspected and the receptor system has been properly prepared in accordance with
Section 16.2.1, the installation of the receptor system may begin. In some cases, the subsill will be installed first,
followed by the head and jamb receptor. In other cases, the head and jamb receptors will be installed first,
followed by the subill.
There may also be other instances where the interior of the windows is inaccessible. In this case, the installation
of windows must be done from the exterior, requiring the snap-on receptor clip to be on the exterior side of the
wall.
The job conditions and the design of the subsill/receptor (whether the jamb receptor is designed to be the
termination point for the subsill, or the subsill is designed to be the termination point for the jamb receptor) will be
the determining factors. Regardless of the design for the specific job condition, the following steps can be altered
in sequence to allow for the variations.
1. Start by placing a level at the sill condition. Determine if the sill is level and how much shimming will be
necessary to allow for the proper joint size.
•
Check the shop drawings to determine the amount of shimming necessary to allow for normal field
tolerances, and the proper overlap between the window frame and the receptor.
•
Depending on the live load and dead load design criteria for the project, the amount of overlap between
the receptor and the window frame can be critical.
PAGE 16-11
•
A story pole (a temporary measurement guide made by the installer) will generally be helpful to determine
if enough clearance will remain to allow for the installation of the receptor and the window frame (see
Figure 16-14).
Figure 16-14 Checking the Opening for Proper Fit
•
If the minimum clearance shown on the shop drawings is not enough to allow for proper installation of the
receptor and window frame, some adjustment in the shim height or the opening size may be necessary.
•
Never install the product into an opening where it doesn’t fit. Make sure to provide enough clearance to
allow for building movement, as well as expansion and contraction (see Chapter 17).
2. Set and shim the subsill within the opening. Place a level on the subsill and check to ensure it is level. Adjust
the shims as needed to create a level condition.
Note: For water performance and drainage, it is critical that all subsills be set level because the application of
the receptor and the window frame will follow. If the subsill is not set level, there is a good chance that the
receptors and the window will not be set level.
3. Attach the subsill into position. Make sure to set the subsill straight within the opening. Attach through the
subsill or through anchor clips according to the job specific application.
4. If applying fasteners through the subsill:
•
Make sure to clean the subsill and fastener head/washers/nuts prior to the application of the sealant in
order to provide good contact and adhesion of the sealant.
•
Be sure to first pump sealant into the hole and on top of the surface the fastener will penetrate.
•
Next, apply the fastener, any washers, and the nut as required.
•
Finally, seal over the fastener/nut and washer assembly making sure to fully encapsulate the assembly.
PAGE 16-12
•
Tool the sealant to fill any voids, remove air pockets, and to create a water tight installation.
5. Continue to make adjustments as required, re-checking and verifying that the minimum/maximum overlap
requirements between the window and the receptor system will be maintained (see Figure 16-14).
6. Once the subsill is set, apply a sealant bead between the end dam and the building condition. It is often
necessary to apply a backer rod into the joint to control the amount of sealant used (see Figure 16-15). If the
jamb receptor is going to be the termination point for the subsill, skip to Steps #8 and #9, then come back to
Step #7.
Figure 16-15 Sealing the End Dam to the Jamb Condition
7. Tool the sealant against the jamb condition, creating a wash that will allow any residual water that gets behind
the receptor to drain harmlessly into the subsill.
•
If the subsill is set after the jamb receptor, seal the joint between the end dam and the jamb receptor,
creating a wash to divert water into the subsill (see Figure 16-16).
•
PAGE 16-13
Figure 16-16 Sealing the Subsill End Dam to the Jamb Receptor
8. After installation of the subsill, the head receptor can be installed. Install the head receptor directly in line with
the subsill.
•
First, check the specific type of receptor to determine if a foam block or back up plate will be required to
support the sealant joint at the ends of the receptor where the perimeter joint will occur (see Figure 1617).
Figure 16-17 Plugging the Ends of the Receptor
•
If a foam block is used, install it in place and seal over the ends to essentially create an end plug.
•
If a back up plate is used, it may be applied prior to installation of the head receptor, or it may be applied
after the head and jamb receptors are in place. Check the manufacturer's instructions for specific details.
•
Use a laser or level to align the head receptor with the subsill below.
PAGE 16-14
•
Check the drawings to understand the relationship between where the window head will set within the
receptor and where the window sill will set within the subsill. The proper relationship will only occur when
the window frame is plumb within the opening after the receptor system is installed (see Figure 16-18).
Figure 16-18 Understanding Relationship between the Head and Sill Conditions
•
Shim and attach the head receptor to the head condition using the fasteners specified for the condition.
Make sure to shim the head receptor so that it is both level along its length, and from front to back (not
rolled) within the opening.
•
The installer is encouraged to use a story pole or a piece of the jamb receptor to line up the head with the
sill and to determine the exact height location of the head receptor.
•
Fasten the head receptor in place by tightening the fasteners snug, yet still allowing for further
adjustment.
•
Make sure the fasteners at the head will not interfere with the installation of the window frame.
9. Once the head receptor and subsill are in place, the jamb receptors can be installed. If the previous steps
were used, the installation of the jamb receptors should be relatively easy.
•
The jamb receptor should fit between the bottom outside leg of the head receptor and the top outside
surface of the subsill, but will depend on your specific application (see Figure 16-19).
•
In cases where extreme movement is expected, a sealant joint may be required between the head and
jamb receptors. In this case, use a back up plate with bond breaker applied to the exterior face of the
plate to bridge the gap (see Figure 16-20).
•
Set the jamb receptor within the opening. Shim and fasten with the appropriate fasteners. Add blocking
behind the receptor at the locking points and hinge points for casement and sliding windows.
•
Recheck the opening to verify that the window will set into a plumb, level and square condition. Make any
final adjustments that are needed.
PAGE 16-15
Figure 16-19 Installation of Jamb Receptor
Figure 16-20 Splice between Jamb and Head Receptors at Moving Joints
10. Insert splice sleeve, bond breaker tape, and/or silicone splice sheet as required for joint backup at head/jamb
receptor intersection. Back seal all joints between the head receptor and the jamb receptor, and the jamb
receptor to the subsill. Tool the sealant to ensure good contact and adhesion.
PAGE 16-16
11. Prior to window installation, check the subsill for any debris. Clean out any debris that will block the weep
holes or keep the subsill from draining.
•
A method of field checking the water integrity of the subsill can be used by the installer to ensure it is
water tight. This simple field test method can help reduce the expensive call backs associated with water
penetration at the subsill.
-
Use a suitable tape to cover over the weep holes.
-
Fill the subsill with water and mark the high water point.
-
Leave the water in the subsill for at least fifteen minutes. If no water leakage is evident, the subsill is
considered water tight.
-
If leakage occurs, pinpoint the place of escape, drain the water from the subsill, then reseal the point
of leakage when the materials are dry.
•
After checking the subsill for water penetration, make sure to remove the tape so the subsill can drain
freely later.
16.2.3
Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems
Once the receptor system is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant
application.
1. Generally, the installer can work from the interior to apply the perimeter joint between the receptors/subsills
and the perimeter condition. In some cases, scaffolding and/or work platforms are provided to allow for easy
access.
2. Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application.
•
Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the receptor system.
3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the receptor system if recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
•
•
•
Apply the proper amount of primer as prescribed by the sealant manufacturer. Do not apply an excessive
amount of primer.
backer rod.
•
•
5. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint
(see Figure 16-21).
•
•
PAGE 16-17
Figure 16-21 Perimeter Seal Application
6. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good adhesion,
and create a smooth joint of the proper depth and geometry.
7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the receptor system. Double check the entire joint, making
sure there are no voids left in the seal.
16.2.4
Preparation of the Window for Installation with a Receptor System
Once the receptor system has been installed and sealed to the opening, the installer can prepare for window
installation. This includes unpacking the window and making sure it is ready for installation.
Some projects require jamb reinforcement channels in the jambs of window frames for added strength. Check the
requirements for the job and apply reinforcement channels as directed, making sure they are the right size and in
the right location (see Figure 16-22).
Whenever possible, dry fit the window into the opening to verify the fit. Check the amount of overlap between the
head and jamb receptor and the window frame, making sure it is consistent and according to the design intent. If
the fit is good, the installer can remove the window and proceed with the following steps for window installation.
PAGE 16-18
Figure 16-22 Application of Reinforcement Channel
16.2.5
Installation of the Window in Openings with a Receptor System
Install the window using the following steps:
1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can prepare for installation of the
window.
•
In some cases, the installation will require a bead of sealant applied to the upturned leg of the subsill;
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
•
In other cases, gaskets are used as the air/water seal between the subsill and the window frame.
Depending on the design of the subsill, this gasket was either previously applied in the groove or will be
applied after window installation.
2. The installer may also be required to apply sealant to the head/jamb receptor prior to the installation of the
window. Check the drawings to determine the design intent and apply the bead as directed (see Figure 1623).
PAGE 16-19
Figure 16-23 Sealing the Receptor or Subsill
3. The opening is now ready for window installation. Position the window as close to the opening as possible.
Lift the window and rotate the bottom out while holding the head inboard.
4. Before setting the window in place, try to get the window centered in the opening as much as possible.
•
This is especially critical if sealant was applied at the subsill or receptor to avoid scraping the sealant off
when moving the window from side to side.
5. Set the window in place, positioning the bottom of the window on top of the subsill.
•
When setting the window in place, use caution so that the bottom edge of the frame is not rubbed against
the exterior gasket at the jambs or head receptor. Doing so may pull the gasket out of the gasket pocket
(see Figure 16-24).
PAGE 16-20
Figure 16-24 Verify Gasket is Secure
•
Don’t shove the window too far into the jamb receptor. This could cause damage to the end dams.
6. Rotate the head of the window up and push it out toward the exterior until it hits the head receptor and
sealant.
7. Check the location of the window, making sure it is centered in the opening, allowing for a consistent overlap
around the entire perimeter.
•
Double check the gasket, making sure the gasket has stayed in place and has not dropped down or
become dislodged.
•
If the gasket has become dislodged, remove the window and reinsert the gasket; the gasket will not
function if it is not installed properly.
•
Apply pressure down on the window frame to make sure it is seated as far as possible into the bottom of
the subsill.
8. Place a level on the window sill to verify that the sill is level. If the window is not level, remove it and
determine why. Then make adjustments as required, and reseal the receptor and subsill again prior to
reinstallation.
9. Typically, the window frame is not anchored to the receptor or subsill. This allows the window to float within
the opening, allowing for building movement and product expansion.
•
When working with multiple windows within a single opening, follow the additional instructions in Section
16.3.
•
When working with casement windows, it is often desirable to add an anchor at the hinge points (see
Figure 16-25). Check the shop drawings for specific requirements relative to the job application.
PAGE 16-21
Figure 16-25 Attachment at Hinge and Lock Points
•
Apply fasteners near or through the hinge points directly into the structural jamb condition as directed by
the manufacturer.
•
When working with hung windows, apply blocking (wood and shims) at the meeting rails to help keep the
jambs straight.
•
Apply blocking at sliding windows at the center of the vertical jamb to help resist the load when the sash
is shut and/or locked.
10. Once the window is positioned in the opening, temporary receptor clips can be applied to hold the window in
place.
•
Do not leave temporary clips in place as they are not designed to support the full load.
11. If temporary receptor clips are not used, or if it is time to complete the installation, apply the finished receptor
clips as follows:
•
Check the jamb receptor to subsill intersection. Prior to applying the jamb receptor clip, apply a bead of
sealant at the space between the edge of the window and the receptor (see Figure 16-26).
PAGE 16-22
Figure 16-26 Application of Sealant at Receptor to Subsill Intersection
•
There will not be a back-up surface for this sealant joint, but a blind seal (applied to the receptor clip later)
will allow the two seals to integrate.
•
Make sure to install the gasket material into the grooves on the receptor as required. Do not cut the
gasket short. Cut it long enough (allowing for excess) so that if shrinkage occurs later, there will still be
enough to cover the entire length.
12. Apply a heavy bed of sealant to the back of the receptor clip where it overlaps the sill framing of the window
(see Figure 16-26). After applying the sealant, apply the receptor clip into position. Tool and clean any
excess sealant that appears on the finished surface.
13. Check the installed product to ensure that it operates properly and that the reveal is equal between the sash
and frame.
16.3
Horizontal Ribbon Window Installations With A Receptor System
The installation of multiple windows (often called ribbon windows) is very similar to the instructions outlined in
Section 16.2; however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary.
Two things must be considered when installing windows in horizontal ribbons using receptor systems. First is the
preparation and installation of the receptor system, which will often be spliced together in a single opening. The
second consideration is the use of mullions, and the need to properly anchor the mullions between the units to
handle the structural load.
16.3.1 Preparation of the Receptor System for Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications
When installing receptors and subsills in horizontal ribbon window applications, the amount of preparation needed
will be based on the width of the opening and whether splicing is necessary. The governing factor will be the
length of the receptor/subsill, which is often determined based on the shipping capabilities.
When preparing receptors and subsills, follow the procedures outlined below. The splicing requirements are
common to both receptors and subsills.
1. Distribute the materials to the correct opening.
PAGE 16-23
2. Determine what field fabrication is necessary, such as cutting, drilling and the application of end dams,
gaskets and anchor clips as outlined in Section 16.2.1.
•
Receptors may require expansion slots, and subsills may require slip anchors to allow for expansion and
contraction.
•
Check the installation instructions when locating fixed points and expansion points, and make sure to
•
When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be
positioned in the center of the slot (see Figure 16-27).
Figure 16-27 Expansion Slots/Slip Anchors
3. In addition to the preparations outlined in Section 16.2.1, splice plates will need to be applied (see Figure 1628).
•
Splices may be made of extrusions, formed from aluminum sheet or silicone compatible rubberized splice
sleeves.
•
Typically, rigid splice plates will be attached to one end of the extrusion and allowed to float freely with the
opposing end of the mating piece, while flexible splices are sealed to both extrusions after installation.
•
First, apply any bond breaker tape to the splice as indicated on the drawings. The application of bond
breaker tape is necessary to back up the sealant joint and allow for expansion and contraction, while
avoiding three-side adhesion.
•
Once the bond breaker tape is applied, the splice can be installed. Attach the splice using the fasteners
indicated on the shop drawings.
•
Check the design of the splice and determine if the receptor/subsill is designed to simply sit down or nest
with the opposing piece, or if the two pieces are to be slipped together prior to installation. The application
will vary based on the design of the extrusion and the splice.
PAGE 16-24
Figure 16-28 Application of Splice Sleeve
16.3.2
Installation of the Receptor System in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications
After preparation of the receptor system and assembly of the splice plates, the receptor/subsill can be installed
into position. Follow the installation procedures outlined in Section 16.2.2 and the perimeter sealing procedures in
Section 16.2.3, and use the additional following precautions.
1. Starting from one end of the opening, install the receptor system. The receptor system must be carefully
applied to ensure that all materials are properly lined up to allow for window installation later.
•
It is a good idea to use strings or a laser to help locate the position of the receptors and subsill. Setting
string will help keep the accessories straight within the opening.
•
As mentioned in previous sections, a story pole and laser will also help keep the receptor and subsill in
line with one another from top to bottom, and ensure that the amount of clearance between the head
receptor and subsill is correct.
2. Check the installation of each piece to ensure it is set plumb, level and square within the opening and in
relationship to each other.
3. Once all of the pieces are installed in the opening, seal the splice joint (see Figure 16-29).
•
Apply the splice sleeve and sealant over the joint, and then tool it to ensure that all air pockets are
removed and to promote good adhesion.
•
Use caution when applying the sealant. Make sure the amount of sealant will not create interference with
the installation of the window later.
Note: Installing too much sealant may cause the window to rest on top of the sealant, causing the window to sit
out of level.
PAGE 16-25
Figure 16-29 Sealing Splice Joints
4. Prior to installation of the windows, re-check the installation of the receptor system and make sure all
adjustments are made prior to the application of the perimeter seal.
5. Apply the perimeter seal as outlined in Section 16.2.3. Re-check all joints to ensure that no voids are left in
the sealant around the perimeter or between the perimeter seal and the splice joints.
16.3.3
Installation of Windows and Mullions in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications
The installation of multiple windows in horizontal ribbon applications can be classified into two basic categories.
These categories are defined as male/female frames, or frames with independent structural mullions (see Figure
16-30).
The differences between the two categories are relatively simple. Frames with male and female mullions are
designed to mate (slip) together during installation, and may or may not require additional anchor clips at the head
and sill depending on the height of the window opening.
Frames installed with independent structural mullions typically involve the attachment of the mullion to both the
receptor and the subsill.
Independent mullions are often required to support the structural load imposed on the jambs of the window
frames. The structural mullions carry the load to the extreme top and bottom, which in turn distributes the load to
anchor clips within the subsill and receptor.
Check the project shop drawings to determine the design intent and mullion type for the job application. Each job
is different. The shop drawings, installation instructions, and job calculations will dictate the requirements for the
application.
PAGE 16-26
Figure 16-30 Variations in Mullion Types
16.3.3.1
Male/Female Frames
If male/female frames are used, the installation of the window frames is typically done in sequence, starting from
one end and working towards the opposing end.
The installation of each window sets up the position for the next window. This makes it very important to keep the
frames in the proper position so that when the opposing jamb is reached, there is enough clearance to get the last
window in place.
Use the following guidelines when installing male/female window combinations:
1. Check the first window frame to determine if the male/female jamb requires gaskets. If the gasket is not
already applied, install it now.
•
Make sure to insert enough of the gasket (crowd-in-place) to allow for shrinkage and still provide the
necessary coverage.
•
When required, back-seal between the male and female frame halves to create an air/water seal (see
Figure 16-31).
PAGE 16-27
Figure 16-31 Installing Male/Female Frames
2. Set the window into position in the subsill, and then rotate the head toward the exterior pushing it against the
receptor.
3. Move the window horizontally until it nests with the jamb receptor. Don’t push it too far as that may cause
damage to the end dams.
•
Check the horizontal dimension and make sure the window is in the proper position before proceeding.
•
Put pressure on the bottom of the window to make sure it is seated as far as possible into the sill.
•
Once the first window is installed, apply any additional anchor clips at the head and sill as directed by the
project shop drawings. This will help keep the frame from moving or shifting out of position.
•
Attach the clips and/or fasteners recommended by the manufacturer for this application.
4. Apply temporary receptor clips in place along the head and/or jamb to secure the window into position until all
the windows are installed in the opening.
•
Do not leave the temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to carry the full load.
5. Bring the next window over to the opening. Check the designed overlap, and position the window into the
subsill so it will just clear the window frame installed previously.
•
Again, if the window frame requires a back-bead of sealant, apply it prior to setting the window in position.
6. After setting the next window in place, slide frame horizontally until it mates with the male/female frame of the
window set previously.
•
The frame may need to be raised slightly to reduce interference or drag within the subsill.
•
Check to ensure that the frames are properly aligned; then push the frame horizontally until the
male/female intersect with one another.
•
From the interior, check the fit. Make sure the frames mate together according to the shop drawings.
•
Some male/female combinations are designed to allow for expansion and contraction. Check the
drawings and be sure to leave the appropriate joint width.
PAGE 16-28
7. Continue the installation process, setting each window in place, applying anchor clips as required until the last
window in the opening is reached.
8. The last window in a run is usually the trickiest. Check the opening clearance to ensure there is enough room
between the last window frame and the jamb receptor (see Figure 16-32).
Figure 16-32 Setting the Last Unit in a Ribbon
•
In most cases, the clearance allowed for the last window will be enough to get it in place without
interference with the jamb receptor.
•
In cases where there is slight interference, it might be necessary to raise the last window frame high
enough to clear the subsill (holding the window plumb), then rotate the male/female jamb into the
opposing window frame before setting the window down on the subsill.
9. Once the last window frame is set into the proper position, the finished receptor clips can be installed around
the perimeter and the final interior sealing work can be completed.
16.3.3.2
Independent Structural Mullions and Corner Mullions
The installation process for independent structural mullions will vary from job to job. Some applications will require
that the mullions are installed in sequence along with the window frame; however, the mullions are not an integral
part of the window frame.
Other applications will require that each mullion be installed independently of the window frame. This will involve
locating and attaching the mullions within the opening, then installing the window frames.
Regardless of which application is used, the attachment of the independent structural mullion is generally a
requirement. Special anchor clips are designed to carry the load imposed on the mullion from the adjacent
framing (see Figure 16-33).
PAGE 16-29
Figure 16-33 Example Clip for Structural Mullions
Mullions Installed In Sequence
When mullions are installed in sequence (i.e., window frame, then mullion, then window frame), the practice is
very similar to the steps outlined in Section 16.3.3.1, the main difference is that a structural mullion (commonly
one piece) will be installed after each unit.
•
The mullion will typically be a double male or double female so it easily mates with the opposing frames
(see Figure 16-34).
•
Check the project shop drawings or installation instructions to determine if gaskets/sealant or both are to
be applied to the mullion or frame before installation.
•
Determine if anchor clips are required at the frame and/or at the mullion interface with the head receptor
and subsill.
PAGE 16-30
Figure 16-34 Mullions Installed In Sequence
Mullions Installed Before the Window
1. When mullions are installed first (before the windows), a three-piece type mullion is often used. Use the
following guidelines:
•
Make sure the receptor and subsill are properly positioned and anchored.
•
Use the shop drawings to determine the exact location of the mullions (where they are to be positioned in
the opening). Mark the points on the head receptor and subsill for use later.
•
Special reinforcing plates and/or anchor clip receivers may be necessary. In some cases, anchor clip
receivers are pre-inserted into the subsill prior to installation. In other cases, the anchor clip receivers can
be dropped or slipped into the subsill and/or receptor, and are positioned by the installer as needed to
allow for mullion attachment (see Figure 16-35).
Figure 16-35 Reinforcing Plates in Subsill
PAGE 16-31
2. In cases where the clip angle does not lock in place or integrate with a receiver, and attachment of the clip
involves penetration of the subsill, the installer must make sure the clip assembly is properly sealed in place
using the following guidelines:
•
First determine the location of the clip in the subsill. Using the clip, find and drill the appropriate size hole
in the subsill.
•
To seal the clip/fastener assembly, first pump sealant into the hole in the subsill.
•
Apply a bed of sealant on top of the subsill over the entire area where the clip will rest (see Figure 16-36).
(This bed shall be 1/8” thick.)
Figure 16-36 Attaching Through Clip in Subsill
•
Set the clip into position into the sealant, pressing it in place, causing the sealant to compress out and
around the clip perimeter.
•
Install the fastener(s), any washers, and the nuts into the clip, placing sealant between each layer.
•
Encapsulate the entire head of the fastener/washer/nut with sealant to ensure a water tight joint.
•
Tool the sealant at the fastener and around the clip to remove any air pockets and help promote good
adhesion.
•
Randomly check installations with water after the clips are attached and the sealant has had time to
properly cure.
Corner Mullion Installation
When corner mullions are used, they may be the type that are installed in sequence with the window, or installed
before the window frame as outlined in the previous steps. Usually the corner mullion design will be similar to the
rest of the mullions on the project, so the same steps for installation and attachment can typically be used.
However, corner mullions are available in a number of configurations in order to allow for the various corner types
(e.g., 135º, 45º, 90º Inside and Outside Corners, see Figure 16-37).
PAGE 16-32
Figure 16-37 Various Corner Mullions
Finish Mullion and Window Installation
1. Once the anchor clips have been installed into the head receptor and subsill, mullion installation can begin.
•
Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the mullion to the anchor clip.
•
Check for slots in the clip at the head condition. Slots are designed to hold the frame in place, yet allow
for expansion/contraction and building movement. If slots are present, it’s best to locate the fasteners in
the center of the vertical slot.
•
Make sure the fastener heads and the anchor clip will not cause interference with the installation of the
window frame later.
•
Apply a bead of sealant at any metal-to-metal joints where the mullion will interface with the subsill or
receptor (see Figure 16-38). Check the project drawings for seal locations.
•
After setting the mullions in place, tool the sealant on both the inboard and outboard side. Clean off any
excess sealant that will show on the exposed finish.
•
It’s a good idea to dry fit a frame into place between two opposing mullions to ensure it will fit properly
prior to attaching the remaining mullions in place.
•
Check the location of each mullion as the installation progresses. Make sure there will be enough room
for the last mullion and frame in the opening so that there will not be an interference problem.
•
Check each installation to ensure that the mullion is plumb and leaves a square opening to receive the
next window (see Figure 16-39).
PAGE 16-33
Figure 16-38 Application of Sealant for Mullion
Figure 16-39 Checking Opening for Plumb/Square
2. Once the mullions are secured in place and the opening is given a final check to ensure a good fit, the
installation of the window frames can begin (see Figure 16-40).
•
Before setting the window frame in place, check to see if a bead of sealant is required in the subsill or
receptor. Check the shop drawings and apply sealant as required (see Figure 16-23).
PAGE 16-34
Figure 16-40 Installing Windows between Mullions
3. Insert each window into the opening left by the mullions. Center the window between the mullions and set the
window frame in place. Also refer to Section 16.2.5 for typical instructions involving window frame installation.
•
Never leave a frame unsecured in the opening. Use short temporary clips (pressure plates) to secure the
frame in place until continuous clips can be applied.
•
Do not leave the temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to carry the full load.
•
Always use the pressure plate fasteners recommended by the manufacturer – never substitute.
•
When applying continuous pressure plates, make sure to leave enough clearance to apply the receptor
clips.
•
Once the continuous pressure plates and receptor clips are applied, the finished covers can be snapped
on (see Figure 16-41).
Figure 16-41 Application of Pressure Plates and Covers
PAGE 16-35
4. After all of the window frames are secured in place, complete the installation by applying any additional
sealant/insulation as required for this project. See Section 16.9 and 16.10 for information relative to finishing
the interior and exterior.
16.4
Vertical Stack Window Installations With A
Receptor System
The installation of vertical stack windows is similar to the instructions outlined in Section 16.3 for horizontal
ribbons; however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary.
Two things must be considered when installing windows in vertical stacks using receptor system. First is the
preparation and installation of the receptors, which will often be spliced together in a single opening. The second
is the use of horizontal stack mullions, and the need to properly anchor the mullions between the units to handle
expansion/contraction, dead load and building movement.
16.4.1
Preparation of the Receptor System for Vertical Stack Window Applications
When installing receptors and subsills in vertical stack window applications, the amount of preparation needed will
be based on the height of the opening and whether splicing of the receptors is necessary.
Typically, the width of the opening will be small enough to allow for the installation of a single piece (non-spliced)
subsill. The guidelines outlined in Section 16.2.1 and 16.2.2 are appropriate for the installation of the subsill.
When installing vertical stack windows, follow the procedures outlined below. Omit the splicing instructions if the
openings on the job are small enough to use a single piece of receptor at the jambs.
1. Distribute the materials to the proper opening.
2. Determine what field fabrication is necessary, such as cutting, drilling and applying gaskets as outlined in
Section 16.2.1.
3. In addition to the preparation outlined in Section 16.2.1, splice plates may need to be applied to the receptors
(see Figures 16-28 and 16-29).
•
Splices may be extrusions formed from aluminum sheet, and/or silicone compatible rubberized splice
sleeves.
•
Typically, rigid splice plates will be attached to one end of one extrusion (preferably the upper extrusion)
and allowed to float freely with the opposing end of the mating piece, while flexible splice sleeves are
sealed to each opposing extrusion.
•
First apply any bond breaker tape to the splice as indicated on the drawings. The application of bond
breaker tape is necessary to back up the sealant joint and allow for expansion and contraction while
•
indicated on the project shop drawings or installation instructions.
•
Check the design of the splice and determine if the receptor is designed to simply sit down or nest with
the opposing piece, or if the two pieces are to be slipped together prior to installation. The application will
vary based on the design of the extrusion and the splice.
16.4.2
Installation of the Receptor System in Vertical Stack Window Applications
After preparation of the receptor system and assembly of the splice plates, the receptor system can be installed
into position.
PAGE 16-36
Follow the installation procedures outlined in Section 16.2.2 and the perimeter sealing procedures in Section
16.2.3, and use the following additional instructions:
1. Starting from either the top or the bottom of the opening, install the receptor. The receptor must be carefully
applied to ensure that all materials are properly lined up to allow for window installation later.
•
It is a good idea to use strings or a laser to help keep the position of the receptors in line with the subsill.
Lasers will help keep the accessories straight within the opening.
•
A story pole and laser will also help keep the accessories in line with one another from side to side. This
will ensure that the amount of clearance between the jambs is appropriate for horizontal mullion and
window installation, which will be done later.
2. Check the installation of each piece to ensure it is set plumb, level and square within the opening and in
3. Once all of the pieces are installed in the opening, seal the splice joints.
•
Apply sealant into the joint, then tool it to ensure that all air pockets are removed, and to promote good
adhesion between the opposing ends of the extrusion.
•
Use caution when applying the sealant. Make sure the amount of sealant will not create interference with
the installation of the window later.
Note: Installing too much sealant may cause the window to rest against sealant, causing the window to rack out
of plumb.
4. Prior to installation of the windows, re-check the installation of the accessories and make sure all adjustments
are made prior to the application of the perimeter seal.
5. Apply the perimeter seal as outlined in Section 16.2.3. Re-check all joints to ensure that no voids are left in
the sealant around the perimeter, or between the perimeter seal and the splice joints.
16.4.3
Installation of Windows in Vertical Stack Window Applications
The installation of multiple windows in vertical stack applications can be classified into two basic categories:
frames with stack mullions and/or frames with independent horizontally floating structural mullions. Frames with
horizontal stack mullions are designed to mate (slip) together during installation, and may or may not require
additional anchor clips at the jambs, depending on the height and weight of the window (see Figure 16-42).
Frames incorporating independent horizontally floating structural mullions typically involve the attachment of the
mullion to the receptor with anchor clips. Independent horizontally floating mullions are often required to support
the structural dead load imposed on the mullion from the frame above. This weight is then carried to the jambs
through dead load clips. Solid shimming at the anchor points, and between the receptor and structure, is very
important at these locations.
PAGE 16-37
Figure 16-42 Examples of Horizontal Mullions
Note: The clips are designed to support the load, yet allow for free movement (expansion and contraction) of the
window below. Check the project shop drawings to determine the design intent and mullion type for the job
application. Every job is different, and both the shop drawings and job calculations will dictate the requirements
for each application.
16.4.3.1
Horizontal Stack Mullions
When horizontal stack mullions are used, installation of the windows is done in sequence, starting from the
bottom and working towards the top.
The installation of each window sets up the position for the next window, so it is important to keep the frames in
the proper position. This ensures that there is enough clearance to get the last window in place at the top.
Use the following guidelines when installing horizontal stack mullions in vertical stack window combinations:
1. Check the subsill and make sure it is ready for window installation.
2. Apply sealant into the subsill and receptor as directed by the manufacturer.
3. Set the window into position in the subsill. Rotate the head toward the exterior and push it against the
receptor at the jambs.
4. Move the window horizontally until it nests in the center of the jamb receptor opening. Check the horizontal
clearance, and make sure the window is in the proper position before proceeding.
5. Place pressure on the sill of the window to make sure it is seated into the subsill as far as possible.
6. Use a laser or level to check that the head of the window just installed is level before proceeding. Adjust if
necessary. If the head is not level it may cause the next window installed to be racked in the opening.
7. After installation of the first window, place the stack mullion on top of the frame at the head (see Figure 1643).
•
Check the shop drawings and installation instructions to determine if sealant or a gasket is required.
•
Frequently, a bead of sealant is required between the frame and the stack mullion; apply the sealant as
directed.
•
Apply temporary receptor clips in place along the jamb to secure the window in position until all the
windows are installed in the opening.
•
Do not leave temporary clips in place as they are not designed to carry the full load.
•
PAGE 16-38
Figure 16-43 Install Horizontal Stack Mullion
8. Install the next window down on top of the horizontal stack mullion, pushing the frame against the jamb
receptors.
•
Bring the window over to the opening. Raise the window into the opening and center it between the jambs
before setting it in place.
•
After setting the next window in place, slide frame horizontally until it is centered within the opening.
•
The frame may need to be raised to reduce interference or drag within the horizontal stack mullion.
9. From the interior, check the fit. Make sure the frame(s) is seated properly and mates together according to the
drawings.
10. Continue the installation process, setting each window in place until the last window is to be installed in a
vertical run.
11. The last window in a run is usually the trickiest. Double check the opening clearance to ensure there is
enough room between top of the window frame below and the head receptor (see Figure 16-44).
•
In most cases, the clearance allowed for the last window will be enough to get it in place without
interference with the horizontal stack mullion.
•
In cases where there is slight interference, you may need to pre-apply the stack mullion on the bottom of
the window frame prior to setting it on top of the window below.
PAGE 16-39
Figure 16-44 Installation of the Last Unit
12. Once the last window frame is set into the proper position, the finished receptor clips can be installed around
the perimeter.
16.4.3.2
Independent Horizontally Floating Structural Mullions
The installation process for independent horizontally floating structural mullions is similar to the procedures
outlined in the previous section, but with one critical difference. When installing long runs of vertically stacked
windows, there must be an allowance for expansion and contraction while supporting the weight of the frame.
This is accomplished by using floating mullions, which are supported by dead load clips.
Typically, horizontally floating structural mullions are also installed in sequence, alternating window frame and
mullions one after another. The most important part of the sequence is to attach the dead load clip after the lower
window frame is installed, and just prior to the installation of the horizontal mullion (see Figure 16-45).
PAGE 16-40
Figure 16-45 Installation of the Dead Load Clip
Use the following guidelines for installing window frames and independent horizontally floating structural mullions:
1. First check the opening and make sure the receptor and subsill are properly positioned and anchored.
2. Apply sealant into the subsill and receptor where directed, and install the first window frame into position.
3. Use the shop drawings to determine the exact location of the horizontal mullion (where it is to be positioned).
Mark the points on the jamb receptor using a level to locate both ends.
4. Attach the dead load clip into position within the jamb receptors.
•
In some cases, the attachment of the dead load clip will go through the receptor, directly into the building
condition. This will transfer the load to a structural building element. In other cases, the anchor clip can
simply be attached to the receptor, as long as the load is not too significant for the application.
5. Once dead load clips are installed, the floating horizontal mullion can be positioned in place on top of the clip
and attached (see Figure 16-46).
•
Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the horizontal mullion to the dead load
clip.
•
Check for slots in the clip or mullion. Slots are designed to hold the frame in place, yet allow for horizontal
expansion and contraction due to the width of the mullion. If slots are present, it is best to locate the
fasteners in the center of the slot to allow for this movement.
•
Check each installation to ensure that the horizontal mullions are set level, and that a square opening
remains to receive the next window.
•
window frame later.
•
Check the location of each mullion as the installation progresses. Make sure there will be enough room
for the last mullion and frame in the opening. This will ensure that there will not be an interference
problem later.
PAGE 16-41
Figure 16-46 Installation of Floating Horizontal Mullion
6. Install the next window in place, centering the window between the receptors at the jambs.
•
Never leave a frame unsecured in the opening. Use short temporary receptor clips and/or pressure plates
(when applicable) to secure the frame in place if continuous clips are to be applied later.
•
When applying pressure plates, always use the screws recommended by the manufacturer; never
substitute.
•
Once the continuous clips are applied, the finished covers can be snapped on over the pressure plates.
7. After all of the window frames are secured in place, complete the installation by applying the finished receptor
clips and sealant as directed by the manufacturer.
16.5
Transoms / Transition Mullions and Knee Wall Applications
Special circumstances and conditions frequently appear on jobs. When referring to transitions, there are too many
possible combinations to list in this section, but it is important to define a few of the more common conditions an
installer may experience. Some of the more common conditions involve transoms, transition mullions and knee
wall applications.
Transoms
Transoms typically involve the installation of a window unit (generally fixed) over or under another unit in a
separate master frame. An example of this might be a double horizontal slider with an 18” transom light above.
This is not to say that frames can’t be made with operable and fixed combinations in the same master frame; they
can, but when they are not in the same master frame, they are known as transoms (see Figure 16-47).
Transoms typically involve the application of a horizontal stack mullion, sealant, and a method of attachment
between the two frames. Many window and door transoms are built as combination units in the field before they
are installed. This is often done to facilitate the transportation to the job site without the worry of damage at the
horizontal stack.
PAGE 16-42
The assembly practices used for transom units are very similar to those outlined in Section 16.4.3.1 involving
horizontal stack mullions. The biggest difference is the frequent need for additional fasteners, and reinforcing at
the horizontal stack mullion. However, the manufacturer will typically specify the fastener type and spacing, and
any reinforcement necessary (see Figure 16-48).
Figure 16-47 Example of a Transom Unit
Figure 16-48 Attachment of Horizontal Stack
Proper sealing is a critical element, and must be done such that water penetration is restricted. Any water that
does enter the horizontal stack mullion must be allowed to escape at the exterior joint.
Pay particular attention to the assembly and anchorage requirements of field assembled units, as the structural
requirements are critical to safety and the long-term performance of the assembly. Loads are transposed
PAGE 16-43
differently in these kinds of units, and often require special reinforcing within the assembly, as well as unique
anchoring. The project shop drawings or a set of project calculations will typically define the requirements for a
given application.
Transition Mullions
Transition mullions involve the transition from one frame to another. This could include the transition from a 4”deep door frame section to a 3-1/4” window frame section (see Figure 16-49). Transition mullions may also
involve changes in height in a given opening like at a knee wall condition. An example of this would be where the
window opening goes from a full height window to a window sitting on a knee wall (see Figure 16-50).
Figure 16-49 Transition Mullion Between Frames
Figure 16-50 Transition Mullion at Knee Wall
PAGE 16-44
The installation of a transition mullion is similar to a three-piece structural mullion as outlined in Section 16.3.3.2.
The biggest difference, however, occurs at the sill and head receptor and how they are terminated to
accommodate the difference in frame depth.
For transition mullion applications, use the following installation procedures in addition to those already defined in
Chapter 16.3.3.2:
1. Start by preparing the opening and setting the receptor and subsill.
•
Generally this will require the installation of the subsill first, followed by the jamb and head receptors, then
the transition mullion (see Figure 16-51).
Figure 16-51 Installation Sequence for Knee Wall Applications
2. Prepare the transition mullion for installation. This may require closure channels in knee wall applications
where the mullion abuts the jamb condition.
•
Install the closure channel on the lower half of the mullion. This will act as a back up for the sealant joint
as well as provide stability for the mullion.
•
Seal the channel and attach it in place with fasteners as indicated by the project shop drawings.
•
Anchor the mullion in place, using clip angles and attachment screws at the head and sill condition. Block
with shims and attach through the mullion into the knee wall when possible, to provide extra support (see
Figure 16-52). Seal all fastener penetrations.
PAGE 16-45
Figure 16-52 Special Blocking and Anchoring At Knee Walls
3. Seal the joint between the mullion and the end dam on the subsill at the knee wall intersection (see Figure 1653).
•
First apply a small backer rod into the joint between the mullion and the end dam.
•
Apply sealant into the joint. Tool the sealant creating a wash, which will divert any residual moisture into
the subsill.
Once the transition mullion is in place and the sealant, fasteners and other accessories are applied, the typical
installation practices used for window installation as outlined in Section 16.3.3 may be followed
PAGE 16-46
Figure 16-53 Special Sealing Requirements at Transition Mullions and Knee Walls
16.6
Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and square
Regardless of the installation practice used, all windows and accessories shall be installed plumb, level and
square within the opening.
To check for level and plumb the installer has a couple of very good options. The technique used for years has
been to place a level on the window frame at the head, sill and jambs (see Figure 16-54). Use caution to make
sure that the level is on the frame, not the sash, and that the frame is flat so you are not trying to put a level on an
irregular surface. Lasers can also be used with great accuracy, and are becoming more and more affordable.
The best way to check for square is to measure between the opposing corners (see Figure 16-54). When
checking for square, the measurements taken from corner to corner (on the diagonal) should be within 1/8” of one
another.
Checking for true, or making sure the frame isn’t racked within the opening (see Figure 16-55), is very important
as well. This can be accomplished by using two strings stretched from the opposing corners. By stretching two
strings tightly from corner to corner you can check to see if the strings touch at the center of an opening. If they
just barely touch, the frame is true within the opening; if they interfere with one another or they don’t touch at all,
the frame is racked within the opening.
Whenever the frame is not plumb, level and square within the opening, there is a great chance the window will not
operate properly. This can easily lead to both water penetration and air infiltration, and must be corrected before
proceeding.
PAGE 16-47
Figure 16-54 Check for Plumb, Level and Square
Figure 16-55 Check for True (Racking)
16.7
Final Checking and Adjustment
Make a final check of the installation. Check the sash to ensure they are set square within the frame, and that the
latches are properly aligned and functioning.
Hung Windows
•
Lift the bottom sash until it just clears the sill and check the gap. If the unit is square the gaps between
the frame and the sash will be equal.
•
Shim and attach the frame at the meeting rail, or use jamb adjustment clips to secure frames at the
center.
•
When installing double hung side load sash, be sure to fully engage the sash clips and guides on top of
the sash to ensure proper operation and sash alignment.
PAGE 16-48
•
When re-installing sash in tilt windows, be sure that the tilt triggers are fully engaged into the jambs and
that the pivot bars are completely engaged into the balance shoes.
•
Never allow installation screws to deter the proper operation of the product. Check each sash for proper
operation.
•
Check that the bottom and top sash stops have not fallen off during transportation, or were removed from
the jambs. If they have been removed for any reason, make sure that they are replaced.
Sliders
•
Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb and check the gap. It should be even along the
vertical edge of the sash if the unit is square.
•
If the sash is not square, remove the sash to reduce the weight, and adjust the rollers prior to placing the
sash back into the window frame. Continue to check and adjust until the sash is square in the frame.
•
Make sure that the frame of the operable slider is supported at the locking points so that if the sash is
slammed shut, the frame will resist damage.
Casements
•
If the unit is square the gaps between the frame and the sash will be equal. Adjust the hinge and install
set screws to limit movement. When using butt hinges, always fasten through the hinge into the building
condition. This is especially critical in panning applications where anchorage may be limited. If the set
screw penetrates the window frame, set it in sealant.
All Window Types
•
When the window is plumb, level and square, tighten all screws without distorting the frame. The frame
must be secure; however, it must not be twisted or warped by under- or over-shimming, or by improperly
positioning and over tightening fasteners.
16.8
Finishing the Exterior
The following guidelines are provided in addition to the instructions outlined in the previous sections regarding
finishing the exterior. These instructions relate to the application of a perimeter seal.
Select a backer rod with a diameter approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of thumb:
the rod diameter should be at least 1/8" greater than the joint width.)
•
Insert the backer rod into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. Do not puncture, fold or crease the backer
rod as that could cause emission of gas and bubbling of sealant. Do not apply joint primer directly to the
backer rod.
•
Push the sealant into the joint over the backer rod in a continuous manner. The bead should be an even,
unbroken seal, sufficient to fill the gap between the window unit and the rough opening. Always follow the
manufacturer's instructions. (For detailed information on sealants see Chapter 13, Section 13.5.)
Remember, there are five basic steps for proper joint preparation and sealant application for windows and doors:
1. CLEAN – Joint surfaces must be clean, dry, dust free and frost free.
2. PRIME – If required, primer is applied to the clean surface(s).
3. PACK – Backer rod or bond breaker as required.
4. SHOOT – Sealant is applied by "pushing the bead" into the joint cavity.
PAGE 16-49
5. TOOL – Dry tooling techniques are used to strike a flush joint and make certain the sealant has the proper
configuration and fully contacts the joint walls.
16.8.1
Allowance for Moisture Escape
Most windows are manufactured with weep holes to allow moisture to escape. The installer shall avoid covering
these weep holes with sealant, paint, or any other obstructive material. Remove any construction debris from the
drainage path to ensure proper drainage.
16.9
Finishing the Interior
16.9.1
Cavity Insulation
Whenever possible, place insulation in the cavity between the new window unit and the building components, or
between the receptor and the building components. This will help reduce air infiltration and thermal conductivity.
Use fiber insulation or low pressure foam (see Chapter 13, Section 13.6). Follow the manufacturer's guidelines.
Exception: Insulation is not required in small openings if they can be completely filled with sealant (see Chapter
13, Section 13.5 for sealant information).
16.9.2
Apply Backer Rod (Interior)
Like the exterior, backer rod should be placed over cavity insulation on the interior side of the window to control
sealant width and depth.
16.9.3
Apply Sealant (Interior)
On the interior of the window where exposed joints occur, place sealant over the backer rod in a continuous
manner. The sealant bead shall be even, unbroken and fill the gap between the window unit and the rough
opening. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section 13.5.
16.9.4
Trim or Drywall Returns
Buildings often involve cavities within the wall system. These cavities may introduce air at the joint between the
innermost surface of the window and the building condition. This air must be controlled in order to help reduce air
infiltration and reduce energy consumption.
If there are no open-air passages, the blockage of air becomes secondary, and the interior seal between the
drywall and the window frame becomes a cosmetic joint.
If the dry wall is intended to be a component of the air barrier system, the drywall J-channel shall be sealed to the
window (see Figure 16-56). This may or may not be a part of the installer's contract.
1.
The responsible party shall coordinate the installation of the drywall and the J-Channel when abutting
against the window/accessory. Do not attach J-Channels to the window assembly or receptor unless
otherwise approved by the window manufacturer.
2.
It is preferable that a 1/4” wide joint be left to allow for movement of the window due to wind load and/or live
load movement. If a properly sized joint is not left, cracking of the drywall may occur, or the sealant may tear,
requiring future maintenance.
3.
If the window is installed toward the outside of the wall assembly, a drywall J-channel return shall be
installed in the recess, and the joint between the face of the window frame and the drywall J-channel shall be
sealed.
PAGE 16-50
Figure 16-56 Trim and Drywall Returns
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
______________
PAGE 16-51
Table of Contents
17.1
Expansion and Contraction ....................................................................................... 1
17.1.1
Installing Windows with Mullions/Expansion Joints............................................. 1
17.1.2
Structural Limitations .......................................................................................... 2
17.1.3
Allowance for Expansion and Contraction .......................................................... 2
17.1.4
Safety Precautions.............................................................................................. 3
17.2
Building Movement .................................................................................................... 4
17.2.1
Dead Load Movement ........................................................................................ 4
17.2.2
Live Load Movement .......................................................................................... 6
17.2.3
Seismic Movement ............................................................................................. 7
17.2.4 Inter-story Drift ......................................................................................................... 8
17.2.5
Putting It All Together ......................................................................................... 9
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 17-I
17.0 Expansion/Contraction and Building Movement
Allowing for expansion/contraction and building movement can present complex problems involving a number of
issues. Installers need to be aware of the different causes for movement as well as how to plan for these
movements when installing commercial windows and doors.
Section 17.1 addresses expansion and contraction of various materials due to temperature differences a product
may experience in the field. The impact of this temperature variation will vary, based on the coefficient of thermal
expansion of the materials being used.
Section 17.2 addresses live load, dead load, seismic movement and inter-story drift within the building. We will
explore what causes these types of movement and how to allow for them when installing commercial products.
17.1
Expansion and Contraction
Regardless of the type of product or the materials used, thermal expansion and contraction will occur. The
amount of movement that can be expected will be based on the length of a given piece of material, the coefficient
of thermal expansion, and the degree of temperature change it experiences.
One of the most important situations where expansion and contraction should be considered involves windows
that are installed in horizontal ribbons or vertically stacked. This may involve windows that are placed side by side
or stacked on top of one another, or both. Variations can include any combination of operable windows and fixed
windows used together. The assembly and installation of combination windows are discussed below.
17.1.1
Installing Windows with Mullions/Expansion Joints
Installers often mull units together in long runs, usually referred to as ribbon windows. This is usually done in the
field because if they were to be assembled in the factory, the units would be too large to ship and handle.
Products are usually assembled using male/female frames or supplementary profiles, independent structural
mullions or horizontal stack mullions
Male/female mullions (see Figure 17-1a) that are integral to the frame of the unit are used to "mull" frames
together side by side. Supplementary profiles (see Figure 17-1b) in a male/female configuration snapped onto the
adjacent frames perform the same function. Independent structural mullions (see Figure 17-2) are independent of
the master frame, yet are still used to "mull" the frames together in an opening. Horizontal stack mullions, or "H"
mullions, are used to stack one unit on top of another (see Figure 17-3).
Regardless of the mullion type used, special installation and sealing requirements are generally expected to
protect against water and air infiltration.
Always check the manufacturer's shop drawings for special requirements pertaining to attachment of the
mullions/framing, splice locations and special sealing/installation techniques.
Figure 17-1a Male/Female Frame Mullions
PAGE 17-1
Figure 17-1b Supplementary Profiles Male/Female
Figure 17-2 Independent Structural Mullions
Figure 17-3 Horizontal Stack Mullion
17.1.2
Structural Limitations
There are structural limitations associated with combination windows, and they must never be assembled in
openings that exceed the manufacturer's recommendations.
To avoid problems, consult the manufacturer before starting each job. A professional engineering staff is usually
available to assist in making the proper decisions regarding the structural limitations of their products.
17.1.3
Allowance for Expansion and Contraction
Always consider and allow for thermal expansion and contraction. The materials used, the variations in
temperature, and the rate of expansion and contraction can vary greatly (see Table 17-1). Windows subject to
PAGE 17-2
large amounts of movement can often result in loss of adhesion and sealant failure. Buckling and structural failure
is also possible in extreme cases.
Whenever the amount of expansion and contraction exceeds the recommended maximum joint movement or the
allowable clearance, consider dividing the units into smaller rough openings. Think about separating the units with
framing components, as opposed to stacking units on top of one another or mulling units.
As shown in Table 17-1, depending on the material, windows exceeding 16 feet in height could result in thermal
movement of up to 7/8" for Rigid PVC. This could cause excessive stress on the fasteners or the window
materials if the appropriate clearance is not provided.
Expansion and contraction rates shown in the table are based on the total amount of movement anticipated from
a specific length of material, based on a specific range in temperature. As an example, an aluminum extrusion
measuring 96" in length will typically move a total of 1/8" based on a temperature change of 100º F. As the type of
material, the material length or temperature range increases or decreases, so does the anticipated amount of
movement.
Manufacturers provide accessories that allow for movement, but they should be consulted regarding their
applications.
The color of the material and the product's exposure to sunlight will also have an effect on the amount of
movement, since darker materials absorb more heat from the sun's rays. This is important to consider when
installing products.
APPROXIMATE THERMAL MOVEMENT FOR COMMON MATERIALS
(Based on a 100°F Temperature Change Using an 8' Section of Material)
MATERIAL
RANGE OF MOVEMENT
DECIMAL
FRACTION
*Rigid PVC
.22" to .44"0.30”
79/32" to 7/16"
Aluminum
.130"
1/8"
Steel
.065"
1/16"
*Wood
.017" to .025"
1/64" to 1/32"
*Glass
Reinforced
.100" to .140"
3/32" to 5/32"
Polyester
*Consult Manufacturer: Amount of movement will vary from these numbers depending on compound or species
used.
Table 17-1 Examples of Thermal Movement
17.1.4
Safety Precautions
When working with multiple units, consider the weight of the assembly. Window and glass door frames can weigh
hundreds of pounds and can be extremely difficult to handle. Always use a sufficient number of people to set the
windows or glass doors in place.
Sometimes it may be more practical to set the units in place one at a time, as opposed to joining them together
prior to installation. Setting units into place individually requires a step-by-step process of setting the first unit,
PAGE 17-3
sealing the mullion in place, then setting the next unit. This process requires careful planning. Chapter 16
addresses this in more detail.
17.2 Building Movement
An installer should be aware of four common types of building movement. They include:
•
Dead load movement
•
Live load movement
•
Seismic movement
•
Interstory drift
Each of these types of movement is independent of each other, yet they must all be considered where the
potential for such movement exists. Frequently, job specifications list the expected movement requirements for a
given building. In turn, the project shop drawings should show how the design of the product/installation would
allow for the movement specified.
17.2.1
Dead Load Movement
Dead load movement is the amount of movement that occurs due to the weight of the building components. This
includes the weight of the floor, the exterior façade, and the weight of the windows themselves. To simplify dead
load, just think of it as the weight of the materials that will not be removed or moved around in the building.
All buildings experience dead load movement, and all buildings are designed to accommodate this movement.
The steel or concrete structure is designed to flex. In other words, floors are designed to deflect based on a
specific amount of dead load per square foot of area. The steel or concrete structure itself is designed to move a
certain amount based on the strength of the structure.
How much the building is allowed to move and where this movement will take place are the questions that must
be asked. Buildings are typically designed on a grid pattern. That is, buildings are based on a vertical and
horizontal structural grid system, known as columns and beams.
As an example, a building may have columns that are spaced 20 feet on center. Between the columns are
beams, which carry the floor load to each column. The design of the beams is based on an expected amount of
movement or deflection (see Figure 17-4).
PAGE 17-4
Figure 17-4 Example of Dead Load Movement
An example of this movement might be where the architect specifies the floor movement as L/360. This means
the amount of allowable movement can be determined by taking the column spacing/length, "L," (the length of the
beam in inches), and dividing it by the allowable deflection criteria (360). The result of this equation is the amount
of movement allowed at the center of the beam.
For an allowable deflection of L/360 between columns spaced at 20 feet on center, the equation would be
240"/360". The results of this formula would be .667" or just about 11/16”. Keep in mind that this movement may
be both plus and minus, meaning that the floor may raise 11/16" between columns or it may drop 11/16",
depending on the spacing and load between columns adjacent to the span in question.
With that in mind, imagine what would happen if windows were installed under the second floor incorporating a
1/4” joint. The results would be that in the middle of the beam, between the two columns, the floor would push
down on the top of the window by over 7/16", thereby destroying the sealant joint and potentially crushing the
window frames.
Design engineers can reduce the amount of movement by designing beams to deflect less, but this costs more in
terms of stronger beams. There is nothing a window manufacturer or an installer can do to avoid dead load
movement. They can only allow for this movement in the design and installation of their products.
To allow for movement, manufacturers offer receptor systems, which float with the floor. The receptor captures
the head of the window, while allowing for this movement without disrupting the sealant joint and/or placing the
weight on top of the window (see Figure 17-5).
PAGE 17-5
Figure 17-5 Using a Receptor to Accommodate Dead Load Movement at the Head
Some buildings require a 1/4" or less movement, while others require 3/4" or more. This is a critical factor when
deciding which receptor system to use and designing the sealant joints around windows.
Always check the project shop drawings and the job specifications for both the design criteria (amount of
movement expected), and direction on how this movement is to be accommodated in the installation of the
window products.
17.2.2
Live Load Movement
Live load movement is similar to dead load with respect to how buildings move, but the loads that cause this
movement come from a different source. In simple terms, live load is the expected movement caused by things
that move, or may be expected to move, over the life of the building.
An example would be furnishings, like a grand piano. Another consideration might be a gathering of people, like in
a hotel where there may often be activities involving hundreds of people on a particular floor (see Figure 17-6).
PAGE 17-6
Figure 17-6 Example of Live Load Movement
While the equation is expressed the same way, the loads are different. The loads are still based on an expected
amount of weight on a per square foot basis.
To understand this, just think about what would happen to the floor if a large weight were placed in the middle of a
span. The floor would deflect (drop) a certain amount, depending on the stiffness of the beam below. This is true
for all buildings; they are meant to move a given amount. Again, the use of receptor systems will allow the window
to remain stationary while the floor above or below moves.
This is not to say that a properly sized sealant joint won’t do the same job, but the combination of dead load and
live load movement on some buildings may be in excess of the capacity of any sealant joint.
17.2.3
Seismic Movement
Seismic movement is all together different from dead load and live load movement. An earthquake causes
seismic movement. Keep in mind that not all buildings are expected to experience this kind of movement, but
when they do, it is expected that the windows and doors will be required to accommodate the movement.
While some movement is expected vertically, most of the movement is horizontal. This can be in the plane of the
window frame (from side to side), or it may be perpendicular to the plane of the window, from inboard to outboard
of the opening. (See Figure 17-7 for examples of seismic movement.)
Allowing for seismic movement can again be accomplished by the use of receptors or expansion joints designed
specifically for this purpose (see Figure 17-8).
In the case of seismic movement, the idea is to allow the frame to move without causing serious glass breakage.
Receptors will allow the frame to move both horizontally and vertically, yet still give a great degree of protection
from glass breakage.
PAGE 17-7
Figure 17-7 Example of Seismic Movement
Figure 17-8 Allowing for Seismic Movement
17.2.4 Inter-story Drift
Inter-story drift is the difference in displacement or movement between a floor and the roof/floor above or the floor
below whenever a building sways. The swaying is most pronounced during an earthquake but could occur from
high winds or live and dead loads as described earlier in this manual. Since inter-story drift is defined in terms of a
single story, in a multi-story building this term applies to a single story within the building frame. The differential
movement between the floors, when the building sways, must be accounted for in the building design (including
PAGE 17-8
use of fenestration products). For example, a 10 foot story height that has a 0.10 story drift will experience a
differential movement between the floors of 1 foot.
Whatever the anticipated movement is must be addressed when designing for windows and doors. The inter-story
drift can be transferred to the frames resulting in racking from side to side. This could result in a number of
problems ranging from windows not opening to catastrophic failure. Also, some problems are so minor as to be
overlooked. These include rotation of glass within the frame or tears in perimeter seals. The impact of the
movement on windows or doors can be minimized or completely eliminated through proper design of the opening
and connections
The greater the drift, the greater the likelihood of damage. Typically, inter-story drift values larger than 0.025
indicate damage could be serious enough to threaten human safety. Values larger than 0.06 point to severe
damage, while values of 0.10 or larger mean probable building collapse.
17.2.5
Putting It All Together
It is safe to say that receptors can be designed to accommodate some or all of the movement indicated in the
previous sections. Putting all of these factors together is the responsibility of the design professional; yet it is the
installer's responsibility to recognize why receptors and special anchor clips (with vertical movement slots) are
used on a given project, that allows these materials to work as intended.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
PAGE 17-9
Table of Contents
18.1
Specially Shaped Window Construction .....................................................................................................1
18.2
Modifications to Standard Installation Instructions .....................................................................................2
18.3
Allowing for Additional Attachment Where Needed ....................................................................................3
18.4
Proper Shimming Techniques ....................................................................................................................3
18.5
Windows With Eyebrows ............................................................................................................................4
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 18-I
18.0 Specially Shaped Window Installation
Many manufacturers offer specially shaped window products and accessories to complement their standard
product offering (see Figure 18-1). These windows can add variety and beauty to any project. Specially shaped
windows, however, usually require more attention to detail. Some of the special considerations may include
preparation of the opening, panning and trim application, and special installation techniques. This chapter
addresses some of the more common requirements.
Figure 18-1 Specially Shaped Window Examples
18.1
Specially Shaped Window Construction
Specially shaped windows can be ordered on a custom basis in almost any shape and size. Circular, oval, gothic
style, elliptical, half round, quarter round, hexagon, octagon, triangular and any number of other shapes are
possible.
Framing for these windows is commonly fabricated and assembled by the manufacturer. In retrofit applications,
curved sections are usually custom made by the manufacturer using templates made in the field by the customer
during the field measuring process. Special shapes for new construction are typically made from templates based
on a set of architectural drawings.
Regardless of whether the windows are used for new construction or retrofit, there are limitations to what a
manufacturer can do when fabricating the window. For this reason, some windows will be fixed while others may
be operable.
PAGE 18-1
18.2
Modifications to Standard Installation Instructions
The installation methods outlined in Chapters 15 and 16 for standard products are applicable to specially shaped
windows. However, the diagonal or curved components are generally the conditions that require special attention
(see Figure 18-2).
Figure 18-2 Modifications for Curved Windows
In cases where panning and trim are used, these components may also be custom fabricated to either wrap
around the window frame, or be preset in the opening.
Always consult with the manufacturer regarding the configuration of the opening and the plans for installation.
Manufacturers can assist in designing the panning and trim configuration to allow for proper installation.
As an example, a window with an arched top may be easier and more economical to manufacturer with the jambs
running through as opposed to stopping at the spring line (see Figure 18-3). The manufacturer can help make this
determination based on information gathered from the field. Always place information supplied by the
manufacturer or concerning the framing on the field measurement sheet or exact size form.
Figure 18-3 Determining Fabrication Requirements
PAGE 18-2
Because of the nature and complexity of curved shapes, panning and trim will usually require a little extra care.
Depending on the construction tolerances of the existing building, curved openings are typically not exact and not
symmetrical; therefore, more attention to detail will be required when trimming and fitting the panning into the
opening.
Regardless of the type or shape of window, the installation methods for the anchors, attachment clips, and trim
will usually remain the same. Any special conditions requiring custom applications will typically be depicted on the
project shop drawings. If the shop drawings do not depict a condition evident on the project, consult the
manufacturer for further instructions.
18.3
Allowing for Additional Attachment Where Needed
Probably the most important thing to consider when installing a window in a specially shaped opening is to make
sure that structural support is provided. All window openings shall provide adequate anchorage around the entire
perimeter.
Although it may not be the installer's responsibility to build the opening, the installer should be able to recognize
when additional support/attachment is needed, and make a determination as to the proper means of anchorage.
In arched or circle top applications, trim is commonly provided on the interior for anchorage (see Figure 18-4).
Without the trim, the attachment of the new window frame to the building condition would pose some problems.
Figure 18-4 Attachment of Windows in Specially Shaped Openings
Specially shaped windows and glass doors may require fastener spacing which deviates from the manufacturer’s
typical fastener spacing for more standard products. If this information is not included on the project shop
drawings, consult the manufacturer for fastener locations.
18.4
Proper Shimming Techniques
Another important consideration when installing specially shaped windows is the shimming techniques used.
Curved windows and diagonal windows always present special problems, as shims cannot always be placed
along the entire length. It is important to shim the windows within the opening in such a way as to distribute the
load properly. Never place shims where all of the weight of the window frame will be applied over one point.
PAGE 18-3
The examples shown (see Figure 18-5) indicated shimming methods used to help distribute the weight of the
frame to more than one point. This procedure is common to all windows that are made with curved or sloping sill
conditions.
Figure 18-5 Shimming for Specially Windows
Always follow the manufacturer's shop drawings and instructions, and remember:
•
Shims placed on the diagonal may cause the window to shift. Place shims at the sill and at both opposing
jambs to prevent shifting (see Figure 18-5).
•
Never place a shim where a point load will be applied at the tip or mitered end of a product. Move the shim to
where a larger bearing-surface area can support the weight of the window.
•
Place shims at fastener locations, using the fastener to penetrate and hold the shim in position. Use caution
when applying shims. Do not distort the frame or cause it to rotate.
See Chapter 13, Section 13.2, for details on shimming.
18.5 Windows With Eyebrows
Windows involving eyebrows generally require the addition of a fixed panel along the head (see Figure 18-6). This
will depend on whether the intent is to replicate the existing window or not. In most cases, the window being
reinstalled into the existing opening will replicate the old window, therefore special design and installation
techniques will be required.
PAGE 18-4
Figure 18-6 Window with Eyebrows
In retrofit applications, the eyebrow portion of the frame will be made up of the same contoured panning shape
used at the jamb. A panel (usually backed up by insulation) will run from the top of the rectangular portion of the
window frame to the head or curved section. Typically, the manufacturer will fabricate the window, and apply the
panel and panning based on a set of field measurements and templates taken during the field measurement
process.
The installation process will involve removing the eyebrow portion of the existing frame prior to installation of the
new window. Once the existing materials are removed, the installation process may begin involving pre-fitting the
window into place and trimming to ensure a good fit.
After the window is set in place, the normal installation procedures outlined earlier will be applicable.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 18-5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________
PAGE 18-6
Table of Contents
19.1
Replacement Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation ......................................................................1
19.1.1
Door Installation without Accessories .................................................................................................2
19.1.2
19.1.3
Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation....................................................................................5
19.1.4
Installation of the Door Assembly .......................................................................................................8
19.1.5
Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges ....................................................................................................11
19.1.6
Installation of Door Panels (For Sliding Glass Doors) .....................................................................12
19.1.7 Application of the Perimeter Seal ..........................................................................................................13
19.2
Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and Square ..............................................................................14
19.3
Finishing the Exterior ................................................................................................................................16
19.3.1
19.4
Allowance for Moisture Escape.........................................................................................................17
Finishing the Interior .................................................................................................................................17
19.4.1
Cavity Insulation ................................................................................................................................17
19.4.2
Apply Backer Rod (Interior) ...............................................................................................................17
19.4.3
Apply Sealant (Interior) .....................................................................................................................17
19.4.4
Application of Trim Covers ................................................................................................................17
19.4.5
Trim or Drywall Returns ....................................................................................................................18
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 19-I
19.0 Hinged And Sliding Glass Door Installation (Replacement)
The installation of replacement doors in commercial construction involves “jumping over” the existing frame. This
chapter contains guidelines for installing exterior hinged and sliding glass doors in replacement applications.
Although the installation process for hinged doors is similar to the process for sliding glass doors, there are some
minor variations. Where these differences occur, special precautions are noted. This chapter does not address the
installation of commercial storefronts and entrances.
19.1
Replacement Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation
Generally, unequal leg frame doors (see Figure 19-1a) or equal leg frame doors with applied adaptors (see Figure
19-1b) are used in commercial replacement applications. The installation process will vary depending on the type
of opening, which portions of the existing frame remain, and the use of accessories for installation. This chapter
only addresses the installation of doors over existing frames. For other door types, the use of subsills/receptors
and other installation practices, see Chapter 20.
Figure 19-1a Unequal Leg Aluminum Frame Door
PAGE 19-1
Figure 19-1b Equal Leg Vinyl Frame with Applied Adaptor
19.1.1
Door Installation without Accessories
Unequal leg frame doors can be used in buildings that involve a "Surface Barrier System" or a “Membrane
Drainage System” (The importance of locating the WRB for sealant purposes is further explained in Chapter 8,
Section 8.1.3). The installation of this product type often depends on a primary sealant joint between the new door
frame (or flange) and the existing door frame, along with a secondary seal between the new door frame and the
existing building condition, for shedding water away from the building.
In the following sections, the use of the terms door, assembly, frame and unit can be used interchangeably.
19.1.2
Prior to installation, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and the
design intent. After checking the opening:
PAGE 19-2
1.
Check the existing framing materials to determine what materials (if any) are to be removed and which
remain, ensuring the end product will match the design intent.
2.
Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and sealant joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if
it is plumb, level and square.
3.
Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the door
assembly.
4. Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition.
•
If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment at the head will not penetrate the flashing (see Figure
19-2).
•
If flashing is present, determine where the door will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is
inboard of the flashing, so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter sealant joint.
Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors, and the condition is not
masonry but an existing steel frame, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application. Consult the
manufacturer for selection of the proper fastener.
6. Determine where the door will set in the opening, and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant joint
(see Figure 19-3).
•
Since the existing frame typically remains, the existing frame will dictate where the new door frame can be
placed within the opening.
PAGE 19-3
•
In some cases, the existing frame will be removed at the sill condition (see Figure 19-4) and a sealant joint
will be positioned between the new frame and the existing condition. In other cases, the existing door
frame will remain (see Figure 19-5), and a sealant joint will be applied between the new door frame and
the existing frame. Make a determination as to where the sealant joints will occur based on the conditions
for each particular job.
PAGE 19-4
Figure 19-4 Sealant Joint with Existing Condition
Figure 19-5 Sealant Joint with Existing Frame
19.1.3
Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation
Once the opening has been inspected and is ready for door installation, the door assembly needs to be prepared.
This includes unpacking the door and making sure it’s ready for installation. Hinged door panels are typically prehung on the frame, and may require extra manpower to properly and safely lift the units into position. Sliding glass
doors may need to be assembled in the field.
PAGE 19-5
1. Apply corner gaskets, weather-stripping and back-seal as directed by the manufacturer.
2. Attachment of the door
A. If anchor clips are to be used for attachment of the door, it may be appropriate to install them prior to
door installation (see Figure 19-6a).
•
•
Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the anchor clips to the door assembly.
Figure 19-6 Application Anchor Clips
B. If anchor straps are to be used for attachment of the door frame, it may be appropriate to install straps
prior to door installation (see Figure 19-6b)
PAGE 19-6
Figure 19-6b Application of Anchor Straps
3. If the frame requires the application of an extended flange, the manufacturer may require that it be applied
before installation (see Figure 19-7). Check the manufacturer's installation details for more information and
apply sealant as required to ensure a water tight joint.
PAGE 19-7
Figure 19-7 Application of Extended Flange
It is recommended that door sills always be field checked for water penetration (see Chapter 7.5) prior to
installation, ensuring that the sill is water tight before the door is set and anchored into position.
4. Whenever possible, dry fit the door assembly into the opening to verify the fit. Make sure to allow for a sealant
joint around the entire perimeter. This will require that the installer determine the amount of shimming
necessary to allow for a consistent perimeter joint of adequate width.
5. Apply any other accessories like closure channels, perimeter caulk returns and/or reinforcement channels
around the perimeter of the door frame, and any hardware or stainless steel sill tracks as required on the
specific job.
19.1.4
Installation of the Door Assembly
Install the door assembly (the entire unit consisting of the pre-hung door leaf and frame for hinged doors, or just
the frame assembly for sliding glass doors) using the following steps:
condition prior to installation of the door assembly.
2. Set the door frame in place on top of the shims at the sill. Shims are to be located under any anchor clips, or
at fastener locations if they occur within the door frame (see Figure 19-8).
PAGE 19-8
Figure 19-8 Installation of the Door Assembly
3. Center the door assembly within the opening, allowing for a consistent joint width around the entire perimeter.
4. Place a level on the door sill to verify that the sill is level. Adjust the shims as needed to ensure a level
condition.
5. Some trimming of the applied flange may be required to allow for a good fit. If trimming is necessary, remove
the door, make the modifications, and check the fit again (see Figure 19-9). If the applied flange is adjustable
(see Figure 19-10), adjustments may be possible both before and after the installation of the frame.
Figure 19-9 Modification of Flange for Fit
PAGE 19-9
Figure 19-10 Adjustment of Flange for Fit
6. Once the door assembly is positioned in the opening, attach the frame to temporarily secure it in place. Apply
shims as needed at the head directly in line with the anchor clips. Attach the fasteners just tight enough to
secure the assembly in position, yet allowing for adjustment in the next step.
7. Check the head, sill and jambs with a level again to make sure the assembly is setting plumb, level and
square within the opening. Measure across the diagonals to determine if the door assembly is square. If the
assembly is not square, make adjustments until it is.
8. Add shims and fasteners as required at the remaining anchor points. Add anchors directly at the lock and
hinge locations (see Figures 19-11a and 19-11b), in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Be sure to fully block behind locking points and hinges to help carry any loads directly to the
condition.
PAGE 19-10
Figure 19-11a Attachment at Hinge/Lock Locations
Figure 19-11b Attachment at Hinge Location (Vinyl Door)
9. Tighten up each fastener around the perimeter until you reach a plumb, level and square installation. Be
careful not to over tighten the fasteners in such a way that the frame is distorted.
19.1.5
Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges
1. For hinge doors with butt hinges, complete the installation using the following steps:
•
Remove one screw from each of the hinges along the jamb side of the frame (see Figure 19-11).
•
Apply a new screw of an appropriate length (as may be specified per code) through each hinge directly
into the existing frame. This will help transfer the weight of the door directly to the structure.
PAGE 19-11
•
Close the door and check the fit between the locking jamb and the door edge. Check the reveal around
the door perimeter. If the reveal is equal the fit is good. If not, adjust according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. For hinge doors with flag hinges, an appropriate screw needs to be secure the frame at each hinge location
19.1.6
Installation of Door Panels
(For Sliding Glass Doors)
After installation of the door assembly, the door panels (fixed or operable) can be installed.
1. Install sliding door panels starting with the outboard panel (generally the fixed panel). To install the panel, use
the following steps:
•
Raise the panel up and rotate the top out slightly towards the exterior. Insert the top of the door panel into
the exterior track in the head (see Figure 19-12).
Note: The location of the operable panel(s) on sliding glass doors may be on the inboard or outboard side,
depending on the manufacturer. Always check the manufacturer's installation instructions for clarification and
alternate these steps accordingly.
Figure 19-12 Installing the Fixed Door Panel
•
Rotate the bottom of the panel out toward the exterior, placing it over the exterior sill track. Lower the door
panel into position on the sill track.
•
Shift the fixed panel over to the fixed jamb, but don’t attach it until after the operable panel has been
installed and all adjustments have been made. After the operable panel is installed in the next step, lock
the operable panel and then shift the fixed panel into place, checking the interlock for proper overlap. Recheck the reveal between fixed panel and fixed jamb to make sure the door is square in opening and
proper overlaps are maintained.
3. Install the inboard panel (generally operable) using the following steps:
PAGE 19-12
•
Raise the panel up and position the panel off-center such that the operable interlocking rail clears the fixed
panel interlock.
•
Insert the top of the door panel into the interior track at the head (see Figure 19-13). Rotate the bottom of
the panel out toward the fixed panel, and lower the panel into position setting the bottom on the sliding
door track.
Figure 19-13 Installing the Operable Door Panel
•
Check the operable panel to ensure that it operates properly, and that the reveal is equal between the
operable door panel and frame. Turn adjustment screws on the roller assembly to adjust the height of the
panel following the manufacturer’s instructions.
•
Apply any door stops, anti-lift devices and/or air stops that are provided to restrict door movement and air
flow.
•
Once all panels are fully adjusted, the final attachment of the fixed sash to the frame can be completed.
•
Attach the fixed panel using the retainer clips and screws provided by the manufacturer. After final
assembly, cover over the exposed clip with any remaining trim.
19.1.7 Application of the Perimeter Seal
Once the door assembly is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant
application.
1. Apply the perimeter joint from the exterior side.
2.
Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application.
•
Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the door assembly.
3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the door framing as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
•
Use only the primer recommended for the application
•
PAGE 19-13
•
Do not apply an excessive amount of primer.
4. Apply an appropriate size backer rod (or bond breaker for fillet joints) around the entire perimeter. Use a blunt
probe or roller to install the backer rod (see Figure 19-14).
•
•
•
5. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint.
•
•
6. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good adhesion
7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the door frame. Double check the entire joint, making sure
8. After installation of the sealant joint, recheck the operation of the door panel to ensure proper operation and
contact with the weather stripping.
19.2
Checking Installation for
Plumb, Level and Square
Regardless of the installation practice used, all doors and accessories shall be installed plumb, level and square
within the opening. The following illustrations show how to check the door assembly to ensure it is properly
installed.
For All Door Types
1. Check the door assembly to ensure it is set plumb, level and square in the opening (see Figure 19-15 and 1916) using the following tips:
•
Make sure the door sill is level and not bowed or uneven.
•
Install shims behind the jamb 4" to 6" from the sill and header.
•
Adjust shims until the frame is square (diagonal measurements are within tolerance, based the door size).
PAGE 19-14
•
Plumb the frame and check for true (not racked) by using strings stretched from each corner to the
opposing corner.
Note: If the strings just barely touch, the unit is not racked out of alignment. If the strings are touching, reverse the
strings to determine if the unit is racked.
For All Hinged Door
Open the operable panel(s) and remove any shipping spacers. Adjust the shims, and move the top of one or both
sides of the frame slightly in, out or horizontally, until the following conditions are achieved:
1. The top of each panel is parallel to the frame at the head (the margin is even across the top of the door).
•
The operable panel(s) makes even contact with the weatherstripping.
•
The jambs are within 1/16" of being straight.
•
The door operates properly and it remains stationary in any open position.
2. Install lockset(s) if not already in place.
PAGE 19-15
3. Verify that the jambs are shimmed properly as follows:
•
On each side there should be at least three shims, with shims installed behind each hinge (when hinged at
the jamb).
•
Place shims behind the jamb strike plate.
•
On the top, install at least three shims (within 4" to 6" of each corner, and at the center mullion position),
except when directed not to do so by the manufacturer.
4. Secure the shims at hinge and strike locations with a long screw that penetrates the structural framing.
•
One hole in each hinge may have been left open for this step. If not, remove one standard screw and
install a screw of an appropriate length (sometimes dictated by code) through the hole in the hinge,
directly into the jamb condition.
•
When installing the long screws, take care not to pull the frame out of square.
5. For units with multiple jamb-hinged panels, also shim and secure hinges on the inactive side.
6. Close the panel(s). Then re-check the margins between the panel(s) and the jamb, and between the panels of
a two-panel unit. Adjust the shims as needed to maintain margins that are equal from top to bottom.
•
Make sure panels remain aligned (tops even with each other).
On Two-Panel Hinged Glass Doors
Make sure the following is achieved:
1. Both panels are in the same plane.
2. The top corners of the panel locking stiles are aligned and flush with each other, and the margin between
locking stiles is even from top to bottom.
For Sliding Glass Doors
Open the operable panel and check the fit, adjusting the rollers as needed, until the following is achieved:
1.
Check the interlock to determine if the overlap is the same from top to bottom.
•
Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb, and check the gap. It will be even along the vertical
edge of the interlock if the door panel is square.
•
If the door panel is not square, remove the panel to reduce the weight, and adjust the rollers prior to
placing the panel back into the door frame. Continue to check and adjust until the panel is square in the
frame.
•
Make sure operable sliders are fully blocked and supported at the locking points so that if the sash is
2.
Operate the door panel and check for a smooth operation. If the door does not move freely, check the sill
track for debris, and clean as needed.
19.3
1. Select a backer rod with a diameter approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of
thumb: rod diameter at least 1/8" greater than joint width.)
2. Joint primer shall not be applied to the backer rod.
PAGE 19-16
3. Backer rod should be inserted into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. Do not puncture, fold or crease the
backer rod as that could cause emission of gas and bubbling of the sealant.
4. Push the sealant into the joint over backer rod in a continuous manner.
5. Tool the sealant bead so that it is an even, unbroken seal, sufficient to fill the gap between the door unit and
the rough opening. Always follow manufacturer's instructions. (For detailed information on sealants, see
Chapter 13, Section 13.5.)
Remember, there are five basic steps for proper joint preparation and sealant application for doors:
3. PACK – Install backer rod or bond breaker as required.
configuration and fully contacts the joint walls.
19.3.1
Most doors are manufactured with weep holes to allow moisture to escape. Never cover these weep holes with
sealant, paint or any other obstructive material. Remove any construction debris from the drainage path to ensure
proper drainage.
19.4
19.4.1
Cavity Insulation
Whenever possible, place insulation in the cavity between the new door assembly/receptor and the building
components.
1. Use fiber insulation (fiberglass batt insulation) or low pressure expanding foam (see Chapter 13, Section
13.6.4). Follow the manufacturer's guidelines.
19.4.2
Like the exterior, place backer rod over cavity insulation on the interior side of the door to control sealant width and
depth.
19.4.3
On the interior of the door where an exposed joint occurs (or where required per the contract drawings), place
sealant over the backer rod in a continuous manner. The sealant bead shall be even, unbroken, and fill the gap
between the door unit and the rough opening. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section 13.5.
19.4.4
Application of Trim Covers
Once any insulation and/or sealant have been applied, the finished trim covers can be snapped over the trim clips
that were used to anchor the door in place. Check the manufacturer's instructions to determine which trim cover
runs through to ensure the correct cut size and fit.
PAGE 19-17
19.4.5
interior-most surface of the window and the building condition. This air must be controlled in order to help reduce
air infiltration and energy consumption.
drywall and the door assembly becomes a cosmetic joint.
door assembly (see Figure 19-17). This may or may not be a part of the installer's contract.
1. The responsible party should coordinate the installation of the drywall and the J-channel when abutting against
the door frame/accessory. Do not attach J-channels to the door assembly or receptor unless otherwise
approved by the door manufacturer.
2. It is preferable that a 1/4” wide joint be left to allow for movement of the door assembly due to wind load and/or
live load movement. If a properly sized joint is not left, cracking of the drywall may occur, or the sealant may
tear, requiring future maintenance.
3. If the door assembly is installed toward the outside of the wall assembly, a drywall J-channel return shall be
installed in the recess, and the joint between the face of the door frame and the drywall J-channel shall be
sealed.
PAGE 19-18
Notes:__________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
PAGE 19-19
Table of Contents
20.1
Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation .........................................................................................1
20.1.1
Door Installation without Receptor System .........................................................................................2
20.1.2
20.1.3
Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation....................................................................................5
20.1.4
Installation of the Door Assembly .......................................................................................................8
20.1.5
Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges ....................................................................................................11
20.1.6
Installation of Door Panels (for Sliding Glass Doors) .......................................................................11
20.1.7
Application of the Perimeter Seal......................................................................................................13
20.2
Door Installations With A Receptor System ......................................................................................14
20.2.1
Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation .........................................................14
20.2.2
Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation...........................................................18
20.2.3
Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems ..................................................24
20.2.4
Preparation of the Door Assembly for Installation with Receptor Systems .......................................25
20.2.5
Installation of the Door Assembly in Openings with Receptor Systems ...........................................26
20.3
Multiple Door Installations With Receptor Systems ..........................................................................29
20.3.1
Preparation of the Receptor System for Multiple Door Applications in a Single Opening.................29
20.3.2
Installation of Receptor Systems in Multiple Door Applications ........................................................30
20.3.3
Installation of Doors in Multiple Door Applications ............................................................................31
20.3.3.1 Installation of Independent Structural Mullions .................................................................................31
20.4
Installation of Door Assembly with Transom Panels Above .............................................................37
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 20-I
20.4.1
Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed Prior to Door Installation ............................................................37
20.4.2
Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed After Door Installation................................................................39
20.5
Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and Square ..........................................................................40
20.6
Finishing the Exterior ........................................................................................................................42
20.6.1
Allowance for Moisture Escape.........................................................................................................43
20.7
Finishing the Interior .........................................................................................................................43
20.7.1
Cavity Insulation ................................................................................................................................43
20.7.2
Apply Backer Rod (Interior) ...............................................................................................................43
20.7.3
Apply Sealant (Interior) .....................................................................................................................43
20.7.4
Trim or Drywall Returns ....................................................................................................................43
PAGE 20-II
20.0 Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation (New Construction)
This chapter contains basic guidelines for installing equal leg frame exterior hinged and sliding glass doors in new
construction. Although the installation process for hinged and sliding glass doors is very similar, there are some
minor variations for each. Where these differences occur, special precautions are noted. This chapter does not
address the installation of commercial storefront and entrances.
20.1
Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation
Generally, equal leg frame doors (see Figures 20-1a and 20-1b) are the only classification of frame types used in
both metal and vinyl commercial new construction. The installation process will vary depending on the type of
opening and the use of accessories for installation. This chapter covers door frames that are shipped assembled,
frames that are assembled in the field, and sidelites and transoms that are mulled together in the field.
Figure 20-1a Equal Leg Frame Door
PAGE 20-1
Figure 20-1b Equal Leg Frame Vinyl Door
20.1.1
Door Installation without Receptor System
Equal leg frame doors can be used in buildings that involve a "Surface Barrier System" or a “Membrane Drainage
System” (see Chapter 8, Section 8.1.3). Regardless, the installation of this product type depends on a sealant joint
between the door (or receptor) and the exterior building surface, for shedding water away from the building.
For equal leg frame installations without the use of receptor systems, use the installation procedures in Section
20.1. When installing equal leg frame doors in applications that require receptors and subsills, follow the
installation practices outlined in Section 20.2.
In the following sections, the use of the terms door, assembly, frame and unit can be used interchangeably.
20.1.2
Prior to installation, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and the
design intent. After checking the opening:
1.
Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is
2.
Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the door
assembly.
3.
Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition.
•
If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment at the head will not penetrate the flashing (see Figure
20-2).
PAGE 20-2
•
If flashing is present, determine where the door will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is
inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter sealant joint.
4. Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended and that the
masonry but steel stud, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application. Consult the fastener
manufacturer for selection of the proper fastener.
5. Determine where the door will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant joint
(see Figure 20-3).
PAGE 20-3
•
Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls, will incorporate an air space or cavity which will dictate
where the frame will be placed to ensure proper joint back up.
•
In some cases, mortar is used at the sill as a setting bed in lieu of a sealant bead (see Figure 20-4a and
20-4b). Check the opening to determine whether the sill condition is level and how much mortar needs to
be applied under the door to prepare it for installation. When setting the door assembly in mortar, make
sure to first apply a protective coating of bituminous paint (and/or other suitable material) to the underside
of the sill extrusion.
Note: Setting a door in a bed of mortar is only recommended in recessed sill conditions.
Figure 20-4a Recessed Sill Condition in Aluminum
PAGE 20-4
Figure 20-4b Recessed Sill Condition in Vinyl
•
Depending on the location of the frame relative to the interior conditions, the location of the frame may
require interior trim and/or jamb extensions to finish off the interior.
20.1.3
Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation
Once the opening has been inspected and is ready for door installation, the door assembly needs to be prepared.
This includes unpacking the door and making sure it’s ready for installation. Hinged door panels are typically prehung on the frame and may require extra manpower to properly and safely lift the units into position. Sliding glass
doors may need to be assembled in the field.
1. Apply corner gaskets, fasteners, weatherstripping and back-seal as directed by the manufacturer.
2. If anchor clips or straps are to be used for attachment of the door, it may be appropriate to attach them to the
door prior to installation (see Figure 20-5a and 20-5b).
•
•
Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the anchor clips to the door assembly.
PAGE 20-5
Figure 20-5a Attachment of Anchor Clips to Aluminum Frame
Figure 20-5b Attachment of Anchor Straps to Vinyl Frame
3. Starter sills may also be required under the door to help facilitate anchorage (see Figure 20-6a and 20-6b).
Check the project shop drawings to determine if starter sills are required. Also, refer to Section 20.2 for the
installation of doors with accessories.
PAGE 20-6
Figure 20-6a Application of Starter Sill
Figure 20-6b Application of Starter Sill
PAGE 20-7
4. It is recommended that door sills and subsills always be field checked for water penetration (see Chapter 7.5)
prior to sill installation, ensuring that the sill is water tight before the door is set and anchored into position.
5. Whenever possible, dry fit the door assembly into the opening to verify the fit. Make sure to allow for a sealant
joint around the entire perimeter. This will require that the installer determine the amount of shimming
necessary to allow for a consistent perimeter joint of adequate width.
6. Apply any other accessories like closure channels, perimeter caulk sealant returns, and/or reinforcement
channels around the perimeter of the door frame, and any hardware or stainless steel sill tracks as required on
the specific job.
7. If mortar is used to level the door frame, apply the mortar just prior to installing the frame.
•
Make sure to completely fill the void (see Figure 20-7).
Figure 20-7 Bed of Mortar in Recessed Sill Condition
•
When setting the door assembly in mortar, make sure to first apply a coating of bituminous paint to the
underside of the sill extrusion.
•
Check the height of the sill in the mortar bed to determine it is at the correct height for the door installation
and that it is level.
20.1.4
Installation of the Door Assembly
Install the door assembly (the entire unit consisting of the pre-hung door leaf and frame for hinged doors, or just
the frame assembly for sliding glass doors) using the following steps:
condition prior to installation of the door assembly.
2. Set the door frame in place on top of the shims at the sill. Shims are to be located under any anchor clips, or
at fastener locations if they occur within the door frame (see Figure 20-8).
PAGE 20-8
Figure 20-8 Installation of the Door Assembly
3. When setting the door assembly directly into a bed of mortar, shims will not be used. In this case, apply
pressure to the sill extrusion to seat the assembly. Check the height of the sill in the mortar bed to determine it
is at the correct height for the door installation and that it is level.
4. Center the door assembly within the opening, allowing for a consistent joint width around the entire perimeter.
5. Place a level on the door sill to verify that the sill is level. Adjust the shims as needed to ensure a level
condition.
6. Once the door assembly is positioned in the opening, attach the frame to temporarily secure it in place. Apply
shims as needed at the head directly in line with the anchor clips. Attach the fasteners just tight enough to
secure the assembly in position, yet allow for adjustment in the next step.
7. Check the head, sill and jambs with a level again to make sure the assembly is setting plumb, level and
square within the opening. Measure across the diagonals to determine if the door assembly is square. If the
assembly is not square, make adjustments until it is.
8. Add shims and fasteners as required at the remaining anchor points. Add anchors directly at the lock and
hinge locations (see Figure 20-9a and 20-9b), according to the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Be
sure to fully block behind locking points and hinges to help carry any loads directly to the condition.
PAGE 20-9
Figure 20-9a Attachment at Hinge/Lock Locations
PAGE 20-10
Figure 20-9b Attachment at Hinge/Lock Locations
9. Tighten up each fastener around the perimeter until you reach a plumb, level and square installation. Be
careful not to over tighten the fasteners in such a way that you distort the frame.
20.1.5
Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges
1. For hinge doors with butt hinges, complete the installation using the following steps:
•
Remove one screw from each of the hinges along the jamb side of the frame (see Figure 20-9).
•
Apply a new screw of an appropriate length (as may be specified per code) through each hinge directly
into the building condition. This will help transfer the weight of the door directly to the structure.
•
Close the door and check the fit between the locking jamb and the door edge. Check the reveal around
the door perimeter. If the reveal is equal, the fit is good; if not, adjust attachment screws as needed.
20.1.6
Installation of Door Panels
(for Sliding Glass Doors)
After installation of the door assembly, the door panels (fixed or operable) can be installed.
1. Install sliding door panels starting with the outboard panel (generally, the fixed panel). To install the panel, use
the following steps:
PAGE 20-11
•
Raise the panel up and rotate the top out slightly towards the exterior. Insert the top of the door panel into
the exterior track in the head (see Figure 20-10).
Note: The location of the operable panel(s) on sliding glass doors may be on the inboard or outboard side
depending on the manufacturer. Always check the manufacturer's installation instructions for clarification and
alternate these steps accordingly.
Figure 20-10 Installing the Fixed Door Panel
•
Rotate the bottom of the panel out toward the exterior, placing it over the exterior sill track. Lower the door
panel into position on the sill track.
•
Shift the fixed panel over to the fixed jamb but don’t attach until after the operable panel has been installed
and all adjustments have been made. After the operable panel is installed in the next step, lock the
operable panel and then shift the fixed panel into place checking the interlock for proper overlap. Recheck the reveal between fixed panel and fixed jamb to make sure door is square in opening and proper
overlaps are maintained.
2. Install the inboard panel (generally operable) using the following steps:
•
Raise the panel up and position the panel off-center such that the operable interlocking rail clears the fixed
panel interlock.
•
Insert the top of the door panel into the interior track at the head (see Figure 20-11). Rotate the bottom of
the panel out toward the fixed panel, and lower the panel into position, setting the bottom on the sliding
door track.
PAGE 20-12
Figure 20-11 Installing the Operable Door Panel
•
Check the operable panel to ensure that it operates properly, and that the reveal is equal between the
operable door panel and frame. Turn adjustment screws on the roller assembly to adjust the height of the
panel following the manufacturer’s instructions.
•
Apply any door stops, anti-lift devices and/or air stops that are provided to restrict door movement and air
flow.
•
Once all panels are fully adjusted, the final attachment of the fixed sash to the frame can be completed.
•
Attach the fixed panel using the retainer clips and screws provided by the manufacturer. After final
assembly, cover over the exposed clip with any remaining trim.
20.1.7
Application of the Perimeter Seal
Once the door assembly is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant
application.
1. Apply Seal the perimeter joint from the exterior side working from the balcony or floor.
•
Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the door assembly.
3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the door framing as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
•
•
•
backer rod (see Figure 20-12).
•
•
PAGE 20-13
5. Once the joint is ready, apply the a compatible perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into
the joint.
•
Pushing, as opposed to pulling the sealant ensures that the joint is filled with sealant, and that the amount
•
and create a smooth sealant joint of the proper depth and geometry.
7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the door frame. Double check the entire joint, making sure
8. After installation of the sealant joint, recheck the operation of the door panel to ensure proper operation and
contact with the weather stripping.
20.2
Door Installations With A Receptor System
The installation of equal leg frame doors often incorporates to the use of receptors and subsills. The methods
outlined in the following sections describe the installation of receptors and sub sills prior to the installation of the
door assembly.
20.2.1
Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation
Prior to installation of the door assembly, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings,
specifications and the design intent. The installer shall:
1. Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is
2. Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment.
3. Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition.
•
If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment of the receptor at the head will not penetrate the
flashing.
PAGE 20-14
•
If flashing is present, determine where the receptor will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is
inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard the perimeter joint at the head receptor (see
Figure 20-13).
conditions are suitable for attachment. Manufacturers may supply slots in their framing which are designed to
be structurally adequate for the fastener and anchor loads expected. Do not slot the framing or enlarge holes
or slots provided by the manufacturer without consulting the manufacturer or a licensed professional engineer.
5. Distribute the receptor system to the corresponding openings. Receptor systems are often shipped in bundles
and may be marked to correspond with the opening.
6. Check the receptor/subsill to determine if any field assembly or fabrication is required. Some accessories will
require field cutting, drilling and the application of end dams, gaskets, anchor clips, etc.
•
If cutting is required, check the project shop drawings to ensure a proper fit. As an example, if subsills are
used, the cut size may be dictated by the shop drawings so the door assembly can be installed without
interference.
•
When cutting subsills to length, the installer will be required to apply the end dams after any gaskets have
been applied as indicated in step #7 (see Figure 20-14). In cases where the subsill is cut to length, the end
dams and gaskets may already be applied.
PAGE 20-15
Figure 20-14 Application of End Dams
•
When applying end dams, make sure to clean off the ends of both the subsill and the end dam with
appropriate solvent to ensure a good seal. After applying solvent, immediately dry off the material; do not
allow the solvent to air dry on the material.
Note: It is critical that this step not be overlooked as oil, grease and dirt deposited during the manufacturing
process can have a detrimental effect on the adhesion capability of the sealant.
•
Apply and seal the end dams as directed by the manufacturer. Be sure to seal the joint between the end
dam and the subsill, and then tool the sealant to promote good adhesion and remove air bubbles.
7. Check the receptors and subsill for grooves, which may require the installation of gaskets (see Figure 20-15).
If required, use the following steps before applying end dams:
•
Prior to installing the gaskets, remove the material from the roll and allow it to relax. Don't stretch the
gaskets.
•
Cut the gasket long enough to allow for crowd-in, or compress it so that if it shrinks, it won't be too short.
(Example: Some gaskets are cut 1/4” per foot longer than the extrusion length.) Check with the gasket
and/or window manufacturer to determine cutting requirements.
PAGE 20-16
Figure 20-15 Application of Gaskets
8. Drill the receptor system as indicated on the shop drawings. Make sure to drill the hole sizes and locations
according to the drawings and/or any job calculations.
•
contraction.
•
Note: When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be positioned
in the center of the slot (see Figure 20-16). Check the shop drawings for specific instructions.
Figure 20-16 Attachment of Fasteners through Slots
9.
If anchor clips are to be applied to the receptor or subsill, attach them now in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions (see Figure 20-17). Always use the fasteners specified by the manufacturer.
PAGE 20-17
Figure 20-7 Attach Anchor Clips
10. Determine where the receptor system will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable
sealant joint.
•
Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls, will incorporate an air space or cavity, which will dictate
where the receptor system will be placed to ensure the proper sealant joint back up.
•
Depending on the location of the receptor system relative to the interior conditions, interior trim and/or
jamb extensions may be required to finish off the interior.
20.2.2
Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation
When the opening has been inspected and the receptor system has been properly prepared in accordance with
Section 20.2.1, the installation of the receptor system may begin. In some cases, the subsill will be installed first,
followed by the head and jamb receptor. In other cases, the head and jamb receptor will be installed first, followed
by the subsill.
The job conditions and the design of the subsill/receptor (whether the jamb receptor is designed to be the
termination point for the subsill, or whether the subsill is designed to be the termination point for the jamb receptor)
will be the determining factors in how the junction is accomplished. Regardless of the design for the specific job
condition, the following steps can be altered in sequence to allow for these variations.
1. Start by placing a level at the sill condition. Determine if the sill is level and how much shimming will be
necessary to allow for the proper joint size.
•
Check the shop drawings to determine the amount of shimming necessary to allow for normal field
tolerances, and the proper overlap between the door assembly and the receptor.
•
Depending on the live load and dead load design criteria for the project, the amount of overlap between
the receptor and the door assembly is critical.
PAGE 20-18
•
A story pole will generally be helpful to determine if enough clearance will remain to allow for the
installation of the receptor and the door assembly (see Figure 20-18).
Figure 20-18 Checking the Opening for Proper Fit
•
If the minimum clearance shown on the shop drawings is not enough to allow for proper installation of the
receptor and door assembly, some adjustment in the shim height may be necessary.
2. Set and shim the subsill within the opening. Place a level in the subsill and check to ensure it is level. Adjust
the shims as needed to create a level condition.
Note: For water performance and drainage, it is critical that all subsills be set level because the application of the
receptor and the door frame will follow. If the subsill is not set level, there is a good chance that the receptors and
the door will not be set level.
3. Attach the subsill into position. Make sure to set the subsill straight within the opening. Attach through the
subsill or through anchor clips according to the job specific application.
4. If applying fasteners through the subsill:
•
Make sure to clean the subsill and fastener head/washers/nut prior to the application of the a compatible
sealant in order to promote good contact and adhesion.
•
Be sure to first pump sealant into the hole and on top of the surface the fastener will penetrate.
•
Next, apply the fastener, any washers and the nut as required.
•
Finally, seal over the fastener/nut and washer assembly, making sure to fully encapsulate the assembly.
•
Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good
adhesion and create a smooth sealant joint of the proper depth and geometry.
5. Continue to make adjustments as required, re-checking and verifying that the minimum/maximum overlap
requirements between the door assembly and the receptor system are maintained (see Figure 20-18).
PAGE 20-19
6. Once the subsill is set, apply a sealant bead between the end dam and the building condition. It is often
necessary to apply a backer rod into the joint to control the amount of sealant used (see Figure 20-19). If the
jamb receptor is going to be the termination point for the subsill, skip to Steps #8 & #9, then come back to
Step #7.
Figure 20-19 Sealing the Subsill End Dam to the Jamb Condition
7. Tool the sealant against the jamb condition, creating a wash that will allow any residual water that gets behind
the receptor to drain into the subsill.
•
If the subsill is set after the jamb receptor, seal the joint between the end cap and the jamb receptor,
creating a wash to divert water into the subsill (see Figure 20-20).
Figure 20-20 Sealing the Subsill End Dam to the Jamb Receptor
PAGE 20-20
8. After installation of the subsill, the head receptor can be installed. Install the head receptor directly in line with
the subsill.
•
First, check the specific type of receptor to determine if a foam block or back-up plate will be required to
support the sealant joint at the ends of the receptor where the perimeter joint will occur (see Figure 20-21).
Figure 20-21 Plugging the Ends of the Receptor
•
If a foam block is used, install it in place and seal over the ends to essentially create an end plug.
•
If a back-up plate is used, it may be applied prior to installation of the head receptor, or it may be applied
after the head and jamb receptors are in place. Check the manufacturer's instructions for specific details.
•
Use a laser or level to line up the head receptor with the subsill below.
•
Check the drawings to understand the relationship between where the door head will set within the
receptor, and where the door sill will set within the subsill. The proper relationship will only occur when the
door assembly is plumb within the opening after the accessories are installed (see Figure 20-22).
PAGE 20-21
Figure 20-22 Understanding the Relationship between the Head/Jamb Receptors and Subsill
•
Shim and attach the head receptor to the head condition using the fasteners specified for the condition.
•
Make sure to shim the head receptor so that it is level both along its length and from front to back (not
rolled) within the opening.
•
The installer is encouraged to use a story pole or a piece of the jamb receptor to line up the head with the
sill, and to determine the exact height location of the head receptor.
•
Fasten the head receptor in place by tightening the fasteners snug, yet still allowing for further adjustment
as needed.
•
Make sure the fasteners at the head will not interfere with the installation of the door assembly.
9. Once the head receptor and subsill are in place, the jamb receptors can be installed. If the previous steps
were used, the installation of the jamb receptors will be relatively easy.
•
The jamb receptor should easily fit between the bottom outside leg of the head receptor and the top
outside surface of the subsill, but will depend on the specific application (see Figure 20-23).
PAGE 20-22
Figure 20-23 Installation of Jamb Receptor
•
In cases where extreme movement is expected, a sealant joint may be required between the head and
jamb receptors. In this case, use a back-up splice plate with bond breaker applied to the exterior face to
bridge the gap and back up the joint (see Figure 20-24).
Figure 20-24 Splice between Jamb and Head Receptors at Moving Joints
•
Set the jamb receptor within the opening. Shim and fasten with the appropriate fasteners. Add blocking
behind the receptor at locking points and at hinge points on swing and sliding glass doors. This support
blocking may also be needed at the head condition directly above the meeting rail of a sliding glass door.
•
Re-check the opening to verify that the door will set into a plumb, level and square condition. If
adjustments are needed, make them now.
PAGE 20-23
10.
Insert splice sleeve, bond breaker tape and/or silicone splice sheet as required for joint backup at head/jamb
receptor intersection. Back seal all joints between the head receptor and the jamb receptor, and the jamb
receptor to the subsill. Tool the sealant to ensure good contact and adhesion.
11.
Prior to door installation, check the subsill for any debris. Clean out any debris that will block the weep holes
or keep the subsill from draining.
•
A method of field checking the water integrity of the subsill can be used by the installer to ensure it is
water tight. This simple field test method will reduce the expensive call backs associated with water
penetration at the subsill.
- Use a suitable tape to cover over the weep holes.
- Fill the subsill with water and mark the high water point.
- Leave the water in the subsill for at least fifteen minutes; if no water leakage is evident, the subsill is
considered water tight.
- If leakage occurs, pinpoint the place of escape, drain the water from the subsill, then reseal the point
of leakage when the conditions are dry.
- If leakage was detected after corrective actions, repeat the test to be sure the problem has been
corrected.
•
After checking the subsill for water penetration, make sure to remove the tape so the subsill can drain
freely later.
20.2.3
Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems
Once the receptor system is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant
application.
•
Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the perimeter accessories.
2. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the accessories as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
•
•
•
backer rod.
•
•
4. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint (see
Figure 20-25).
•
•
PAGE 20-24
Figure 20-25 Perimeter Seal Application
6. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the accessories. Double check the entire joint, making sure
20.2.4
Preparation of the Door Assembly for Installation with Receptor Systems
Once the accessories have been installed and sealed to the opening, the installer can prepare for door installation.
See Section 20.1.3 for instructions relating to the preparation of the door for installation.
Some projects will require jamb reinforcement channels in the jambs of the door frames for added strength. Check
the requirements for the job and apply reinforcement channels as directed, making sure they are the right size and
in the right location (see Figure 20-26).
Figure 20-26 Application of Reinforcement Channel
PAGE 20-25
Whenever possible, dry fit the door into the opening to verify the fit. Check the amount of overlap between the
head and jamb receptor and the door frame, making sure it is consistent and according to the design intent. If the
fit is good, the installer can remove the door and proceed with the following steps for door installation.
20.2.5
Installation of the Door Assembly in Openings with Receptor Systems
Install the door assembly using the following steps:
1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can prepare for installation of the
door.
•
In some cases, the installation will require a bead of sealant applied to the upturned leg of the subsill.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
•
In other cases, a gasket is used as the air/water seal between the subsill and the door assembly.
Depending on the design of the subsill, this gasket was either previously applied in the groove, or will be
applied after door installation.
2. The installer may also be required to apply a bead of sealant to the head/jamb receptor prior to the installation
of the door. Check the drawings to determine the design intent, and apply the bead as directed (see Figure 2027).
Figure 20-27 Sealing the Receptor or Subsill
3. The opening is now ready for the door assembly installation. Position the door as close to the opening as
possible. Lift the door assembly and rotate the bottom out while holding the head inboard.
4. Before setting the door in place, try to get the door centered in the opening as much as possible.
•
This is especially critical if sealant was applied at the subsill or receptor, to avoid scraping the sealant off
when moving the door from side to side.
5. Set the door assembly in place, positioning the bottom of the door on top of the subsill.
PAGE 20-26
•
When setting the door assembly in place, use caution that the bottom edge of the frame is not rubbed
against the exterior gasket at the jambs or head receptor. Doing so may pull the gasket out of the gasket
pocket (see Figure 20-28).
Figure 20-28 Verify Gasket is Secure
6. Rotate the head up and push it out toward the exterior until it hits the head receptor.
7. Check the location of the door, making sure it is centered in the opening, allowing for a consistent overlap
around the entire perimeter.
•
Double check the gasket, making sure the gasket has stayed in place and has not dropped down or
become disconnected.
•
If the gasket has become dislodged, remove the door and reinsert the gasket. The gasket will not function
if it is not installed properly.
8. Place a level on the door sill to verify that the sill is level. If the door is not level, remove it and determine why,
then make adjustments as required and reseal the receptor and subsill again prior to reinstallation.
9. Typically, the door assembly is not anchored to the receptor or subsill. This allows the door to float within the
opening, allowing for building movement and product expansion.
•
When working with multiple doors within a single opening, follow the additional instructions in Section
20.3.
•
When doors are required to be attached, it is necessary to apply fully supported blocking and anchors at
the locking points and through each hinge point. (See Figure 20-29 and refer to Sections 20.1.5 and
20.1.6 for instructions.) Always check the manufacturer's shop drawings for specific requirements relative
to the job application.
PAGE 20-27
Figure 20-29 Attachment at Hinge and Lock Points
10.
Once the door assembly is positioned in the opening, temporary receptor clips can be applied to hold the
door in place. Do not leave temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to support the full load.
11.
If temporary receptor clips are not used, or if it is time to complete the installation, apply the finished
receptor clips as follows:
•
Check the jamb receptor to subsill intersection. Prior to applying the jamb receptor clip, apply a bead of
sealant at the space between the edge of the door assembly and the receptor (see Figure 20-30).
Figure 20-30 Application of Sealant at Receptor to Subsill Intersection
•
There will not be a back-up surface for this sealant joint, but a blind seal (applied to the receptor clip
later) will allow the two seals to integrate together.
•
Make sure to install gaskets into the grooves as required. Do not cut the gasket short; cut it long enough
to require crowd-in, or compression of, the excess so that if shrinkage occurs later, there will still be
PAGE 20-28
enough to cover the entire length. (Example: Some gaskets are cut 1/4” extra per foot of extrusion
length.) Consult with the gasket supplier and/or manufacturer for suggested cutting formula.
12.
Apply a heavy bed of sealant to the back of the receptor clip at the sill condition (see Figure 20-30). After
applying the sealant, apply the receptor clip into position. Tool any excess sealant that appears on the
finished surface.
13.
For sliding glass doors, once the door assembly is installed, follow the procedures for installing the door
panels according to Section 20.1.6. Check the installed product to ensure that it operates properly, and that
the reveal is equal between the door panel and frame.
20.3
Multiple Door Installations With Receptor Systems
The installation of multiple doors in a single opening is very similar to the instructions outlined in Section 20.2;
however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary.
There are two significant differences when installing multiple doors in single openings using receptor systems.
First is the preparation and installation of the receptors/subsills, which will often be spliced together in a single
opening. The second difference is the use of mullions and the need to properly anchor the mullions between the
units to handle the structural load.
20.3.1
Preparation of the Receptor System for Multiple Door Applications in a Single Opening
When installing receptors and subsills in multiple door installations, the amount of preparation needed will be
based on the width of the opening and whether splicing is necessary. The governing factor will be the length of the
receptor/subsill, which will often be determined based on the shipping capabilities.
When preparing receptors and subsills for multiple door applications in a single opening, follow the procedures
outlined below. The splicing requirements are common to both receptors and subsills.
1. Distribute the materials to the correct opening.
2. Determine what field fabrication is necessary, such as cutting, drilling and the application of end dams,
gaskets and anchor clips as outlined in Section 20.2.1.
•
contraction.
•
follow the recommended procedures for attachment of the accessory to the substrate.
•
When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be positioned
in the center of the slot (see Figure 20-16).
3. In addition to the preparation outlined in Section 20.2.1, splice plates will need to be applied (see Figure 2031).
•
Splice plates may be extrusions, formed from aluminum sheet or silicone compatible rubberized splice
sleeves.
•
Typically, rigid splice plates will be attached to one end of one extrusion and allowed to float freely with the
opposing end of the mating piece, while flexible splices are sealed to both extrusions.
•
First, apply any bond breaker tape to the splice as indicated on the drawings. The application of bond
breaker tape is necessary to back up the sealant joint and allow for expansion and contraction, while
PAGE 20-29
•
indicated on the shop drawings. Keep in mind, some splice pieces are applied after the extrusions are
installed, as opposed to before.
•
Check the design of the splice and determine if the receptor/subsill is designed to simply sit down, or nest,
with the opposing piece, or if the two pieces are to be slipped together prior to installation. The application
will vary based on the design of the extrusion and the splice.
Figure 20-31 Application of Splice Sleeves
20.3.2
Installation of Receptor Systems in Multiple Door Applications
After preparation of the receptor system and assembly of the splice plates, the receptor system can be installed
into position. Follow the installation procedures outlined in Section 20.2.2 along with the following precautions:
1. Starting from one end of the opening, install the receptor system. The receptor/subsill must be carefully
applied to ensure that all materials are properly lined up to allow for door installation later.
•
It is a good idea to use strings to help locate the position of the receptors and subsill. Setting string will
help keep the receptors and subsills straight within the opening.
•
A story pole and laser or plumb bob will also help keep the receptor and subsill in line with one another
from top to bottom, and ensure that the amount of clearance is correct.
2. Check the installation of each piece to ensure it is set plumb, level and square within the opening, and in
3. Once all of the pieces are installed in the opening, seal the splice joint (see Figure 20-32).
•
Apply sealant over the joint and then tool it to ensure that all air pockets are removed, and to promote
good adhesion between the opposing ends of the extrusion.
•
Use caution when applying the sealant; make sure the amount of sealant will not create interference with
the installation of the door later.
Note: Installing too much sealant may cause the door to rest on top of the sealant, causing the door to sit out of
level.
PAGE 20-30
Figure 20-32 Sealing Splice Joints
4. Prior to installation of the door assembly, re-check the installation of the receptor system and make sure all
adjustments are made prior to the application of the perimeter seal.
5. Apply the perimeter seal as outlined in Section 20.2.3. Re-check all joints to ensure that no voids are left in the
sealant around the perimeter or between the perimeter seal and the splice joints.
20.3.3
Installation of Doors in Multiple Door Applications
The installation of doors in multiple door applications typically requires independent structural mullions.
Independent mullions are often required to support the structural load imposed on the jambs of the door assembly.
Frames incorporating independent structural mullions typically involve the attachment of the mullion to both the
receptor and subsill. The structural mullions carry the load to the extreme top and bottom, which in turn distributes
the load to anchor clips within the subsill and receptor. Check the manufacturer's shop drawings to determine the
design intent and mullion type for the job application. Each job is different and both the shop drawings and job
calculations will dictate the requirements for the application.
20.3.3.1
Installation of Independent Structural Mullions
The installation process for independent structural mullions will vary from job to job. Some applications will require
that the mullions be installed in sequence with the door assembly; however, the mullions are not integral to (part
of) the door.
Other applications will allow for each mullion to be installed independently of the door assembly. This will involve
locating and attaching the mullions within the opening, then installing the door assembly.
Regardless of which application is used, the attachment of the independent structural mullion is generally a
requirement. Special anchor clips are designed to carry the load imposed on the mullion from the adjacent framing
(see Figure 20-33).
PAGE 20-31
Figure 20-33 Example Clip for Structural Mullion
In cases where the mullions are installed in sequence with the door assembly (i.e. door frame, then mullion, then
door frame), the practice is very similar to the steps outlined in this section, but the sequence is altered to allow
the door assembly to be inserted before the next mullion.
In situations where the mullions can be installed first (before the door frames are installed), follow these
guidelines:
1.
First, check the opening and make sure the receptor and subsill are properly positioned and anchored.
2.
Use the shop drawings to determine the exact location of the mullions (where they are to be positioned in the
opening). Mark the points on the head receptor and subsill for use later.
3.
Special reinforcing plates and/or anchor clip receivers may be necessary. Check the shop drawings for their
location.
•
In some cases, the anchor clip receivers are pre-inserted into the subsill prior to installation. In other
cases, the anchor clip receivers can be dropped into the subsill and/or receptor, and are positioned by the
installer to allow for mullion attachment (see Figure 20-34).
PAGE 20-32
Figure 20-34 Reinforcing Plates in Subsill
4.
In cases where the clip angle does not lock in place or integrate with a receiver, and attachment of the clip
involves penetration of the subsill, the installer must make sure the clip assembly is properly sealed in place
using the following guidelines.
•
First determine the location of the clip in the subsill. Using the clip, find and drill the appropriate size hole
in the subsill.
•
To seal the clip/fastener assembly, first pump sealant into the hole in the subsill.
•
Apply a bed of sealant on top of the subsill over the entire area where the clip will rest (see Figure 20-35).
(The bed of sealant should be 1/8” thick.)
•
PAGE 20-33
Figure 20-35 Application of the Anchor Clip Directly to Subsill
•
Set the clip into position into the sealant, pressing it in place, causing the sealant to compress out and
around the clip perimeter.
•
Install the fastener(s), any washers and the nuts into the clip, placing sealant between each layer.
•
Encapsulate the entire head of the fastener/washer/nut with sealant to ensure a water tight joint.
•
Tool the sealant at the fastener and around the clip to remove any air pockets, and to help promote good
adhesion.
•
Randomly check installations with water (see Chapter 7.5) after the clips are attached and the sealant has
had time to properly cure.
5.
Once the anchor clips have been installed into the head receptor and subsill, mullion installation can begin.
•
Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the mullion to the anchor clip.
•
Check for slots in the clip at the head condition. Slots are designed to hold the frame in place, yet allow for
vertical expansion and contraction as well as building movement. If slots are present, it’s best to locate the
fasteners in the center of the vertical slot.
•
Check each installation to ensure that the mullion is plumb and provides a square opening to receive the
door.
•
door assembly later.
•
Apply a bead of sealant at any metal- to-metal joints where the mullion will interface with the subsill or
receptor (see Figure 20-36). Check the project shop drawings for seal locations.
PAGE 20-34
Figure 20-36 Application of Sealant for Mullion
•
After setting the mullions in place, tool the sealant on both the inboard and outboard side. Clean off any
excess sealant that will show on the exposed finish.
•
It is a good idea to dry fit a frame into place to ensure it will fit properly between the two mullions prior to
attaching all of the mullions.
•
Check the location of each mullion as the installation progresses. Make sure there will be enough room for
the last mullion and frame in the opening, and that there will not be an interference problem.
6.
Once the mullions are secured in place and the opening is given a final check to ensure a good fit, the
installation of the door assembly and/or sidelights can begin (refer to Sections 20.1.3, 20.1.4, 20.1.5 and
20.1.6).
•
Sidelights (fixed units adjacent to doors) are installed just like door assemblies, depending on whether
they are stacked in place horizontally or applied between mullions (see Figure 20-37).
PAGE 20-35
Figure 20-37 Installation of Sidelights
7.
Insert each door assembly (or sidelight) into the opening left by the mullions. Center the door between the
mullions and set the door in place.
•
Make sure the frames are seated all the way down into the subsill.
•
Never leave a frame unsecured in the opening. Use short temporary clips (pressure plates) to secure the
frame in place if continuous clips are to be applied later.
•
Do not leave temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to support the full load.
•
Always use the pressure plate fasteners recommended by the manufacturer.
•
When applying continuous pressure plates, make sure to leave enough clearance to apply the receptor
clips.
•
Once the continuous pressure plates are applied, the finished covers can be snapped on (see Figure 2038).
PAGE 20-36
Figure 20-38 Apply Pressure Plates and Covers
8.
After all of the door assemblies are secured in place, complete the installation by applying the finished
receptor clips and perimeter seal as required. See Sections 20.6 and 20.7 for finishing the interior and
exterior.
20.4
Installation of Door Assembly with Transom Panels Above
The installation of doors with fixed panels (transoms) above is similar to the instructions outlined in Section 20.3;
however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary. When installing transoms above doors, horizontal
stack mullions will typically be used, and need to be properly anchored to the frame below either prior to
installation, or after installation.
For applications where the horizontal stack mullion and transom are applied on top of the door assembly prior to
door installation, follow the guidelines provided in Section 20.4.1.
For applications where the transom is applied on top of the door assembly after door installation, follow the
guidelines provided in Section 20.4.2.
20.4.1
Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed Prior to Door Installation
If horizontal stack mullions are used, the installation of the door and transom is done in sequence, starting from
the bottom and working towards the top.
Use the following guidelines when installing transoms above doors using horizontal stack mullions:
1. After making sure the subsill and receptor are fully prepared, the assembly of the door and transom may
begin.
2. If possible, use a table to work from. Lay the door on top of the table and apply sealant to the horizontal stack
mullion as directed by the manufacturer, then set the horizontal stack mullion on top the door frame (see
Figure 20-39).
•
Seal and attach the stack mullion with fasteners as indicated by the manufacturer. Make sure to seal all
fastener penetrations completely.
PAGE 20-37
Figure 20-39 Assembly of the Stack Mullion
3. Apply an additional bead of sealant on top of the horizontal stack mullion in preparation for receipt of the
transom.
4. Set the transom in position over the door assembly. Slip the transom into the stack mullion, mating the male
and female sections together (see Figure 20-40).
Figure 20-40 Assembly of the Transom and Door Prior to Installation
PAGE 20-38
5. Attach the transom to the stack mullion as directed by the manufacturer.
6. Set the door into position in the subsill, then rotate the head toward the exterior and push it against the
receptor at the jambs.
Note: If the assembly does not call for attachment fasteners, use caution when raising the frame into position so
the transom will not fall out of the horizontal stack mullion.
7. Move the door horizontally until it nests within the jamb receptor opening. Check the horizontal clearance, and
make sure the door is in the proper position before proceeding.
8. After installation of the door, apply the receptor clips to hold the door and fixed panel in place.
•
Check the shop drawings to determine if gaskets need to be applied to the receptor clips prior to
installation.
•
20.4.2
From the interior, check the fit; make sure the frames mate together according to the shop drawings.
Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed After Door Installation
If horizontal stack mullions are used and are to be applied after the doors are installed, use the following
guidelines:
1. After making sure the subsill and receptor are fully prepared, the installation of the door will occur first,
followed by the horizontal stack mullion, then the transom.
2. Set the door in place as indicated in the previous sections. Apply a bead of sealant to the bottom side of the
stack mullion.
3. Attach the mullion into position with fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer. Be sure to seal all
fastener penetrations.
4. Apply an additional bead of sealant on top of the horizontal stack mullion in preparation for receipt of the
transom.
5. Set the transom in position over the door assembly. This may require you to rotate the assembly into position,
starting with the bottom, and then rotate the head outboard against the receptor. Slip the transom into the
stack mullion, mating the male and female sections together (see Figure 20-41).
6. Move the transom horizontally until it nests within the center of the horizontal stack mullion. Check the
horizontal clearance, and make sure the door is in the proper position before proceeding.
PAGE 20-39
Figure 20-41 Transom Installation after Door is Installed
7. Attach the transom to the stack mullion as directed by the manufacturer.
8. After installation of the fixed panel, apply the receptor clips to hold the door and fixed panel in place.
•
Check the shop drawings to determine if gaskets need to be applied to the receptor clip prior to
installation.
20.5 Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and Square
Regardless of the installation practice used, all doors and accessories shall be installed plumb, level and square
within the opening. The following illustrations show how to check the door assembly to ensure it is properly
installed.
For All Door Types
1. Check the door assembly to ensure it is set plumb, level and square in the opening (see Figures 20-42 and
20-43), using the following tips:
•
Make sure the door sill is level and not bowed or uneven.
•
Install shims behind the jamb 4" to 6" from the sill and header.
•
Adjust shims until the frame is square (diagonal measurements are within tolerance, based on the size of
the door).
•
Plumb the frame and check for true (not racked) by using strings stretched from each corner to the
opposing corner.
Note: If the strings just barely touch, the unit is not racked out of alignment. If the strings are touching, reverse the
strings to determine if the unit is racked.
PAGE 20-40
For All Hinged Doors
Open the operable panel(s) and remove any shipping spacers. Adjust the shims, and move the top of one or both
sides of the frame slightly in, out or horizontally, until the following conditions are achieved:
1. The top of each panel is parallel to the frame at the head (the margin is even across the top of the door).
•
The operable panel(s) make even contact with the weather-stripping.
•
The jambs are within 1/16" of being straight.
•
The door operates properly and it remains stationary in any open position.
PAGE 20-41
2. Install lockset(s) if not already in place.
3. Verify that the jambs are shimmed properly as follows:
•
On each side there should be at least three shims, with shims installed behind each hinge (when hinged at
the jamb).
•
Place shims behind the jamb strike plate.
•
On the top, install at least three shims (within 4" to 6" of each corner and at the center mullion position),
except when directed not to do so by the manufacturer.
4. Secure the shims at hinge and strike locations with a long screw that penetrates the structural framing.
•
One hole in each hinge may have been left open for this step. If not, remove one standard screw and
install a screw of an appropriate length (sometimes dictated by code) through the hole in the hinge,
directly into the jamb condition.
•
When installing the long screws, take care not to pull the frame out of square.
5. For units with multiple jamb-hinged panels, also shim and secure hinges on the inactive side.
6. Close the panel(s). Then re-check the margins between the panel(s) and the jamb, and between the panels of
a two-panel unit. Adjust the shims as needed to maintain margins that are equal from top to bottom.
•
Make sure panels remain aligned (tops even with each other).
On Two-Panel Hinged Glass Doors
1. Make sure the following is achieved:
•
Both panels are in the same plane.
•
The top corners of the panel locking stiles are aligned and flush with each other, and the margin between
locking stiles is even from top to bottom.
For Sliding Glass Doors
Open the operable panel and check the fit, adjusting the rollers as needed until the following is achieved:
1.
Check the interlock to determine if the overlap is the same from top to bottom.
•
Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb and check the gap. It will be even along the vertical
edge of the interlock if the door panel is square.
•
If the door panel is not square, remove the panel to reduce the weight, and adjust the rollers prior to
placing the panel back into the door frame. Continue to check and adjust until the panel is square in the
frame.
•
Make sure operable sliders are fully blocked and supported at the locking points so that if the sash is
2.
Operate the door panel and check for a smooth operation. If the door does not move freely, check the sill
track for debris and clean as needed.
20.6
Select a backer rod with a diameter approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of thumb:
the rod diameter shall be at least 1/8" greater than joint width.)
PAGE 20-42
•
The backer rod should be inserted into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. It shall not be punctured, folded
or creased; this could cause emission of gas and bubbling of sealant. Joint primer shall not be applied to the
backer rod.
•
Push the sealant into the joint over the backer rod in a continuous manner. Tool the sealant bead so that it is
an even, unbroken seal, sufficient to fill the gap between the door unit and the rough opening. Always follow
manufacturer's instructions. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section 13.5.
Remember, there are five basic steps for proper joint preparation and sealant application for doors:
3. PACK – Install backer rod or bond breaker as required.
configuration, and fully contacts the joint walls.
20.6.1
Most doors are manufactured with weep holes to allow moisture to escape. Never cover these weep holes with
sealant, paint or any other obstructive material. Remove any construction debris from the drainage path to ensure
proper drainage.
20.7
20.7.1
Cavity Insulation
Whenever possible, place insulation in the cavity between the new door assembly/receptor and the building
components.
1. Use fiber insulation (fiberglass batt insulation) or low pressure expanding foam (see Chapter 13, Section
13.6.4). Follow the manufacturer's guidelines.
20.7.2
Like the exterior, place backer rod over cavity insulation on the interior side of the door to control sealant width and
depth.
20.7.3
On the interior of the door where an exposed joint occurs (or where required per the contract drawings), place
sealant over the backer rod in a continuous manner. The sealant bead shall be even, unbroken and fill the gap
between the door unit and the rough opening. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section 13.5.
20.7.4
inner-most surface of the door and the building condition. This air must be controlled in order to help reduce air
infiltration and energy consumption.
drywall and the door assembly becomes a cosmetic joint.
PAGE 20-43
door assembly (see Figure 20-44). This may or may not be a part of the installer's contract.
1. The responsible party shall coordinate the installation of the drywall and the J-channel when abutting against
the door frame/accessory. Do not attach J-channels to the door assembly or receptor unless otherwise
approved by the door manufacturer.
2. It is preferable that a 1/4” wide joint be left to allow for movement of the door assembly due to wind load and/or
live load movement. If a properly sized joint is not left, cracking of the drywall may occur, or the sealant may
tear, requiring future maintenance.
3. If the door assembly is installed toward the outside of the wall assembly, a drywall J-channel return shall be
installed in the recess, and the joint between the face of the door frame and the drywall J-channel shall be
sealed.
Notes:______________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 20-44
Table of Contents
21.1 Types of Screens.......................................................................................................... 1
21.2 Locating the Screen...................................................................................................... 1
21.3 Stationary vs. Operable Screens .................................................................................. 2
21.4
Screen Access and Operation................................................................................... 2
21.5 Installation of Screens .................................................................................................. 3
21.5.1 Installing a Screen with Compression Springs ....................................................... 3
21.5.2 Installing a Screen with Turn Tabs ......................................................................... 4
21.5.3 Installing a Sliding Screen Door ............................................................................. 5
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 21-I
21.0 Screen Installation
Screens can be installed after the window and/or door installation is complete. Screens for windows and sliding
glass doors are typically available as an option when ordering products.
It is often desirable to store screens in a protected area until the majority of the work is done, and then install the
screens later. Coordinate the screen installation with the approving authority.
21.1
Types of Screens
There are a variety of screen types, and each type is designed to accomplish a specific task. Insect screens are
used to simply protect against flying insects. Shade screens are used to offer some resistance to direct sunlight.
Security screens (protection screens) are used to provide a measure of security from intrusion into the building.
This chapter focuses primarily on screens and how they are used and installed.
Caution: Insect screens are intended to provide reasonable insect control. They are not for the purpose of
providing security or designed to provide retention of objects or persons on the interior. Screens are not retaining
devices for children.
Although not screens, child guards are often installed in multiple story buildings to help protect children from
falling from open windows. The installation of child guards is often not part of the window contract; however,
precautions are mentioned in this chapter to give some guidance to installers who may be asked to install child
guards.
When installing screens or child guards that are not part of the window/door system, installers are encouraged to
read and follow all of the manufacturer's installation instructions and precautions.
The following is a list of the different types of screens and child guards that are available:
1. Insect screens
•
Fiberglass
•
Aluminum
2. Shade screens
•
Fiberglass
•
Aluminum
3. Security screens (Protection Screens)
•
Stainless Steel Mesh
•
Steel Mesh
•
Fiberglass Mesh (with sensor wire which activates alarm when cut)
4. Child Guards
•
Metal
21.2 Locating the Screen
Screens can be installed inside or outside of the window or door. To install screens, follow the steps below:
1. First verify that the correct screen has been obtained. Usually the screen is tagged to correspond with the
window or glass door opening.
2. Determine whether the screen is to be installed on the interior or exterior. Check the manufacturer's
instructions for screen location. Some general hints for screen location are as follows:
•
Insect screens
PAGE 21-1
−
Horizontal and vertical sliding windows typically mount screens on the outside.
−
Casement, hopper, awning and dual action and projection windows usually mount screens opposite
the sash projection.
−
Sliding glass doors and hinged doors typically have the screens on the outside, but can also have
screens on the inside depending on the product type and manufacturer.
•
Shade screens
− Shade screens are generally installed on the exterior of the window for maximum efficiency.
•
Security screens
−
Metal security screens are generally installed on the exterior.
−
Fiberglass security screens are frequently installed in the original screen location.
•
Child guards
−
Child guards are usually installed on the interior. They are designed to be adjustable for variations in
opening sizes so the guard can be attached to the interior framing.
3.
Verify the size and fit of the screen. If the screen doesn’t fit, find out why.
Note: Never install a screen that may prevent or hamper emergency egress.
21.3
Stationary vs. Operable Screens
Consult the manufacturer's instructions to determine if the screen is a stationary (fixed) screen or an operable
screen.
•
Window screens are often fixed.
•
Screens for doors operate at the head or sill on sliding tracks, or swing from hinges.
•
Protection screens are typically fixed.
•
Child guards are typically operable, but are locked to protect against operation unless there is an emergency.
21.4
Screen Access and Operation
Stationary screens that are mounted on the interior may require a device (typically called wickets) that allow for
access and operation of the window locking hardware. The options available for interior screens are:
•
Screens with hinged wickets
•
Screens with sliding wickets
•
Fully hinged screens
Screens with wickets require additional framing to support the wicket assembly (see Figure 21-1), while the fully
hinged screens do not. Fully hinged screens and screens with wickets, however, must be opened in order to close
and lock the window.
PAGE 21-2
Figure 21-1 Access Options for Hardware
21.5
Installation of Screens
The installation of screens varies, and each manufacturer has its own installation method. Therefore, these
instructions can be used only as a general guideline for installing screens and are not intended as a substitute for
the manufacturer's instructions. Always install screens in windows and doors per the manufacturer's instructions.
21.5.1
1.
Installing a Screen with Compression Springs
Install the portion of screen with compression springs into the deep pocket of the frame (this may be the
jamb or the head).
2.
Push the screen into the pocket until the screen bottoms out in the window channel (see Figure 21-2). Use
caution not to bend the screen frame when you compress the springs.
PAGE 21-3
Figure 21-2 Screen with Compression Springs
3.
Swing the opposite end of the screen into the window frame and let it slip into the shallow pocket of the
track.
4.
Release the screen and make sure it is secured and locked into position.
21.5.2
Installing a Screen with Turn Tabs
1.
Place the screen over the window and align it in place.
2.
Secure the screen in place by screwing a turn tab (see Figure 21-3)over the frame and into the window
frame or trim boards. Use caution to not over tighten the screws.
Figure 21-3 Screen with Turn Tabs
PAGE 21-4
21.5.3
1.
Installing a Sliding Screen Door
Retract the wheels on the screen door to their lowest position; this will allow for the most amount of
clearance when installing the screen (see Figure 21-34).
Figure 21-3 Installing Sliding Screen Door
2.
Lift up the door into the top track far enough to provide clearance for the bottom of the door to swing in over
the bottom top of the track (see Figure 21-34).
3.
Adjust the bottom wheels up to provide enough clearance for the door to slide smoothly. Align the screen
door to the jamb for an equal sightline by adjusting the lower wheels up and down.
4.
Adjust the top wheels up until the wheels engage the top track. Turn the adjustment screw an additional turn.
This will put enough tension on the wheels to keep the door rolling smoothly and prevent it from jumping off
the track. For overhead sliding screens, similar adjustments can be made at the head. See the
manufacturer's instructions for adjustment instructions.
5.
Install the latch and keeper. It is best to put the keeper on only after the final adjustments have been made to
the door.
6.
Operate the screen to verify that it works properly.
7.
Verify that the screen has proper clearance and coverage.
8.
Open and close the screen door to check for smooth operation.
9.
Check the latch to determine that it engages the keeper and holds the screen securely closed.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 21-5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
______________
PAGE 21-6
Table of Contents
22.1
Cleaning Finished Materials .......................................................................................................................1
22.1.1
Material Finishes .................................................................................................................................1
22.1.2
Use of Protective Coverings ...............................................................................................................1
22.1.3
Manufacturer's Instructions .................................................................................................................2
22.2
Cleaning Windows and Doors ....................................................................................................................2
22.2.1
General Cleaning of Light Surface Soil ..............................................................................................2
22.3
Washing Glass Surfaces ............................................................................................................................3
22.4
Cleaning of the Building Exterior ................................................................................................................4
22.5
Site Clean-up ..............................................................................................................................................4
22.5.1
Removal of Construction Debris .........................................................................................................4
22.5.2
Proper Disposal of Debris ...................................................................................................................4
22.6
Welding After Glass is in Place ..................................................................................................................5
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 22-I
22.0 Final Cleaning
To insure proper operation of the installed products and the longevity of the finish, proper selection and use of
cleaners is critical. The cleaning products many installers are accustomed to using may not be compatible with all
materials used in commercial applications. In some cases, damage to the finish and structural integrity of the
product may occur. Always refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper cleaning methods and materials.
If the installer leaves the product cleaned and in good working condition, other trades that follow will be more
inclined to clean up after themselves. The following sections address cleaning finished products, regardless of the
responsible trade.
22.1
22.1.1
Cleaning Finished Materials
Material Finishes
When choosing a cleaning solution, consider the following:
•
The actual finish applied to the material;
•
The possibility of scratching the surface; and
•
The possibility of damaging the finish using harsh chemicals
This chapter provides suggested general cleaning instructions for aluminum, vinyl, wood and fiberglass materials.
Read completely all cleaning instructions prior to starting any cleaning job.
Additional cleaning instruction/information regarding anodized and painted aluminum materials can be found in
AAMA 609, "Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Aluminum," and AAMA
610, "Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Painted Aluminum Extrusions and Curtain
Wall Panels." For vinyl products additional information can be found in AAMA PMB-1-11 “Caring for Your
Windows, Doors and Skylight.”
22.1.2
Use of Protective Coverings
Some products arrive at the job site with clear, white or blue-tinted adhesive vinyl protective coverings, which can
be peeled off after installation of the products. Sometimes these coverings are field applied to protect the finish.
While these materials protect the finish, they must not be allowed to remain on the product for an extended period
of time as they can also “bake on” and harm the finish.
Alkaline building products, such as wet plaster, stucco, mortar, concrete and lime can cause permanent stains
and corrosive damage to the finish of products. Additionally, harsh acidic cleaning agents, such as muriatic
(hydrochloric) acid, used to wash the building surface can also damage the finish.
Whenever possible, apply protective coverings over the entire finished surface to avoid contact. If the
manufacturer has applied protective coverings, they should remain in place until the work is complete. If a
protective covering is not provided, the responsible trade must protect the finish prior to starting their work.
Consider these tips:
•
Never use high-pressure washers as they can damage the finish and sealant.
•
Whenever there is a chance of harming the finish of windows and doors, protect them by masking them with
the appropriate materials.
•
Masking tape should not be used on finished surfaces. Masking tape can, when heated by sunlight, bake onto
the finish causing damage when removed.
PAGE 22-1
If the finished surface of a product happens to come into contact with muriatic acid, other acidic products or
alkaline substances, remove any residue before it dries. Wash and rinse the surface completely, then dry with a
clean towel. If these materials are allowed to remain, there is a strong possibility of finish damage.
Stucco or concrete left to cure on the frames of windows and doors and glazing materials may damage the
surfaces. Promptly remove and clean all such materials that come into contact with these surfaces before any
curing action takes place. Additionally, glass or aluminum surfaces exposed to water leaching from new concrete
or stucco must be rinsed immediately to prevent permanent damage.
22.1.3
Manufacturer's Instructions
Most manufacturers offer standard instructions regarding removal of the protective cover and final cleaning of
specific finishes. Final cleaning of all windows and doors shall be done in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and safety regulations. The information in this manual is offered to
the installer for use when information is not available from the manufacturer.
22.2
22.2.1
Cleaning Windows and Doors
General Cleaning of Light Surface Soil
Start cleaning the products by removing any visible residue. Use a vacuum cleaner to pick up any loose debris in
window or door tracks, as well as any loose drywall dust, mud and other materials on the face of the products.
Additionally, inspect and clean all weep holes to ensure proper drainage of the product. When the vacuum
cleaning is complete, clean the material finish by using the recommendations below.
Prior to washing the products, remove all light surface soil. Some testing is recommended to determine the
degree of cleaning actually necessary to accomplish the desired result. Use the following procedures, starting
with the gentlest process and working toward a more aggressive approach, as the need occurs.
For interior applications, the recommended cleaning process includes using warm water and a damp cloth.
Starting from the top and working toward the bottom, wash with a gentle, yet uniform pressure using a soft cloth.
First, clean in a horizontal direction, then in a vertical direction. Make sure the cloth is frequently rinsed in clean
water and does not contain grit, which can scratch the surface. Rinse the surface from the top down using clean
water, then, dry thoroughly with a clean cloth. If the soil is still present after drying, some surface agitation can be
introduced. Follow the same procedure indicated above using a wet soft sponge or soft brush to gently scrub
remaining dirt, while concurrently applying water to the surface.
For exterior applications, the methods above can be followed; however, a garden hose can be used to dislodge
any soil and perform the final rinse. Use caution because many operable windows and doors are not designed to
withstand direct, full-pressure, full-volume spray from a typical garden hose. Windows and doors may allow water
to penetrate into unwanted locations when subjected to such a spray. When using a garden hose, always apply
the water at a low volume, using moderate water pressure and an indirect spray. Always start with windows on
the upper floors and work down. Minimize the amount of water running over the lower portions of the building to
avoid other stains or damage.
If soil still adheres to the surface, a mild detergent cleaner can be used along with the soft sponge or brush, gently
scrubbing the surface. Mild soaps or detergents ruled safe for bare-hands will be safe for painted products.
Always use a uniform pressure when washing window and door components. First, clean with a horizontal motion
and then a vertical motion. The surface must be thoroughly rinsed by spraying with clean water, and then
PAGE 22-2
thoroughly dried with a clean cloth before going to the next step. Do not allow cleaning solutions to collect, or
"puddle," on horizontal surfaces and crevices. Always flush these areas with water and dry thoroughly.
Refer to the manufacturer's instructions before using any type of solvent.
Caution: Never use abrasive pads to clean finished surfaces. Follow the cleaning instructions provided. Do not
use excessive abrasive rubbing to remove stubborn stains; this may adversely affect the finish and leave an even
more undesirable appearance.
Some Important Cautions Regarding Any Finish
•
Never use paint removers, aggressive alkaline, acid or abrasive cleaners. Don't use cleaners containing
trisodium phosphate, highly alkaline cleaners or highly acidic cleaners. Do not use cleaners containing
aggressive organic solvents such as chlorine bleach, liquid grease remover, strong soaps or deter-gents
containing organic solvents, nail polish remover or furniture polish/cleaners.
•
Do not attempt to clean sun-heated surfaces, because possible chemical reactions on hot surfaces may be
accelerated. Always work in shaded areas or in areas not exposed to direct sunlight. Also, avoid cleaning in
freezing temperatures, or when temperatures are low enough to cause condensation. Surfaces cleaned under
these adverse conditions can become streaked or tainted, and cannot be restored to their original
appearance.
•
Use only mild detergents and non-etching cleaning agents on products. Never mix different cleaners as
adverse chemical reactions may occur. Always follow the cleaning material recommendations at the proper
concentration, and always test the cleaner in a small area prior to proceeding.
•
Never use scouring pads, abrasive brushes, steel wool or other abrasives that will damage the finish. Do not
use excessive rubbing. Make sure sponges or cleaning cloths are free of dirt or grit.
22.3 Washing Glass Surfaces
Cleaning glass surfaces is much like cleaning framing materials. Any paint, plaster or sealant on the glass should
be removed immediately. Never clean glass with an abrasive material or strong organic solvents, which could
harm the glass surface or glazing sealant.
For extremely soiled conditions, remove excess residue with a mild soap solution and a clean damp cloth prior to
using any aggressive cleaning techniques. Removing excess residue will reduce the amount of cleaning required
and reduce the possibility of scratching the glass surface. Frequently rinse the cloth to remove grit.
Once the excess dirt and grime are re-moved, clean the glass with a mild soap or detergent, or glass cleaner.
Always start with a clean, grit-free, soft cloth or sponge. Wet the cloth or sponge with the cleaning solution and
gently wash the glass surface. Immediately rinse with a clean cloth using clean rinse water. Promptly remove
excess rinse water with a clean squeegee. Finally, dry any residual water on the surface of the glass and window
frame with a clean, dry cloth.
Clean glass with reflective coatings using extreme caution in order to avoid scratching the surface. Use the same
procedures outlined above, taking extra care to remove gritty dirt particles picked up by the cleaning cloth or
sponge.
Use the same precautions outlined above when cleaning Lexan or Polycarbonate products. Use extreme care, as
these surfaces may be damaged during the cleaning process if the proper measures are not taken.
PAGE 22-3
Protect the glass from welding, cutting, sandblasting, fireproofing or other potentially damaging work. Never mark
glass with permanent markers, tape or other materials that may harm the surface.
Note: Masking tape should not be used on glass surfaces. Masking tape can, when heated by sunlight, bake onto
the glass and/or window frame, causing damage when removed.
Windows and doors often arrive at the job site with labels and stickers on the surface. Generally, all manufacturer
stickers can be removed during cleaning. Only remove temporary labels that do not indicate certification of the
products. Temporary labels are generally applied to the glass and obviously impede the view. Permanent labels
are not to be removed; they will generally be located in inconspicuous locations in the jamb track of windows and
doors, or can be seen only when the window or door is open.
Caution: Use extreme care when removing labels. Avoid scratching the glass with razor blades or other sharp
tools.
22.4 Cleaning of the Building Exterior
Final cleaning is a common occurrence on commercial buildings and should always be done by professionals
experienced in this type of work. Although final cleaning of the building exterior is often not the responsibility of
the window/door installer, coordination with the contractor is essential. Depending on the cleaning materials and
methods used, final cleaning can often lead to serious damage of the installed units. As an example, muriatic
acid, a chemical used to clean brick, can result in damage to the finish of the product as well as cause failure of
the sealant.
Installers are encouraged to communicate the problems associated with final cleaning with the contractor, and
help determine reasonable solutions to accomplish the final cleaning process while maintaining the integrity of the
finish and sealant joints. At a minimum, recommend that any final cleaning be done from the top of the building
down, one floor at a time. Insist that the cleaning agents be immediately rinsed off the finished product and wiped
dry before proceeding on to the floor below. This will help reduce the potential for damage due to the harsh
chemicals.
22.5 Site Clean-up
22.5.1
Removal of Construction Debris
During the installation of window and door products, a certain amount of construction debris will most likely
accumulate. The installer of the products is responsible for removing any debris accumulating during his/her work.
Debris may include, but is not limited to, cardboard, plastic, banding, shims, miscellaneous trim cutoffs, sealant
tubes, fasteners, broken glass, old windows, etc.
22.5.2 Proper Disposal of Debris
Always dispose of construction debris responsibly and appropriately. In new construction applications, a job-site
waste disposal container may be available. When working in replacement applications, remove all materials from
the job site. Some materials may be considered hazardous and shall be disposed of in accordance with local
ordinances. Always dispose of materials in such a way as to remove any potential for harm to the public.
Materials such as glass, steel, aluminum and vinyl can be taken to recycling centers and reclaimed.
PAGE 22-4
22.6 Welding After Glass is in Place
Welding done after the glass is installed can cause significant damage to both the glass and the finished surface
of the installed unit. Whenever possible, it is best to make sure all welding of steel anchor clips, straps and plates
is complete before the glass is installed.
Understanding that this is not always possible and that there are many trades involved in the construction
process, there are occasions when welding must take place after the units are installed.
Welding involves intense heat and often results in large quantities of molten hot material flashing off the pieces
being welded. The material that flashes off can shatter glass, mark the finish on the glass surface and damage
the finish on the installed unit. The installer is encouraged to communicate the problems associated to welding
with the contractor. The contractor is responsible to communicate with any trades that follow so they will also
understand these concerns.
Whenever welding must be done after the units are installed, the window/door must be protected. This may
involve a number of different protective measures, but as a minimum, a canvas tarp should be hung to protect the
opening during the welding process.
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
PAGE 22-5
Table of Contents
23.1
Using Quality Control Checklists ................................................................................................................1
23.2
Window and Glass Door Operation ............................................................................................................1
23.3
Occupant Safety .........................................................................................................................................3
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 23-I
23.0 Quality Control
Performing specific quality control procedures is a critical part of completing any installation. Installers perform
numerous tasks that are important to the overall quality and performance of the finished installation, and the most
efficient way to make sure each task is completed properly is to perform a quality control check.
Completing the quality control check via a checklist signifies that an installer has performed each step of the
installation process completely and correctly, and in accordance with the installation practices outlined in this
manual.
When an item on the quality control checklist is not part of the installer contract, the approving authority assumes
this responsibility.
23.1
Using Quality Control Checklists
The quality control checklist contains a number of items critical to installation, and includes checking for the
following:
•
The opening is configured correctly and contains the appropriate materials.
•
The products used are correct for the desired application and meet the code requirements.
•
All windows and doors fit the openings based on the correct clearances for the product.
•
The correct flashing has been used and installed properly.
•
Appropriate sealant, shims and blocking have been used and applied correctly.
•
Sealant joints have been spot checked for field adhesion per ASTM E C1521.
•
The products have been installed plumb, level and square.
•
Weep holes/slots are clear and free of any obstructions.
•
Correct fastener selection and placement has been maintained, and additional fasteners have been used
where required, based on the type of product used.
•
The products have been tested to ensure smooth and safe operation.
•
Final cleaning has been done, and all debris has been removed from the job site.
•
Any required maintenance has been performed to place the products in working order.
Use of the preprinted quality control checklists provided as part of this manual is an important part of a complete
and satisfactory installation.
23.2
Window and Glass Door Operation
As part of the final inspection performed by the installer, windows and doors are to be checked for operation.
Each window should be unlocked, opened, closed and locked to ensure smooth and safe operation. Make sure
limit-opening devices have been engaged and restrict operation when they are included on the job.
Check any product that does not operate correctly to determine the source or cause of the problem. Make any
necessary corrections or adjustments to correct any problems detected. If any minor adjustments can be made by
the installer to correct improper operation, they should be made. Before any major corrective work is done that
would result in a charge, the installer is encouraged to contact the manufacturer for proper maintenance
instructions and approval to proceed.
PAGE 23-1
Sample of Field Quality Control Checklist
Customer:
_____________________________
Phone:
_________________________
Address:
_____________________________
Date Installed:
_________________________
City & State:
_____________________________
Lead Installer:
_________________________
Zip Code:
_____________________________
Phone:
_________________________
Initial Product Review and Verification:






Products were checked when they arrived at the job site and were in good condition.
Products that included safety glazing were placed where required by code(s).
Products involving high performance glazing were placed in the proper location.
Problems pertaining to the existing windows and/or rough openings have been reported to the responsible party, and
have been resolved or documented. (See attached documentation.)
All safety issues related to hazardous materials have been properly addressed and resolved.
Other _____________________________________________________________________
Appropriate Installation Techniques Used and Quality Control Checks Performed:










All openings are configured correctly and include the appropriate materials.
Products used are appropriate for the application, and meet code requirements.
Water resistive barrier and flashing requirements were coordinated with the contractor.
Products were installed with proper clearances and checked for plumb, level and square.
Products have been installed according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Flashing/sealant, sealing, shims and shimming applications follow AAMA recommendations and ASTM Standards.
Correct fastener placement has been followed as directed by the manufacturer.
Periodically QC checks and field water penetration tests have been performed.
Periodic field checks for sealant adhesion quality in accordance with ASTM C 1521
Other _____________________________________________________________________
Final Check of Installation:









All products were checked for operation and function, safely and correctly.
Screens have been checked and are in good condition.
Any required adjustments or maintenance has been performed.
Weep holes have been checked for obstructions and cleared where necessary.
Final cleaning of frames and glass has been completed.
All debris has been removed from the job site and disposed of properly.
Operation of the product and standard maintenance requirements have been explained to the owner.
Job has been turned over to the contractor or other responsible party with their approval.
Other______________________________________________________________________
Installer's Signature: __________________________________________
Date: _____________
(Where applicable, each of the items checked above have been properly reviewed, verified and completed as part of my field
quality control check prior to turning the job over to the responsible party/approving authority.)
Responsible Party: __________________________________________
Date: _____________
(The items checked above were completed as part of the installer's quality control process. My signature indicates that the
installation was completed to my satisfaction and/or direction.)
PAGE 23-2
23.3 Occupant Safety
The safe operation of the windows and doors by future occupants is of critical importance. For this reason, any
products that are not in working order should be marked and restricted from use until repairs can be
accomplished or replacements installed. Never leave windows or doors that cannot be operated safely unmarked,
since job-site visitors may try to operate the windows, which could cause serious harm or injury.
It is important that the operation and maintenance requirements of the product be provided to the owner and/or
his representative. Copies of all operation manuals, maintenance manuals and documentation shall be provided
to the owner and/or his representatives at the conclusion of the installation.
Notes:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________
COPYRIGHT © AAMA 2008
23-3
SIXTH EDITION
Table of Contents
24.1
Maintenance of Hung Windows ..............................................................................................................1
24.1.1
Tilt Latch Mechanism ......................................................................................................................1
24.1.2
Sash Lubrication .............................................................................................................................1
24.1.3
Balance Adjustment ........................................................................................................................1
24.2
Maintenance of Awning/Hopper, Casement and Dual Action Windows .................................................1
24.2.1
Locking Mechanism Adjustment .....................................................................................................1
24.2.2
Hinge Adjustment ...........................................................................................................................2
24.2.3
Limit Stop Engagement ..................................................................................................................2
24.3
Maintenance of Sliding Windows ............................................................................................................2
24.3.1
Removal of the Sash ......................................................................................................................2
24.3.2
Adjustment of the Rollers................................................................................................................2
24.3.3
Cleaning of the Roller Track ...........................................................................................................2
24.4
Maintenance of Sliding Doors .................................................................................................................3
24.4.1
24.4.2
Screen Adjustment .........................................................................................................................3
24.5
Maintenance of Hinged Glass Doors ......................................................................................................3
24.5.1
24.5.2
Hinge Adjustment ...........................................................................................................................3
24.6
Field Re-Glazing Techniques .................................................................................................................3
24.6.1
Marine Glazing ................................................................................................................................4
24.6.2
Wet-Glazing/Tape-Glazing .............................................................................................................6
24.6.3
Dry Glazing .....................................................................................................................................8
24.6.4
Application of a Heel Bead .......................................................................................................... 11
24.6.5
Application of a Cap Bead ........................................................................................................... 12
24.7
Field Glass Cutting and Handling ........................................................................................................ 12
24.7.1
Measuring and Scoring ................................................................................................................ 12
24.7.2
Breaking the Glass ...................................................................................................................... 15
herein.
© Copyright 2015
Phone: 847/303-5664 Fax: 847/303-5774
PAGE 24-I
24.0 Final Adjustment and Product Maintenance
This chapter provides some basic final adjustment and maintenance tips for hung windows, awning/hopper,
casement, dual action and sliding windows, sliding doors, hinged doors and screens. Final adjustment and
maintenance instructions specific to each product can be found in the manufacturer's product literature. This
chapter also provides tips on field glass handling and cutting techniques, for those occasions where the installer
must replace a lite of glass.
24.1 Maintenance of Hung Windows
24.1.1
Tilt Latch Mechanism
Check tilt latches to ensure proper retraction and return required for window cleaning. If the tilt latch is too tight, it
may not function properly. Latches are designed in various ways. Some tilt latches can be adjusted.
If the latch can be adjusted, raise the bottom sash above the sill a minimum of 4". On double hung windows,
operate the bottom sash first; then lower the top sash a minimum of 4". Retract the tilt latch(es) and rotate the
sash inward until it reaches a flat, horizontal plane. The tilt latch can now be inspected to determine the cause of
failure. If the tilt latch will not perform properly after minor adjustment, contact the manufacturer for a replacement
or further instructions. If minor adjustments can be made, make the appropriate adjustments. Lift and shut the
sash and check for proper tilt latch return.
24.1.2
Sash Lubrication
Occasionally, the sash operates with difficulty and needs minor lubrication. Always lubricate tracks in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. Tracks of wood windows should be lubricated only after the windows are
finished, since lubricant over-spray can adversely affect the bond between the wood and the finish.
Before lubricating vinyl tracks, verify that the lubricant is compatible with the vinyl or plastic parts used in the
window assembly. When silicone aerosol sprays are used, prevent them from contacting plastic locking
mechanisms because the plastic may be made of impact-resistant polycarbonate materials that will begin to
dissolve from the solvents contained in these sprays.
24.1.3
Balance Adjustment
There are occasions when the sash lifts or settles improperly over a short time. This may require balance
adjustment, when that option is available. Adjust balances only when they have instructions from the
manufacturer explaining the process. Hung windows can be designed in a number of ways, and will include
balances from a number of different manufacturers. Adjust balances only with the proper tools, since bodily harm
may be caused if the work is done improperly.
24.2 Maintenance of Awning/Hopper, and Casement and Dual Action Windows
24.2.1
Locking Mechanism Adjustment
Awning/hopper and casement windows normally include cam locks and keepers. When the sash does not close
and lock properly, minor adjustments can be made. To adjust the keeper, simply unlock and open the window.
The release of limit devices may require special keys to gain visual access to the keeper. Generally, adjustment
to the keepers can be accomplished by simply unscrewing the fasteners a few turns. The keepers may have
elongated holes allowing for repositioning of the hardware. Once repositioned, the fasteners can be tightened. If
this procedure does not correct the problem, the hinges may need a minor adjustment. Tilt & turn hardware allows
PAGE 24-1
the excentric cams mounted on the sash to be adjusted to increase or decrease the compression of the sales
between the frame and sash.
24.2.2
Hinge Adjustment
Hinges can be adjusted using the process mentioned for lock adjustment. Although numerous types of hinges are
available, simply loosening the attachment screws and repositioning the sash can adjust many of them. Once the
sash has been moved slightly, the fasteners can be tightened, and the sash can be checked for proper operation.
Minor lubrication of the hinges may be necessary if the hardware has collected dirt and dust during the
construction phase. A silicone spray can be used to lubricate the hinges, but should be used sparingly.
24.2.3
Limit Stop Engagement
Make sure limit opening devices have been engaged and restrict operation when they are included on the job.
24.3
24.3.1
Maintenance of Sliding Windows
Removal of the Sash
When the sash of a sliding window is not operating properly, the sash can be removed to check for problems.
Most sliding window sash sit on rollers in the sill track. To remove a sliding window sash, unlock and move the
sash to the open position about 6". Once the sash is open, the installer can lift the sash as high as possible into
the head member, and rotate the bottom of the sash toward the interior. This process will allow the sash to clear
the window track.
Some products are equipped with anti-lift devices that will restrict the sash from being raised. If the sash does not
lift easily out of the sill track, inspect the window for these devices and remove them as required. Never force or
pry on a sash to remove it from the frame.
Once the sash clears the sill track, the window can be lowered and removed from the head track. Turn the sash
over and check the roller housing to determine if the hardware is working properly. If the rollers are not working
properly and need adjustment, follow the instructions below. If the rollers cannot be adjusted, minor lubrication
may correct the problem. Always use lubrication materials sparingly. If the roller housing is plastic, consult the
manufacturer for the proper lubrication. Silicone sprays can degrade the housing material.
24.3.2
Adjustment of the Rollers
Adjustment of the rollers can usually be accomplished in one of two ways. Some roller housings are not
adjustable, but can be raised or lowered by placing or removing spacers under the housing. To remove or add
spacers, follow the directions above for sash removal. Then, remove the housing and make the necessary
adjustments.
Other rollers can be adjusted by a simple turn of a screw, which raises and lowers the sash. In many cases, the
sash does not have to be removed. Always check for an access hole, which allows for adjustment of the rollers
prior to removal of the sash. Holes will either be exposed to view or will be covered by a plastic hole plug. Holeplugs can be easily removed by gentle force, using your fingernails or a flat, thin spatula. Once you have gained
access to the adjustment screw, simply turn the screw to adjust the sash, either higher or lower.
24.3.3
Cleaning of the Roller Track
The roller track will often collect construction debris which will result in rough operation of the sash. If the sash
does not glide smoothly across the sill, check the sill track for debris. To clean the roller track, simply use a
PAGE 24-2
vacuum cleaner to pick up the loose material; then use a cloth or sponge and soap and water to finish the
cleaning.
24.4
24.4.1
Maintenance of Sliding Doors
Sliding glass doors are very similar to sliding windows, with the exception of the locking mechanism provided.
Locking mechanisms can be adjusted by turning the adjustment screws. To make adjustments to the lock, unlock
and open the door until full access to the locking jamb is permitted. Inspect the lock for attachment and
adjustment screws. To adjust the amount of throw (reach) the lock cam will have, simply rotate the adjustment
screw, then close the door and throw the lock. Check the clearance again by trying to open the door while in the
locked position. A limited amount of clearance should be allowed between the lock and the keeper.
24.4.2
Screen Adjustment
Screens can be designed in a number of different ways. Regardless of whether the screen rolls on rollers at the
sill, or is mounted to a roller housing in the head, minor adjustments can be made. If the screen has rollers at the
sill, check the opposing ends of the screen frame for access holes, which will allow for adjustment of the screen. If
the screen is mounted with rollers at the head, screen adjustment should be accomplished either from the ends,
or from the face of the screen. By turning the adjustment screws, the screen will either raise or lower at each end
to insure smooth operation.
24.5
24.5.1
Maintenance of Hinged Glass Doors
Check hinged glass doors for proper operation. This includes the swing of the door and proper locking.
When the locking device does not operate smoothly, check to find out why and adjust the lock and/or keeper as
required. The lock should operate with little pressure applied against the door when being closed.
24.5.2
Hinge Adjustment
To check the hinge operation, open the door 90 degrees; and from a stationary position, swing the door closed
using little force. If the door shows evidence of resistance to closing, some minor adjustment may be necessary.
Depending on the type of hinge used, the installer may find room for adjustment in the hinge itself, or may need to
simply tighten up on the screws penetrating the jamb condition.
24.6
Field Re-Glazing Techniques
On occasion, the materials that are pre-glazed into the window or door units will get damaged. This may include
broken glass, scratched panels or any number of other problems.
As opposed to returning the entire frame for re-work, the installer may choose to re-glaze the unit. Always consult
with the manufacturer for any specific instructions relative to disassembly of the framing, the re-glazing
requirements, and the proper use of sealants, tapes and spacers, before initiating service work.
The following is an explanation of some of the terms and techniques used for re-glazing in the field. In these
examples, glass is used for explanation purposes; however, the same techniques apply to any smooth surface
infill material.
Note: Always use extreme caution when handling glass, as serious personal injury and damage can occur.
Always use safety glasses and glass-handling-gloves when performing this type of work.
PAGE 24-3
24.6.1
Marine Glazing
Marine glazing is common in hung and sliding windows. Marine glazing consists of a channel-shaped gasket that
wraps completely around the glass unit (see Figure 24-1).
Figure 24-1 Marine Glazing
The way to tell if the product is marine glazed is to look for a gasket of consistent thickness on both the interior
and exterior sides. Additionally, a joint at the top center of the unit can often be seen. Another sign is the lack of a
glazing bead (i.e. the sash must be disassembled in order to remove the infill).
To re-glaze a marine glazed sash, use the following techniques:
1. Remove any loose particles of glass from the sash, and/or secure the glass in place.
•
If broken glass remains in the sash, apply tape over the glass surface to help stabilize it during sash
removal.
2. Remove the operable sash. The method of removal will depend on the type of window. Consult with the
manufacturer for specific cautions regarding hardware and sash removal.
3. Place the sash on a worktable, and use a screwdriver to remove any screws that were used to assemble the
sash together. Generally, the screws will be at the top and bottom of each vertical member (see Figure 24-2).
PAGE 24-4
Figure 24-2 Removing Screws and Gasket
4. Using a wood or nylon block and a rubber mallet, gently tap the rail off the marine glazing and glass.
•
Remove the two vertical members first, then the horizontal members. Remember how these materials
came off, so they can be reinstalled over another piece of glass in the same manner.
•
Once the frame is removed, the marine glazing gasket can be taken completely off the glass. Check the
marine glazing gasket for any remaining glass particles or debris that might be embedded in the gasket.
5. Re-install the same marine glazing gasket over the new piece of glass (must be the same size and thickness),
reversing the steps used to remove the gasket.
•
Make sure to check the glass to determine which is the top/bottom and which is the interior/exterior
before reassembling the sash.
•
Start at the top center of the glass, at the splice location, and complete installation around the entire
perimeter. Don’t over stretch the gasket.
•
Check the horizontal members for weep holes, and make sure they are clear of any debris.
•
Center the horizontal members in place and over the gasket/glass, and tap them into place with the
rubber mallet.
•
Tap the vertical members in place, making sure the intersection with the coping of the horizontal lines up
properly.
•
Secure the verticals in place and re-check the corner joinery to make sure everything lines up. Apply the
fasteners back into the assembly holes. Do not over tighten.
Note: Fastener lengths may vary; be sure to place them back into the correct hole.
6. Once the sash is re-assembled, check the marine glazing gasket to ensure it is lying flat, centered within the
frame and that there are no distortions in the gasket.
7. Examine the sash joinery and seal any excess gaps/joints with matching sealant.
8. Re-assemble the sash to the frame, making sure the hardware is applied properly, the sash is secured back
into position and that the sash works properly.
PAGE 24-5
24.6.2
Wet-Glazing/Tape-Glazing
The term wet-glazing/tape-glazing has to do with the way the glass is glazed (or sealed) into the sash. Wetglazing typically involves the use of sealant on the exterior side of the sash, while tape-glazing uses a foam or
butyl tape. Both typically involve a gasket and glazing bead on the interior side (see Figure 24-3).
Figure 24-3 Wet Glazing System
The following procedures are relevant to interior glazed units. If the units are exterior glazed, reverse the process
(i.e. the position from which the work is performed).
Removal of a wet/tape glazed product will require access to the exterior in order to cut away the sealant or tape.
On fixed lites, this will require someone to go to the exterior, while another person stays on the interior to help
secure the glass.
Use the following procedures for removal and replacement of the glass:
1.
First, remove the interior glazing beads from the sash. Start by removing the shorter pieces (typically the
pieces that butt against the opposing beads).
•
Check the gasket in the glazing bead to find out if it is removable. If it is removable (wedge type), take all
of the gaskets out before proceeding. This will reduce the pressure against the glazing bead. If the gasket
is not removable (bulb type), you should be able to compress the glazing bead toward the exterior with
minimal effort.
•
Use a putty knife and rubber mallet to remove the glazing bead. Try to pry in and up on the glazing bead
(directly at the metal to metal joint), while tapping the putty knife with the mallet.
•
Use caution and avoid damaging the glazing beads and gaskets, as they will be reused to install the new
piece of glass.
PAGE 24-6
2.
If the glass has been sealed with a “heel bead” (see Section 24.6.4), cut through the bead with a utility knife
along the glass edge.
3.
From the exterior, using a utility knife or other appropriate tool, cut through the wet/tape glazing material until
the glass is free around the entire perimeter.
•
When cutting the seal, apply moderate pressure against the glass, pushing it toward the interior to help
ease the cutting process.
•
Make sure there is an assistant on the interior to keep the glass from falling out of the opening on the
interior.
4.
Once the glass is removed, re-check the opening and prepare it for the new piece of glass.
•
Remove the setting blocks and make sure they are saved to put back in the same position when installing
the new glass.
•
If a heel bead was used, remove all residual tape/sealant material on the exterior glazing leg and around
the perimeter.
•
Clean the entire area with an approved solvent such as Isopropyl Alcohol or Mineral Spirits (consult the
sealant supplier before choosing a solvent) before applying any new glazing tape or sealant.
•
5.
Check to make sure the weep holes are clear of any debris.
Depending on whether the glass was “wet-glazed” or “tape-glazed,” use one of the following techniques for
re-glazing. Make sure the glass is properly cleaned before glazing it into the frame.
Wet Glazing (Gunnable Sealant)
•
Apply spacers of an appropriate size and material on the exterior leg of the frame to keep the glass from
contacting the glazing leg (see Figure 24-4).
Figure 24-4 Spacer Application for Wet Glazing
PAGE 24-7
•
Apply a consistent bead of sealant to the glazing leg around the entire perimeter of the frame.
•
Re-install the setting blocks and edge blocks back into the proper position. Consult the manufacturer,
IGMA or GANA standards for setting block locations if unsure where they go.
•
Using a piece of glass that is the same size and thickness set the glass in place in the sealant. Make sure
the glass is evenly spaced into the opening.
•
If a heel bead was previously used, reapply it now in accordance with the heel bead application
instructions in Section 24.6.4.
•
If the glazing bead was applied with a wedge gasket, apply it after the glazing bead is installed. If a bulb
gasket was used, it should be pre-applied to the glazing bead.
•
Re-apply the glazing beads starting with the longest pieces first, followed by the shorter pieces. Use a
rubber mallet to snap them into position.
Tape Glazing (Foam or Butyl)
•
Apply the tape (with protective backing on) into position on the glazing leg around the entire perimeter of
the frame. Make sure the tape is parallel with the outside edge (exposed surface) of the glazing leg, and
positioned in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
•
The protective backing is to remain on until after the glass is ready to be installed. Make sure that the
corners of the tape are squarely cut, and butt to each other completely. Do not overlap or stretch the tape
to make it fit.
Joints should occur at the corners only. Apply a compatible sealant (as recommended by the sealant supplier)
to the joints in the tape at the corners.
•
Re-install the setting blocks and edge blocks back into the proper position. Consult the manufacturer,
IGMA or GANA standards for setting block locations if unsure where they go.
•
Remove the protective backing and set the glass in place onto the tape. Make sure the glass is evenly
spaced in the opening before setting it into position.
•
If a heel bead was previously used, re-apply it now in accordance with the heel bead application
instructions in Section 24.6.4.
•
Re-apply the glazing beads starting with the longest pieces first, followed by the shorter pieces. Use a
rubber mallet to snap them into position.
•
If the glazing bead was applied with a wedge gasket, apply it after the glazing bead is installed. If a bulb
gasket was used, it should be pre-applied to the glazing bead.
24.6.3
Dry Glazing
The term dry glazing typically involves the use of gaskets on both sides of the glass. In the case of dry glazing,
the exterior gasket is usually a pre-set gasket, while the interior gasket involves the use of glazing beads with coextruded fins orand a wedge gasket (see Figure 24-5).
PAGE 24-8
Figure 24-5 Dry Glazing System for Aluminum (left) and Vinyl (right)
Removal of a dry glazed product can typically be done from the interior unless the system is exterior glazed,
which would require the installer to perform the work on the exterior.
The following procedures are relevant to interior glazed units. If the units are exterior glazed, reverse the process
(i.e., the position from which the work is performed).
Use the following procedures for removal and replacement of the glass:
1. Remove the interior glazing beads from the sash. Start by removing the shorter pieces (typically the pieces
that butt against the opposing beads).
•
Check the gasket in the glazing bead to find out if it is removable. If it is removable (wedge type), take all
of the gaskets out before proceeding. This will reduce the pressure against the glazing bead. If the gasket
is not removable (bulb type), you should be able to compress the glazing bead toward the exterior with
minimal effort.
•
Use a putty knife and rubber mallet to remove the glazing bead. Try to pry in and up on the glazing bead
(directly at the metal to metal or vinyl joint), while tapping the putty knife with the mallet.
•
Use caution and avoid damaging the glazing beads and gaskets, as they will be re-used to install the new
piece of glass.
2. If the glass has been sealed with a “heel bead” (see Section 24.6.4), cut through the bead with a utility knife
along the glass edge.
3. If the glass is still in one piece, use a rigid/wide blade putty knife at the top of the unit to help pry the glass
free from the exterior gaskets. Glass suction cups can also be used to help release the glass. (Never apply a
suction cup to a broken piece of glass.)
4. With the glass removed, re-check the opening and prepare it for the new piece of glass.
•
Remove the setting blocks and make sure they are saved to put back in the same position when installing
the new glass.
PAGE 24-9
•
Remove all residual sealant around the perimeter if a heel bead was used.
•
Make sure any weep holes are clear of debris, which could restrict the drainage of moisture.
•
Clean the entire area with an approved solvent such as Isopropyl Alcohol or Mineral Spirits (consult the
sealant supplier before choosing a solvent) before applying any new sealant.
•
Re-check the exterior gasket and make sure it is ready for installation of the new piece of glass. Check
the gasket to make sure it is properly seated and that the corners are not deformed.
6.
Re-install the setting blocks back into the proper position. Consult the manufacturer, IGMA or GANA
standards for setting block locations if unsure what to do.
7.
Using a piece of glass that is the same size and thickness, re-set the glass into the sash. Make sure to center
the glass equally in the opening. Check the exterior gaskets to ensure they have not become displaced in the
process. If they have, remove the glass and try again.
8.
If a heel bead was previously used, reapply it now according to the heel bead application instructions in
Section 24.6.4.
9.
Re-apply the glazing beads starting with the longest pieces first, followed by the shorter pieces. Use a rubber
mallet if necessary to snap them into position.
10. If the glazing bead was applied with a wedge gasket, apply it after the glazing bead is installed. If a bulb
gasket was use, it should be pre-applied to the glazing bead.
•
When applying a wedge gasket, use a wooden or nylon block and a rubber mallet to help wedge the
gasket between the glazing bead and the glass.
•
Insert the longest pieces first, followed by the shorter pieces. Start by inserting each end into the corners,
then a section at the middle, followed by progressively inserting the remaining length a bit at a time until
the entire wedge gasket has been inserted (see Figure 24-6). When complete the wedge gasket should
be smooth and free of any waves.
PAGE 24-10
Figure 24-6 Installation of Wedge Gasket
11. Check the corners to ensure they butt tight together. If any voids exist, use a matching sealant to seal the
joint.
24.6.4
Application of a Heel Bead
A “heel bead” is a line of sealant applied between the edge of a piece of glass or panel, and the frame of a
window or door (see Figure 24-7). There are two types of heel beads. A “partial heel bead” is typically found along
the bottom of the unit and up the jamb 6" to 12”. A “full heel bead” is found around the entire perimeter of the
glazing.
To reapply a heel bead, use the following steps:
1.
First, make sure the surface to receive the new sealant is properly cleaned and prepared.
2.
If there is enough space, apply a backer rod between the glass and the frame to help control the joint depth.
3.
Apply the sealant into the joint, pushing the sealant into the joint.
4.
Tool the sealant, compressing the sealant into the joint and against the glass and the frame, removing any air
bubbles.
5.
Use caution not to over-seal the joint. Do not get sealant into any hooks or engagement legs that are used to
retain the glazing bead.
PAGE 24-11
Figure 24-7 Application of a Heel Bead and
Cap Bead
24.6.5
Application of a Cap Bead
A “cap bead” is a line of sealant applied between the exterior face of the glass or panel and the frame of a window
or door (see Figure 24-7).
To re-apply a cap bead, use the following steps:
1.
First, make sure the surface to receive the new sealant is properly cleaned and prepared.
2.
Apply the sealant into the joint, pushing the sealant into the joint.
3.
Tool the sealant, compressing the sealant into the joint and against the glass and the frame, removing any air
bubbles.
24.7
Field Glass Cutting and Handling
There may be an occasion where the installer needs to cut a new piece of glass for re-glazing into the frame.
Glass cutting and the sealing of insulating glass should always be done in the shop where quality control and
cleaning can be properly maintained. Cutting of single lite, annealed glass can be accomplished in the field using
the following recommendations.
When field cutting is required, the installer must work safely. This includes the use of safety glasses, proper glass
handling gloves and the correct tools. The installer should also understand the importance of properly disposing
of any remaining glass pieces (scraps), which may cause a safety issue to others around the job site.
The following tips for glass cutting and handling are offered to the installer:
24.7.1
Measuring and Scoring
Accurate measuring is critical to the job of replacing glass. This includes the length and width of the score
(sometimes called “cut”) as well as making sure the score is square when finished. Typically a pre-designed
clearance has been established between the glass cut size and the frame; therefore the finished cut should be
±1/16” of the desired size in order to maintain the proper clearance.
PAGE 24-12
Prior to marking the replacement piece, accurately measure the existing piece of glass to determine the desired
size. Once the score is made on the glass, there is no opportunity to make a change, so pre-planning and
accuracy are critical.
Always use an appropriate straight edge to mark and score the glass. This may include a wood, rigid plastic or
metal straight edge of a sufficient length and strength. Glass handlers will often use a specially designed TSquare or L-Square for this purpose (see Figure 24-8).
Figure 24-8 Glass Measuring/Marking Tools
When marking glass for scoring, use the appropriate tools. There are a variety of glass markers, pencils and felt
tip pens available to the installer. Whatever the choice for a marker, make sure that the marks can be easily seen
prior to scoring, yet easily removed with a damp cloth.
Set up a solid work surface (table) to measure and score the glass. If at all possible, use a piece of carpet or
padding over the table to provide a smooth surface to work on (see Figure 24-9). The use of carpet or padding will
also help avoid scratching the glass surface.
Tip: Cut the opposite side of the “tin” side of the glass, as the cutter will skip on the "tin" side. If not known,
consult the glass manufacturer to determine the "tin" side of the glass.
PAGE 24-13
Figure 24-9 Setting Up a Work Table
Glass scoring tools available for use in the field are commonly hand-held wheel cutters. These cutters have been
used for years for this purpose. Some cutters work best when used in conjunction with cutting oil. Before
attempting to score a piece of glass, check the following:
•
The cutter is clean and in good condition.
•
The cutting edge is free of any damage and the wheel rotates freely.
•
The glass surface is flat and smooth.
Note: It is also a good idea for the installer to make a few attempts to score the glass by using some scrap pieces
of a similar piece of material. This will ensure that the wheel is working properly and that the installer becomes
accustomed to the amount of pressure required to make a clean score.
•
With the straight edge clamped in position along the marked line, start at the top, scoring the glass using the
cutter. Often, the cutter works best when rotated 5 degrees from vertical.
•
Using a consistent amount of pressure, score the glass surface in a smooth stroke. The installer should
position himself in such a way as to be able to make as long a score as possible before stopping. Be firm, yet
do not apply excessive force.
Note: Listen for the sound of the glass being scored by the cutter. The sound should be consistent and the cutter
should score easily.
•
If it is necessary to stop scoring before completing the first cut, be sure to start back at the point where the cut
ended; this is critical to making a clean break later.
•
To finish the score, continue the scoring motion, running the cutter off the edge of the glass at the end of the
stroke.
•
A good score can be seen as a very fine line along the glass surface. If the line is not smooth, the edges may
end up being rough when the glass is broken in the next step.
PAGE 24-14
24.7.2
Breaking the Glass
Breaking the glass (or removing the portion to be discarded later) seems to be the most difficult part of the
process. This work requires a “feel” only gained through experience. The glass needs to be broken in one smooth
snapping process, although longer cut lengths may require more than one snap.
Prior to trying to snap the glass, the installer may wish to use the tapping ball (located on the end of the cutter) to
help complete the fracture. This is accomplished by consistently tapping along the score line on the backside of
the glass.
Once the glass is scored and ready for breaking, move the glass so that the unwanted portion hangs over the
edge of the table. Position the scored edge along the edge of the table (see Figure 24-10). Use the following
techniques to complete the break:
•
Grasp the unwanted portion of the glass with both hands, while allowing the desired portion to remain laying
flat on the table. Place your thumbs along the score line on the topside, while applying pressure with the other
four fingers along the under side.
•
Making a snapping motion should easily break the glass. Snap the glass by slightly raising the glass up off the
table and then snapping it back down over the edge of the table in one smooth action.
•
Another method that can be used is to place a rod under the glass along the cut line; this will allow the glass
to come off the edge of the table. With this process, grasp the glass with both hands as instructed earlier, and
apply pressure downward in a smooth, deliberate, snapping action.
Figure 24-10 Breaking the Glass
Notes:_____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_________
PAGE 24-15
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Acoustics
The science of sound and sound control.
Aerosol Foam Sealant
A sealant that is formed and expands in volume as it is dispensed under pressure from a container using a
propellant.
Air Barrier
The assembly of materials used in building construction to cut down on the passage of air in and out of the
building.
Air Leakage
In buildings, the passage of uncontrolled air through cracks or openings in the building envelope or its
components, such as ducts, due to air pressure or temperature difference. Also referred to as Air Infiltration. A
characteristic of a closed window that restricts air passage when the window is subjected to a differential in
pressure. The test pressure differential is intended to represent those pressures acting on a window as a
combination of wind, stack-effect, etc.
Airspace
The space between lites (panes) of insulating glass.
Anchor
Any device used to secure a building part or component to adjoining construction or a supporting member. See
also Floor Anchor and Jamb Anchor.
Annealed Glass
Raw glass used as a glazing product. Further processing is required to transform annealed glass into safety glass.
Anodic Finishes
Anodic coatings are composed of aluminum oxide and are an integral part of the aluminum substrate. Careful
control is essential to the electrolytic anodizing process, and it provides substantial improvement over the natural
oxide film due to the greater thickness, density and hardness of these factory-produced finishes. They may be
clear (natural) or colored. Color is electrolytically deposited or integral. Pre-anodic chemical treatments clean and
prepare the aluminum for the anodic finish. The Aluminum Association classifies architectural anodic coatings
depending on coating thickness and recommended use. Further detailed information and specifications on anodic
finishes are available from the American Architectural Manufacturers Association and the Aluminum Association.
PAGE A1-1
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Backer Rod
A material placed into a joint, primarily to control the depth and shape of the sealant. Also serves as a bond
breaker.
Barrier Systems
The location of the weatherability is determined by the integrity of the first (exterior) surface of the wall and the first
surface of the window or door. The two surfaces are usually connected together by a sealant joint, effectively
creating a water barrier for the building.
Bead
A sealant after application in a joint, irrespective of the method of application, such as sealant bead, glazing bead,
etc. A strip of metal or wood used around the periphery of a lite of glass to secure it in place (also referred to as a
stop). A strip of sealant, glazing compound or putty.
Bite
Amount of overlap between the stop and the panel or lite. The distance that the surrounding member (rail or stile)
overlaps the glazing.
Bituminous
Describing cement, mastic or roofing, indicating a product in which asphalt is a major ingredient.
Blind Stop
A rectangular molding attached to the side and head of a window to serve as a stop for storm windows and
screens.
Bond Breaker
A material used to prevent three-sided adhesion in sealant joints.
Brake Shape
Sheet stock bent or “broken” to a desired shape, as required by specific job, on a power or manual brake machine.
This shape is often used to cover conditions which cannot be covered by a stock shape.
Brick Mold
An exterior trim molding forming a boundary between bricks or other siding and a window or door. It is sometimes
provided with a recess to receive a screen or storm door.
Buck
A rough wooden framework built into a window or door opening in a concrete or masonry wall, to which the window
or door frame is secured.
PAGE A1-2
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Building Envelope
The outer elements of a building, both above and below ground, that divide the external from the internal
environments.
Butt Joint
A meeting of two members squarely end to end.
Buttering
Application of sealant compound to the flat surface of some member before placing the member in position, such
as the buttering of a removable stop before fastening the stop in place.
Cap Bead
A beveled seal applied to the top of the glazing rabbet to shed water away from the glazed infill.
Check Rail, Meeting Rail
A horizontal member that meets to fill the opening between the sash when the sash are closed.
Check Stile, Meeting Stile
A vertical member that meets to fill the opening between the sash when the sash are closed.
Cladding System
Material assembly applied to a building as a non-load-bearing wall, or attached to a wall surface as a protective
and ornamental covering.
Compatibility
The ability of two or more materials to exist in close association for an indefinite period with no adverse effect of
one on the other.
Complete Window Replacement
The installation of a replacement window, where the previously installed window is completely removed.
Composite Materials
Window and door members that are comprised of two or more materials. They are structurally combined or
connected so as to perform structurally as a singular material (e.g., poured and debridged aluminum shapes,
fiberglass, and man-made wood products).
Compound
A formulation of ingredients, usually grouped as vehicle or polymer pigment and fillers, to produce caulking
compound, elastomeric joint sealant, etc.
PAGE A1-3
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Compression Gasket
A gasket designed to function under compression.
Condensation
The deposition of moisture (liquid or frost) on the surface of an object, caused by warm, moist air coming into
contact with a colder object.
Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF)
A rating number obtained under standard test conditions which allows the prediction, within reasonable accuracy,
of the ability of a window, door or glazed wall to resist the formation of condensation on interior surfaces.
Construction Documents
Architectural drawings, specifications, shop drawings, manufacturing details, test reports or contracts, building
permits, applicable codes.
Curing
Chemical process of developing ultimate properties of a finish or other material over a specified period of time.
Compare to Drying.
Curing Agent
One part of a two-part sealant, which, when added to the base, will cause the base to change its physical state by
chemical reaction between the two parts.
Dead Load
Load from the permanent parts of a building or structure; loads on glass from twist or camber in framing members
are dead loads.
Design Pressure (DP)
The wind load pressure a product is designed to withstand.
Deflection
A measurement of sash members or mullions bending under applied pressure or force.
Divider
A solid element other than a frame or sash that is used to create divided lites, including muntins as well as grilles
that lie between the indoor and outdoor glass layers.
Drainage Wall System
See Membrane/Drainage System.
PAGE A1-4
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Dry Glazing
A flexible seal made from rubber, vinyl, etc., or other acceptable material that does not have adhesive properties.
Durometer
An instrument used to measure hardness of a material. Shore Hardness is a commonly used hardness
measurement scale.
Egress
A means of exiting. An egress window is one that is large enough for an adult to exit the room in case of an
emergency. The size will be defined by national or local building codes.
Elastomer
An elastic, rubber-like substance, such as natural or synthetic rubber.
Electrolysis
Chemical decomposition of metal surface by the action of dissimilar metals and moisture.
End Dam
Any means provided to stop the flow of water out from the ends of the sill, panning system or subsill and into the
wall cavity, such as, but not limited to, sealants, upstands, plates or gasketing.
Expansion Joint
A separation between building elements that allows independent movement without damage to the assembly.
Exposed Surfaces
Those surfaces which are visible when the coated product is installed. These may include both closed and open
positions of operating sash, ventilators, doors or panels.
Exterior Glazed
Glazing infills set from the exterior of the building.
Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)
A nonload-bearing outdoor wall finish system consisting of a thermal insulation board, an attachment system, a
reinforced base coat, exterior joint sealant and a compatible finish.
Fillet Bead
Caulking or sealant installed at the intersection of two surfaces which meet at an angle, often 90 degrees.
Fixed Window
PAGE A1-5
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
A frame containing a fixed lite(s).
Flashing
Sheet material that bridges and protects the joint (gap) between the window or door frame members, and the
adjacent construction. Its purpose is to prevent water penetration by draining water away from the window or door
to the exterior. See also Through-Wall Flashing.
Flashing System
Integrated system of flashings intended to move incidental water to the building exterior.
Frame
The outside perimeter of a window or door consisting of two side jamb members, one head member and one sill
member. In a window, the frame will hold the glass lites or sash panels. An assembly of structural members that
surround and support the sash, ventilators, doors, panels or glazing that is installed into an opening in a building
envelope or wall.
Galvanic Corrosion
A form of deterioration of metal resulting from the electrochemical reaction that occurs when certain dissimilar
metals are in contact with each other in the presence of moisture.
Gasket
Preformed shapes (strips, grommets, etc.) of rubber or rubber-like composition, used to fill and seal a joint or
opening, either alone or in conjunction with a supplemental application of a sealant.
Gateway Performance Requirements
The requirements for minimum gateway test size, air leakage resistance, structural design load and overload
testing, water penetration testing, forced-entry resistance, and auxillary testing which are the conditions permitting
a product entry into a performance class. They are specifically indicated for each product operator type in
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440.
Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete (GFRC)
A specialty concrete wall system.
Glazing
Window sash and door panel infills that contain glass, or glass-like materials. A material installed in a sash,
ventilator or panel such as glass, plastic, etc.
Head
The horizontal member forming the top of the frame.
PAGE A1-6
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Head Expander (Extender)
An inverted U-channel installation accessory that may be fitted to the head of a replacement window to
accommodate differences between rough opening and window heights.
Header
See Lintel.
Heel Bead
Sealant applied at the base of a channel, after setting the lite or panel, and before the removable stop is installed,
to prevent leakage past the stop. Sealant must bridge the gap between the glass and frame.
Inorganic
Designating or composed of matter that is not animal or vegetable; designating or composed of any chemical
compound not classified as organic. Most inorganic compounds do not contain carbon and are derived from
mineral sources.
Insulating Glass Unit
Two or more lites of glass spaced apart and hermetically sealed in a factory.
Jamb
A vertical member of a window or door frame; also called Side Jamb. The upright or vertical members forming the
side of the frame. The horizontal member across the top may be referred to as the Head Jamb.
Level
Having a horizontally flat, even surface with no irregularities and no vertical tilt. No part of the surface is higher or
lower than any other part.
Lift Rail
A horizontal member applied to the top or bottom of the glass, and used to operate the sash.
Lite
One piece of glazing (preferred term).Another term for a pane of glass used in a window.
Lintel
A horizontal structural member (beam) that supports the load over an opening, such as that of a door or window.
Also called a Header.
Live Loads
Loads from people and non-permanent parts of a building; loads from window washing and glazing rigs are live
PAGE A1-7
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
loads.
Mastic
A material composition that, after application as a thin layer, is converted to a solid protective, decorative or
functional adherent film.
Mechanical Fastening
The method employed to join together two or more components of a window using a mechanical device such as a
screw, rivet, etc.
Meeting Rails
The horizontal members or rails of a pair of sash that meet when the sash are installed and in a closed position.
Meeting Stiles
The vertical members or stiles of a pair of sash that meet when the sash are installed and in a closed position.
A wall design that utilizes a water resistive barrier as the weather barrier behind the exterior surface of the
assembly.
Mill Finishes
Uncoated aluminum that possesses a silvery, natural finish.
Mulled
Where two windows are joined together at a mullion.
Mullion
An intermediate connecting member used to "join" two or more windows or doors together in a single rough
opening.
Muntin
A vertical or horizontal sash member that separates two or more lights within a sash.
Organic
Designating or composed of any chemical compound containing carbon; derived from living organisms.
Organic Finishes
Organic coatings including paints, enamels and resins. A wide range of colors is achieved through the addition of
pigments. For further detailed information concerning organic coatings on aluminum, contact the American
PAGE A1-8
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
Pan/Panning
Cosmetic covering, usually found on the exterior of the window or door to achieve aesthetic sight lines, or to
integrate the window or door system into the building surface or weatherproofing system. If panning is being used
for weatherability, the panning is not considered cosmetic, but rather part of the window system.
Permanent Deformation
A change in shape or dimension that does not disappear when pressures are no longer applied.
Plumb
To make vertical.
Pressure Differential (∆P)
The difference between the absolute air pressure on the external surface of a window or glass door, and the
absolute air pressure on the internal surface of the same window or glass door. The difference is positive when
the external pressure is higher than the internal pressure. When the external pressure is lower than the internal
pressure, the difference is negative. This pressure differential is expressed in pounds per square foot (psf) or in
Pascals (Pa).
Primary Seal
The seal beyond which no water is allowed to pass. It is the location within the wall construction that is ultimately
responsible for maintaining water impermeability between the interior and exterior of a building envelope.
Prime Window (Primary Window)
The first window completely installed in a rough opening, which is designed to function as the sole window or door
(contrasted to a storm window, which serves as a secondary window in conjunction with a primary window).
Pultrusion
Fiberglass reinforced polymer (plastic) structural members having a constant cross-section. Pultruded window or
door members are typically polyester polymer reinforced by continuous fiberglass filaments.
Rail
The horizontal piece of sash or screen frame.
Relative Humidity
The amount of water vapor in the air as a percentage of the maximum amount the air could hold at the same
temperature.
PAGE A1-9
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Remodel
To replace or improve a building or its components.
Replacement Installation
Installation of a window or door that is designed for replacement of existing like and type product(s), by either
destructive or nondestructive installation methods.
Replacement Window or Door
A window/door that is designed for, and subsequently installed after, removal of all, or part, of a previously
installed window.
Retrofit
To add new materials or equipment not provided at the time of original construction.
Rough Opening
The opening in a wall or roof into which a window or glass door is to be installed.
R-Value
Thermal Resistance = 1/U-value
Safety Glass
Annealed glass that undergoes further processing. The characteristic of safety glass is that it reduces the
possibility of severe injury upon accidental impact. There are two types of safety glass that meet the CPSC-federal
standard, 16 CFR 1201, Cat. II:
Tempered and Laminated
Tempered glass, through a heat strengthening process, becomes four times stronger than annealed glass and when
broken, separates into dice-like cubes approximately the thickness of the glass.
Laminated Glass
Two lites of glass sandwiched together with an interlayer of polyvinyl butyral (PVB) under heat and pressure.
Laminated glass when broken tends to remain intact.
Safety Glazing
The use of safety glass and certain plastics in hazardous locations. Building codes require safety glazing in two
broad types of hazardous locations: (1) Glazing subject to accidental human impact, such as in doors, sidelites
(glazing next to doors), other glazing that extends to or near the floor or walking surface, and glazing in the walls
and enclosures of bathing compartments. (2) Skylights or sloped glazing in walls and roofs greater than 15
degrees from the vertical. Laminated glass or certain plastics are required to reduce the possibility of any part of
the glazing from vacating the glazed opening when broken.
PAGE A1-10
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Sash
An assembly of one or more lites of glazing, encompassed by surrounding edge members, which, when operable,
slides in the plane of the window. The term "sash" can be used regardless of the mode of operation.
Sealant
Any of a variety of compounds used to fill and seal joints or openings in wood, metal, masonry and other materials,
as contrasted to a sealer, which is a liquid used to seal a porous surface. Some common types of sealants are:
neoprene, polysulfide rubber, silicone, acrylic latex, butyl rubber and polyurethane.
Seismic Load
Building movement and forces caused by earthquake motion.
Setting Block
A small piece of neoprene or other suitable material used to position a piece of glass in its frame.
Shading Coefficient (SC)
The ratio of solar heat gain through a window, under a specific set of conditions, to the solar heat gain through a 3
mm sheet of clear, double-strength glass under the same conditions. Included is the directly transmitted solar
radiation, as well as the solar energy absorbed and then redirected to the indoor space.
Shim
A thin, flat or wedge-shaped piece of suitable material used to level or plumb a window or door frame during
installation. Lateral shims are placed at the jambs; setting shims are placed at the sill.
Sight-Line
The line defining the perimeter of the daylight opening of a window. It may be formed by the sash, spacer
assembly or the glazing stop.
Sill
A lower horizontal member of a window or sliding door frame. The main cross or horizontal member forming the
bottom of the frame.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC)
The ratio of solar heat gain through a window component to the solar radiation incident on it, for a given angle of
incidence, and for given environmental conditions (indoor temperature, outdoor temperature, wind speed and solar
radiation). Included is the directly transmitted solar radiation, as well as the solar energy absorbed and then
redirected to the indoor space.
PAGE A1-11
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Spandrel
The opaque area of a building envelope which typically occur at locations of floor slabs, columns and immediately
below roof areas.
Square
Two construction members that meet at a right (90°) angle. In fenestration, the condition in which the jambs are
perpendicular to the head and sills.
Stile
The vertical piece of sash or screen frame.
Stool
Horizontal interior trim at the base of a single hung or double hung window (often mistakenly called the sill). The
flat, narrow shelf forming the top member of the interior trim at the bottom of a window.
Stop
In glazing, a strip of metal or wood used around the periphery of a pane of glass to secure it in place. Also defined
as the narrow trim along the jamb and head that limits the swing of a door or hinged windows, or creates a
channel for a sliding sash.
Storm Window
An exterior-mounted window intended for use in conjunction with a separate interior prime window.
Stucco
Cementitious mixture used for exterior plaster.
Subsill
A separate framing member that, when installed on the underside of a sill, becomes an integral part of the sill.
Terne (Metal)
An alloy of lead and tin applied to steel by dipping steel into molten terne metal. The alloy has a dull appearance
resulting from the high lead content.
Thermal Barrier
The insertion of a non-heat-conducting material between two conductive members, thus avoiding heat transfer.
Through-Wall Flashing
Flashing that extends completely underneath the sill, or over the head of a window, and has an upturned leg on
the interior side.
PAGE A1-12
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Tooling
The operation of pressing in and striking sealant in a joint; to press the sealant against the sides of a joint and
secure good adhesion; the finishing off of the surface of a sealant in a joint so that it is flush with the surface.
Total Glass Thickness
The sum of the thicknesses of all layers of glass in the window, not including the thickness of any glazing cavities.
U-Factor
Indicates the rate heat flows through a product for each degree of temperature difference between one side and
the other. U-Factor is the inverse of R-Value. The lower the U-Factor, the greater a window’s resistance to heat
flow, and the better its insulating value.
Unit
Refers to a complete window, door or skylight assembly, including frame, sash (or door slab) and glass.
Upstand
The vertical portion of a panning, flashing or subsill system that prevents the migration of collected water behind
the membrane or into the wall cavity. Collected water is drained to the building exterior.
Vapor Retarder (Vapor Barrier)
Material used in the house envelope to retard the passage of water vapor or moisture.
Visible Light Transmission
The fraction of the visible portion of the solar spectrum that is transmitted through the glazing (VLT g ) or window
(VLT w ).
Wall
One of the sides of a room or building connecting floor and ceiling or foundation and roof.
Water Penetration
The penetration of water that would continuously, or repeatedly, wet parts of a building or components not
designed to be wetted.
Water Resistant Barrier (WRB)
The surface(s) of a wall responsible for preventing water infiltration into the building interior. In Surface Barrier
Systems, the exterior-most surface is the Water Resistant Barrier (WRB). In Membrane/Drainage Systems, the
membrane applied behind the exterior surface is the Water Resistant Barrier (WRB).
PAGE A1-13
GLOSSARY
APPENDIX 1
Weather-Stripping
Material around operating lites designed to reduce air leakage, water penetration, or both.
Wet Glazing
Glazing compounds (e.g., glazing tapes, sealants and adhesives) that are applied to the exterior, interior or both,
that interface between the glass and sash or glazing.
Window Cleaner Anchor
An anchor, either single or double headed, conforming to ASME A39.1 Standard Safety Requirements for Window
Cleaning, that will allow a window cleaner to safely access across a window for cleaning. Also known as a Davit.
PAGE A1-14
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMNS
APPENDIX 2
°F
Degrees Fahrenheit
AAMA
ALC
Air Leakage Control
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM
American Society for Testing Materials
BOCA
Building Officials and Code Administrators
BTU
British Thermal Unit
CABO
Council of American Building Officials
cfm
Cubic Feet per Minute (also CFM)
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
CPSC
Consumer Products Safety Commission
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
PAGE A2-1
APPENDIX 2
DOE
(United States) Department of Energy
DP
Design Pressure
EIFS
Exterior Insulation and Finish System
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
F.S.
Federal Specifications
GANA
Glass Association of North America
GFRC
Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete
HVAC
Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
IBC
International Building Code
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
ICC
International Code Council
IWC
Inches of Water Column (also iwc)
PAGE A2-2
APPENDIX 2
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
O.C.
On Center
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Pa
Pascal (unit of pressure)
PG
Performance Grade
psf
Pounds per Square Foot
SBCCI
Southern Building Code Conference International
UBC
Uniform Building Code
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
UV
Ultraviolet
WDMA
Window and Door Manufacturers Association (formerly NWWDA)
PAGE A2-3

Table of Contents 1.1.1 Purpose of the Manual

Transcription

Similar documents

Your Advanced Window and Door Solutions Provider

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

Glass instructions

Installation Instructions

Use In Correctional Facilities As High Strength Pick

Press Release

model vp180.b5 - Visiport Spin Window Systems

Inspiring Surface Design

Design and implementation of Curtain Wall System

7000 Series Sliding Doors